Honda Jazz Service Manual PDF

10/10/25 18:28:46 32TF0630_001
This owners manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it
is sold.
This owners manual covers all versions. Therefore, you may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not
on your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing.
Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
Although this manual is applicable to both right-hand and left-hand drive models, the illustrations contained in this
manual mainly refer to the left-hand drive models.
10/10/25 18:28:55 32TF0630_002
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection was a wise investment. It will give you years As you read this manual, you will
of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your vehicle, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owners manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
(On German type)
Several other booklets explain the warranties that protect your new vehicle. 1. Mounting the front licence plate:
Read the Service Book/warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the Mount the front licence plate to
coverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities. the provided holder taking care
that the upper edge of the licence
Maintaining your vehicle according to the service reminder shown in the plate does not project above the
instrument panel or the schedules given in this manual or the Service Book upper surface of the bumper.
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealers staff 2. Mounting the rear licence plate:
is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Mount the rear licence plate to the
Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer back of the vehicle so that its
any questions and concerns. lower edge is flush with the lower
end of the surface provided for
Best wishes and happy motoring. mounting.
Symbols on labels attached to your vehicle are to remind you to

read this owners manual for proper and safe operation of your vehicle.
i
10/10/25 18:28:59 32TF0630_003
Introduction
Event Data Recorders

Your vehicle is equipped with several devices commonly referred to as Event Data Recorders. They record various
types of real time vehicle data such as SRS airbag deployment and SRS system components failure.
This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the
permission of the vehicle owner.
However this data may be accessed by Honda, its authorised dealers and authorised repairers, employees,
representatives and contractors only for the purpose of the technical diagnosis, research and development of the
vehicle.
Service Diagnostic Recorders

Your vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance and
driving conditions. The data can be used to help technicians diagnose, repair and maintain the vehicle. This data may
not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
However this data may be accessed by Honda, its authorised dealers and authorised repairers, employees,
representatives and contractors only for the purpose of the technical diagnosis, research and development of the
vehicle.
ii
10/10/25 18:29:09 32TF0630_004
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility. Safety Labels on the vehicle.
Safety Messages preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
To help you make informed three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean:
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
this manual. This information alerts HURT if you dont follow instructions.
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you dont follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the You CAN be HURT if you dont follow
hazards associated with operating or instructions.
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement. Safety Headings such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
iii
10/10/25 18:29:12 32TF0630_005
10/10/25 18:29:25 32TF0630_006
Contents
Turn to the beginning of each section for a complete list of subjects.
Your Vehicle at a Glance........... 2 Before Driving .................... 257 Appearance Care ................. 375
What petrol to use, how to break- Tips on cleaning and protecting
Driver and Passenger Safety ..... 7 in your new vehicle, and how to your vehicle.
Important information about the load luggage and other cargo.
proper use and care of your Taking Care of the
vehicles seat belts, an overview of Driving ............................... 271 Unexpected ........................ 383
the supplemental restraint system, The proper way to start the engine, This section covers several
and valuable information on how shift the transmission, and park; problems motorists sometimes
to protect children with child plus what you need to know if experience, and details how to
restraints. youre planning to tow a trailer. handle them.
Instruments and Controls ...... 77 Maintenance ....................... 305 Technical Information.......... 431
Explains the purpose of each The service reminder system or ID numbers, dimensions,
instrument panel indicator, maintenance schedule shows you capacities, and technical
message and symbol on the multi- when you need to take your information.
information display, gauge, and vehicle to the dealer for
how to use the controls on the maintenance service. There is also Index ................................. 439
dashboard and steering column. a list of things to check and
instructions on how to check them.
Features ............................. 181
How to operate the heating and air
conditioning system/climate
control system, the audio system,
and other convenience features.
1
10/10/25 18:29:32 32TF0630_007
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Left-hand drive type

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY SUNSHADE SWITCH PASSENGERS FRONT AIRBAG
(P.92) (P.164) (P.13, 31)
DRIVERS FRONT
AIRBAG
(P.13, 31)
POWER DOOR LOCK

MASTER SWITCH AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.140) (P.195)
CLOCK
(P.233)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES DOOR LOCK TAB
(P.162) (P.140)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P.185)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.190)
BONNET RELEASE HANDLE
(P.260)
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P.274)
AT model is shown. (P.160) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (CVT) (P.277)
: If equipped
2
10/10/25 18:29:40 32TF0630_008

PADDLE SHIFTERS2 WINDSCREEN HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS (P.282) WIPERS/WASHERS (P.133)
(P.128) (P.124)
REAR FOG LIGHT/
FRONT FOG LIGHTS2
(P.130) PASSENGER FRONT
AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
REMOTE AUDIO (P.41)
CONTROLS2
(P.231)
REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON2
MIRROR CONTROLS (P.133/167)
(P.166)
ACCESSORY POWER
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER SOCKET
(P.134) (P.175)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST USB ADAPTER CABLE

(VSA) OFF SWITCH 1
SOCKET2
(P.292) HORN (P.215, 223)
STEERING WHEEL CRUISE CONTROLS2

HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS (P.235)
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS2 (P.135)
(P.238) MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS
AT model is shown. (P.93)
1 : To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.
2 : If equipped
3
10/10/25 18:29:46 32TF0630_009
Right-hand drive type SUNSHADE SWITCH MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

(P.164) (P.92)
DRIVERS FRONT
AIRBAG
PASSENGERS FRONT (P.13, 31)
AIRBAG
(P.13, 31)
POWER DOOR LOCK

AUDIO SYSTEM MASTER SWITCH
(P.195) (P.140)
CLOCK
(P.233)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
DOOR LOCK TAB (P.162)
(P.140)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P.185) BONNET RELEASE
CLIMATE CONTROL HANDLE
SYSTEM (P.260)
(P.190)
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES MANUAL TRANSMISSION(P.274)
AT model is shown. (P.160) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (CVT) (P.277)
: If equipped
4
10/10/25 18:29:54 32TF0630_010
Right-hand drive type

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS PADDLE SHIFTERS2 WINDSCREEN
(P.128) (P.282) WIPERS/WASHERS
HAZARD WARNING REAR FOG LIGHT/FRONT FOG LIGHTS2 (P.124)
BUTTON (P.130)
(P.133)
CRUISE CONTROLS2
(P.235)
PASSENGER FRONT
(P.41) MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.166)
(P.133/167) MULTI-INFORMATION
BUTTONS
(P.93)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
(P.175) HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER
(P.134)
USB ADAPTER CABLE SOCKET2 REMOTE AUDIO STEERING WHEEL HORN1 VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(P.215, 223) CONTROLS2 ADJUSTMENTS (VSA) OFF SWITCH
(P.231) (P.135) (P.292)
AT model is shown. HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE SYSTEM VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS2 (P.238)
2 : If equipped
5
10/10/25 18:29:56 32TF0630_011
6
10/10/25 18:30:00 32TF0630_012
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 26 The Side Airbag Poses Serious
information about how to protect Automatic Seat Belt Risks .......................................... 47
yourself and your passengers. It Tensioners ................................ 27 If You Must Drive with Several
shows you how to use seat belts. It Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 28 Children .................................... 48
explains how your airbags work. And Additional Information About If a Child Requires Close
it tells you how to properly restrain Your Airbags ............................ 30 Attention ................................... 48
infants and children in your vehicle. Airbag System Components ....... 30 Additional Safety Precautions .... 48
How Your Front Airbags Work ......... 31 Protecting Infants and Small Children ... 50
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 Passenger Front Airbag Off Protecting Infants ........................ 50
Your Vehicles Safety Features...... 10 System....................................... 33 Protecting Small Children .......... 52
Seat Belts ...................................... 11 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 38 Selecting a Child Restraint
Airbags .......................................... 13 How Your Side Curtain System ........................................... 54
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 15 Airbags Work ........................... 39 Installing a Child Restraint System ....... 56
1. Close the Doors ....................... 15 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 40 Child Restraint System for EU
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 16 Passenger Front Airbag Off Countries .................................. 57
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 17 Indicator .................................... 41 With the Lower Anchorages ...... 59
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 17 Airbag Service .............................. 41 With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 62
5. Fasten and Position the Seat Additional Safety Precautions .... 42 With a Tether ............................... 67
Belts ...................................... 18 Protecting Children General Protecting Larger Children ............ 69
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Guidelines ................................. 43 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 69
Position ................................. 20 All Children Must Be Using a Booster Seat ................... 70
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 21 Restrained ................................ 43 When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Additional Safety Precautions .... 21 All Children Should Sit in a Front .......................................... 71
Additional Information About Your Back Seat .................................. 44 Additional Safety Precautions .... 72
Seat Belts .................................. 23 The Passengers Front Airbag Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 73
Seat Belt System Components ... 23 Poses Serious Risks................. 44 Safety Labels .................................... 74
Driver and Passenger Safety 7

10/10/25 18:30:09 32TF0630_013
Important Safety Precautions
Youll find many safety Always Wear Your Seat Belt Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
recommendations throughout this A seat belt is your best protection in While airbags can save lives, they
section, and throughout this manual. all types of collisions. Airbags are can cause serious or fatal injuries to
The recommendations on this page designed to supplement seat belts, occupants who sit too close to them,
are the ones we consider to be the not replace them. So even though or are not properly restrained.
most important. your vehicle is equipped with airbags, Infants, young children, and short
make sure you and your passengers adults are at the greatest risk. Be
always wear your seat belts, and sure to follow all instructions and
wear them properly (see page 18 ). warnings in this manual.
Restrain All Children Passenger Front Airbag Off System

Children age 12 and under should Turn off the passenger front airbag
ride properly restrained in a back system by using your vehicles
seat, not the front seat. Infants and ignition key, if it is not avoidable to
small children should be restrained put a rearward facing child restraint
in a child restraint system. Larger system in the front passenger seat.
children should use a booster seat Make sure to turn the system back
and a lap/shoulder belt until they on after you remove the rearward
can use the belt properly without a facing child restraint system (see
booster seat (see pages 43 72 ). page 33 ).
8 Driver and Passenger Safety

10/10/25 18:30:17 32TF0630_014
Important Safety Precautions
Dont Drink and Drive Control Your Speed

Alcohol and driving dont mix. Even Excessive speed is a major factor in
one drink can reduce your ability to crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
respond to changing conditions, and the higher the speed, the greater the
your reaction time gets worse with risk, but serious injuries can also
every additional drink. So dont drink occur at lower speeds. Never drive
and drive, and dont let your friends faster than is safe for current
drink and drive, either. conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Pay Appropriate Attention to the
Task of Driving Safely Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Engaging in mobile phone Condition
conversation or other activities that Having a tyre blowout or a
keep you from paying close attention mechanical failure can be extremely
to the road, other vehicles and hazardous. To reduce the possibility
pedestrians could lead to a crash. of such problems, check your tyre
Remember, situations can change pressures and condition frequently,
quickly, and only you can decide and perform all regularly scheduled
when it is safe to divert attention maintenance (see the Service Book
away from driving. that came with your vehicle, and see
page 319 on vehicles without Service
Book).

10/10/25 18:30:25 32TF0630_015
Your Vehicles Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(10) (3) (10) features that work together to
(6) protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
(9) (4)
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
(8) (6) strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
(9) zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
(11)
However, you and your passengers
(5) cant take full advantage of these
(7) features unless you remain sitting in
(1) Safety Cage the correct position and always wear
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(4) Head Restraints features can contribute to injuries if
(5) Collapsible Steering Column they are not used properly.
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Drivers Front Airbag
(2) (1) (2) (8) Passengers Front Airbag The following pages explain how you
(9) Side Airbags can take an active role in protecting
: Your vehicle has passenger front (10) Side Curtain Airbags yourself and your passengers.
airbag off system (11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners

10/10/25 18:30:36 32TF0630_016
Seat Belts In most European Countries there is When properly worn, seat belts:
Your vehicle is equipped with seat a law covering the use of seat belts. Keep you connected to the vehicle
belts in all seating positions. Please take time to familiarize so you can take advantage of the
yourself with the legal requirements vehicles built-in safety features.
Your seat belt system also includes of the countries in which you will
an indicator on the instrument panel drive. Help protect you in almost every
and a beeper to remind you and your type of crash, including:
passengers to fasten your seat belts. frontal impacts
side impacts
Why Wear Seat Belts Not wearing a seat belt rear impacts
Seat belts are the single most properly increases the rollovers
effective safety device for adults and chance of serious injury or
larger children. (Infants and smaller death in a crash, even though Help keep you from being thrown
children must be properly restrained your vehicle has airbags. against the inside of the vehicle
in child restraint systems.) and against other occupants.
Be sure you and your
Not wearing a seat belt properly passengers always wear seat Keep you from being thrown out
increases the chance of serious belts and wear them properly. of the vehicle.
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags. Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:30:43 32TF0630_017
Of course, seat belts cannot WARNING:

completely protect you in every Seat belts are designed to bear upon
crash. But in most cases, seat belts the bony structure of the body, and
can reduce your risk of serious should be worn low across the front
injury. of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and
shoulders, as applicable; wearing the
What You Should Do: lap section of the belt across the
Always wear your seat belt, and abdominal area must be avoided.
make sure you wear it properly.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed. A
slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Belts should not be worn with straps

twisted.
Each belt assembly must only be used

by one occupant; it is dangerous to
put a belt around a child being carried
on the occupants lap.

10/10/25 18:30:51 32TF0630_018
Airbags Passenger Front Airbag Off System

Turn off the passenger front airbag
system, if it is not avoidable to put a
rearward facing child restraint
system in the front seat (see page
33 ).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to

Your vehicle has a supplemental help protect the upper torso of the
restraint system (SRS) with front driver or a front seat passenger
airbags to help protect the heads and during a moderate to severe side
chests of the driver and a front seat impact (see page 38 for more
passenger during a moderate to information on how your side airbags
severe frontal collision (see page work).
31 for more information on how
your front airbags work).
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:30:59 32TF0630_019
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while
They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A
the seat belts. front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible.
collisions, or minor frontal or side
collisions. The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
Airbags can pose serious hazards. can maximize your safety.
To do their job, airbags must
In addition, your vehicle has side inflate with tremendous force. So Remember, however, that no safety
curtain airbags to help protect the while airbags help save lives, they system can prevent all injuries or
heads of the driver, front passenger, can cause minor injuries or more deaths that can occur in a severe
and passengers in the outer rear serious or even fatal injuries if crash, even when seat belts are
seating positions during a moderate occupants are not properly properly worn and the airbags deploy.
to severe side or front impact (see restrained or sitting properly.
page 39 for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).

10/10/25 18:31:08 32TF0630_020
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction 1.Close the Doors

The following pages provide After everyone has entered the
instructions on how to properly vehicle, be sure the doors and the
protect the driver, adult passengers, tailgate are closed.
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive Your vehicle has a door and
or ride in the front. tailgate open indicator on
the instrument panel to indicate
See pages 43 72 for important when any door or the tailgate is not
guidelines on how to properly tightly closed.
protect infants, small children, and This shows all doors and the tailgate
larger children who ride in your See page 83 for how the door and open.
vehicle. tailgate open indicator works.
Your vehicle has a door and tailgate
open indicator on the multi-
information display to indicate when
a specific door or the tailgate is not
tightly closed.

10/10/25 18:31:15 32TF0630_021
2.Adjust the Front Seats In addition to adjusting the seat, you

can adjust the steering wheel up and
down, and in and out on some types Sitting too close to a front
(see page 135 ). airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
If you cannot get far enough away airbags inflate.
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend Always sit as far back from
that you investigate whether some the front airbags as possible.
type of adaptive equipment may help.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,

rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked into position. See page
Adjust the drivers seat as far to the 149 for how to adjust the front seats.
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
If you sit too close to the steering

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.

10/10/25 18:31:26 32TF0630_022
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs 4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Reclining the seat-back too

far can result in serious injury
or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an

upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Reclining a seat-back so that the

shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupants chest
Adjust the drivers seat-back to a reduces the protective capability of Adjust the drivers head restraint so
comfortable, upright position, the belt. It also increases the chance the centre of the back of your head
leaving ample space between your of sliding under the belt in a crash rests against the centre of the
chest and the airbag cover in the and being seriously injured. The restraint.
centre of the steering wheel. farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury. Have passengers with adjustable
Passengers with adjustable seat- head restraints adjust their restraints
backs should also adjust their seat- See page 149 for how to adjust the properly as well. Taller persons
back to a comfortable, upright seat-backs. should adjust their restraint as high
position. as possible.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:31:33 32TF0630_023
When a passenger is seated in the Properly adjusted head restraints 5.Fasten and Position the Seat
rear seating position, make sure the will help protect occupants from Belts
rear head restraint is adjusted to its whiplash and other crash injuries. Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
highest position. then tug on the belt to make sure the
See page 151 for how to adjust the belt is securely latched. Check that
head restraints and how the drivers the belt is not twisted, because a
and front passengers active head twisted belt can cause serious
Improperly positioning head restraints work. injuries in a crash.
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be The seat belt in the centre position
seriously injured in a crash. of the back seat can be unlatched
and retracted to allow the back seat
Make sure head restraints are to be folded up or down. This seat
in place and positioned belt should be latched whenever the
properly before driving. seat-back is in an upright position.
See page 158 for how to unlatch and
relatch the seat belt.

10/10/25 18:31:41 32TF0630_024
If necessary, pull up on the belt again If the seat belt touches or crosses
to remove any slack, then check that your neck, or if it crosses your arm
the belt rests across the centre of instead of your shoulder, you need to
your chest and over your shoulder. adjust the seat belt anchor height.
This spreads the forces of a crash

over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
Improperly positioning the

seat belts can cause serious
Position the lap part of the belt as injury or death in a crash.
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of Make sure all seat belts are RELEASE BUTTONS
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. properly positioned before
This lets your strong pelvic bones driving. The front seats have adjustable seat
take the force of a crash and reduces belt anchors. To adjust the height of
the chance of internal injuries. an anchor, squeeze the two release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:31:50 32TF0630_025
Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting If a front passenger leans sideways
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position and his head is in the deployment
behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted path of the side airbag, an inflating
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and head restraints, and side airbag can strike the passenger
put on their seat belts, it is very with enough force to very seriously
If a seat belt does not seem to work important that they continue to sit injure him.
as it should, it may not protect the upright, well back in their seats, with
occupant in a crash. their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is safely parked and the
No one should sit in a seat with an engine is off. Sitting improperly or out of
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat position can result in serious
belt that is not working properly can Sitting improperly can increase the injury or death in a crash.
result in serious injury or death. chance of injury during a crash. For
Have your dealer check the belt as example, if an occupant slouches, Always sit upright, well back
soon as possible. lies down, turns sideways, sits in the seat, with your feet on
forward, leans forward or sideways, the floor.
See page 23 for additional or puts one or both feet up, the
information about your seat belts chance of injury during a crash is
and how to take care of them. greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of

position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

10/10/25 18:31:59 32TF0630_026
Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit Additional Safety Precautions
upright and adjust the seat as far Never let passengers ride in the
back as possible while allowing full luggage area or on top of a folded-
control of the vehicle. When riding down back seat. If they do, they
as a front passenger, adjust the seat could be very seriously injured in a
as far back as possible. crash.
This will reduce the risk of injuries Two people should never use the
to both you and your unborn child same seat belt. If they do, they
that can be caused by a crash or an could be very seriously injured in a
inflating front airbag. crash.
Each time you have a checkup, ask Do not put any accessories on seat
your doctor if its okay for you to belts. Devices intended to improve
If you are pregnant, the best way to drive. occupant comfort or reposition the
protect yourself and your unborn shoulder part of a seat belt can
child when driving or riding in a reduce the protective capability of
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt, the seat belt and increase the
and keep the lap part of the belt as chance of serious injury in a crash.
low as possible across the hips.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:32:07 32TF0630_027
Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or When a rearward facing child
between yourself and a front near a door. If a side airbag or a restraint system is not used on the
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp side curtain airbag inflates, a cup front passenger seat, make sure
objects on your lap, or driving with holder or other hard object the passenger front airbag system
a pipe or other sharp object in attached on or near the door could is on (see page 33). To see
your mouth, can result in injuries be propelled inside the vehicle and whether the system is on, turn the
if your front airbag inflates. hurt someone. ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. Check if the passenger
Do not attach or place objects on Do not put a coat hanger or hard front airbag off indicator comes on
the front airbag covers. Objects on objects on a coat hook. This could for several seconds, and then goes
the covers marked SRS AIRBAG result in injuries if your side out.
could interfere with the proper curtain airbags inflate.
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and Do not cover or replace front seat-
hurt someone if the airbags inflate. back covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing
Keep your hands and arms away or covering front seat-back covers
from the airbag covers. If your can prevent your side airbags from
hands or arms are close to an inflating during a side impact.
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.

10/10/25 18:32:17 32TF0630_028
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components If you turn the ignition switch to the When no one is sitting in the front
Your seat belt system includes lap/ ON (II) position before your seat passengers seat, or a child or small
shoulder belts in all five seating belt is fastened, the beeper will adult is riding there, the indicator
positions. The front seat belts are sound and the indicator will flash. If should not come on and the beeper
also equipped with automatic seat your seat belt is not fastened before should not sound.
belt tensioners. the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on. You will also see a symbol
The seat belt system (for a driver)/ (for a front
includes an indicator on the If a front passenger does not fasten passenger), or a FASTEN SEAT
instrument panel and a beeper to their seat belt, the indicator will BELT or FASTEN PASSENGER
remind you and your passengers to come on about 6 seconds after the SEAT BELT message with a
fasten your seat belts. ignition switch is turned to the ON symbol on the multi-information
(II) position. display to remind you and your
This system monitors the seat belts passengers to fasten your seat belts.
in all seating positions. If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:32:27 32TF0630_029
The front passengers seat belt use Rear Seat Belt Use Monitor The current display will be
monitoring system uses the occupant interrupted and the rear seat belt
detection sensor in the front monitor will also be displayed on the
passengers seat. The system may multi-information display if either
not work properly under these rear door is opened and closed, or
conditions: any of the rear passengers latches
their seat belt.
You place heavy items on the front
passengers seat. This monitor goes off after about 30
seconds. It will also go off when you
You place a cushion on the front change the display by pressing the
passengers seat. INFO button ( ) on the steering
wheel.
The front passenger does not sit
properly. The seat belt system also monitors
the seat belt use of all three rear
Have your vehicle checked by a seating positions according to the
dealer if the indicator comes on or activation of each seat belt retractor.
the beeper sounds when there is no
front passenger or there are no When you turn the ignition switch to
objects on the front seat. the ON (II) position, the multi-
information display shows the rear
seat belt use by pressing the INFO
button ( ) repeatedly.

10/10/25 18:32:35 32TF0630_030
The rear seat belt monitor

system judges the use of the
rear seat belt based on the
amount of seat belt pulled
out from the retractor. It is
not an indicator to show that
the rear seat belt is actually
latched. Correct latching of
the seat belts should be
Seat belts in right and centre positions confirmed whenever the
are used. indicator shows a rear seat
belt is in use.
The system shows you how many If the system cannot detect the seat
rear seat belts are being used and belt use, you will see three dashes.
reminds you and your passengers to While driving, you can also confirm Turn the ignition switch to the
fasten their seat belts. According to the rear seat belt use. Press and LOCK (0) position to reset the
the rear seat belt use (1 through 3), release the INFO button ( ) system. If this happens repeatedly,
you will see the indicator(s) repeatedly to change the display. have your vehicle checked by your
highlighted on the multi-information dealer.
display.

10/10/25 18:32:42 32TF0630_031
Lap/Shoulder Belt To unlock the belt, push the red

PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
SHOULDER UPPER SEAT the belt across your body so that it Allowing a child to play with
PORTION BELT ANCHOR
retracts completely. After exiting the a seat belt or wrap one
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the around their neck can result
way and will not get closed in the in serious injury or death.
door.
LATCH Instruct children not to play
PLATE All seat belts have an emergency with any seat belt and make
locking retractor. In normal driving, sure any unused seat belt a
the retractor lets you move freely in child can reach is buckled,
your seat while it keeps some fully retracted, and locked.
BUCKLE LAP PORTION tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
The lap and shoulder belt goes over automatically locks the belt to help
your shoulder, across your chest, restrain your body.
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch

plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 18 for how to
properly position the belt).

10/10/25 18:32:53 32TF0630_032
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to

activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy.
The tensioners can also be activated

during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
extra tension in the seat belt could
be helpful.
DETACHABLE
ANCHOR When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
The lap/shoulder belt in the centre For added protection, the front seat they are unbuckled.
seating position on the rear seat is belts are equipped with automatic
equipped with a detachable seat belt seat belt tensioners. When activated, The SRS indicator will
that has two parts: a small latch plate the tensioners immediately tighten come on if there is a
and an anchor buckle. the belts to help hold the driver and problem with your automatic seat
a front passenger in position. belt tensioners (see page 40 ).
The detachable seat belt should
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable seat belt, see page 158 .

10/10/25 18:33:01 32TF0630_033
Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash, WARNING: It is essential to replace
For safety, you should check the it must be replaced by your dealer. A the entire assembly after it has been
condition of your seat belts regularly. belt that has been worn during a worn in a severe impact even if damage
crash may not provide the same level to the assembly is not obvious.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for of protection in a subsequent crash.
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check WARNING: Care should be taken to
that the latches work smoothly and The dealer should also inspect the avoid contamination of the webbing with
the belts retract easily. If a belt does anchors for damage and replace polishes, oils and chemicals, and
not retract easily, cleaning the belt them if needed. If the automatic seat particularly battery acid. Cleaning may
may correct the problem (see page belt tensioners activate during a safely be carried out using mild soap and
381 ). Any belt that is not in good crash, they must be replaced. water. The belt should be replaced if
condition or working properly will webbing becomes frayed, contaminated
not provide good protection and or damaged.
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
WARNING: No modifications or
additions should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat belt
adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted to remove
slack.

10/10/25 18:33:08 32TF0630_034
Anchorage Points (Rear Seat)

When replacing the seat belts, make
Not checking or maintaining certain to use the anchorage points
seat belts can result in shown in the illustrations.
serious injury or death if the
seat belts do not work (Front Seat)
properly when needed.
Check your seat belts

regularly and have any
problem corrected as soon as
possible.
The rear seat has three lap/shoulder

belts. The centre seating position on
the rear seat has a detachable seat
belt.

10/10/25 18:33:20 32TF0630_035
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components Two side curtain airbags, one for A sophisticated electronic system
Your airbag system includes: each side of the vehicle. The that continually monitors and
airbags are stored in the ceiling records information about the
Two SRS (supplemental restraint above the side windows. The front sensors, the control unit, the
system) front airbags. The drivers and rear pillars on both sides are airbag activators, the seat belt
airbag is stored in the centre of marked SIDE CURTAIN tensioners, and driver and front
the steering wheel; the front AIRBAG (see page 39 ). passenger seat belt use when the
passengers airbag is stored in the ignition switch is in the ON (II)
dashboard. Both are marked SRS Automatic front seat belt position.
AIRBAG (see page 31 ). tensioners (see page 27 ).
An indicator on the instrument
The passenger front airbag ON/ Sensors that can detect a panel that alerts you to a possible
OFF switch is located on the side moderate to severe front impact or problem with your airbags,
panel of the front passenger-side side impact. sensors, or seat belt tensioners
instrument panel (see page 34 ). (see page 40 ).
Sensors that can detect whether
Two side airbags, one for the the drivers seat belt and the front An indicator on the instrument
driver and one for a front passengers seat belt are latched panel that reminds you when the
passenger. The airbags are stored or unlatched (see page 23 ). passenger front airbag is off.
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked SIDE Emergency backup power in case
AIRBAG (see page 38 ). your vehicles electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.

10/10/25 18:33:28 32TF0630_036
How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt This can happen if the severity of a
restrains your lower body and torso, collision is at the margin, or
while the tensioner tightens and threshold, that determines whether
locks the seat belt to help keep you or not the airbags will deploy. In
in place, and the front airbag helps such cases, the seat belt will provide
protect your head and chest. sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
Although both airbags normally the airbag would be minimal.
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
If you ever have a moderate to

severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicles rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high

enough, the control unit will inflate
the drivers and front passengers
front airbags, and activate the
automatic seat belt tensioners.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:33:35 32TF0630_037
The total time for inflation and Passenger Front Airbag Off System
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so Although Honda does not
fast that most occupants are not recommend to have an infant ride in
aware that the airbags deployed until front, if it is not avoidable to put a
they see them lying in their laps. rearward facing child restraint
system in the front passenger seat,
After a crash, you may see what you must manually turn off the
looks like smoke. This is actually passenger front airbag system using
powder from the airbags surface. the ignition key. This will help
Although the powder is not harmful, protect an infant in the rearward
people with respiratory problems facing child restraint system from an
may experience some temporary impact created by an inflating front
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of airbag (see page 33 ).
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
After inflating, the front airbags so.
immediately deflate, so they wont
interfere with the drivers visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.

10/10/25 18:33:41 32TF0630_038
Make sure to turn the system back Passenger Front Airbag Off
on when you remove the rearward System
facing child restraint system after Make sure that the passenger Although Honda does not
use. front airbag off indicator goes recommend to have an infant ride in
off to activate the passenger front, if it is not avoidable to put a
front airbag system when a rearward facing child restraint
rearward facing child system in the front passenger seat,
The passenger front airbag restraint system is not used you must manually turn off the
system must be turned off, if on the front passenger seat. passenger front airbag system.
it is not avoidable to put a Deactivating the passenger
rearward facing child front airbag system can
restraint system in the front result in serious injury or
passenger seat. If the front death in a crash.
passenger airbag inflates, it
can hit the rearward facing
child restraint system with
enough force to kill or cause
a very serious injury to the
infant.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:33:51 32TF0630_039
Passenger Front Airbag Off System The passenger front airbag off How to deactivate the passenger
Components indicator is located near the centre front airbag system
of the instrument panel. This To turn the passenger front airbag
PASSENGER SYSTEM indicator reminds you when the system off:
FRONT AIRBAG WARNING LABEL
OFF INDICATOR passenger front airbag system is
off. 1. Set the parking brake.
The SRS indicator comes on if 2. Turn the ignition switch to the

there is a malfunction in the LOCK (0) position and remove the
passenger front airbag. The key.
malfunction is also indicated on
the multi-information display. 3. Open the front passengers door.
ON/OFF
SWITCH
The passenger front airbag off

system includes:
The passenger front airbag ON/

OFF switch is located at the side
panel of the front passenger-side
instrument panel.

10/10/25 18:33:59 32TF0630_040
OFF When the switch is in this 5. Remove the ignition key from the
position, it means the passenger switch before you close the door.
front airbag system is deactivated. In
this condition, when you turn the 6. Check if the passenger front
ignition switch to the ON (II) airbag off indicator located near
position, the passenger front airbag the centre of the instrument panel
off indicator in the instrument panel stays on when you turn the
should remain on. However, it is ignition switch to the ON (II)
possible that the indicator may come position. Or, check if the
on for several seconds, go off, and passenger front airbag off
PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG then come back on. It should then indicator comes on, and then goes
ON/OFF SWITCH remain on. out in a short period of time, and
then comes back shortly and stays
4. Insert the ignition key to the ON When the switch is in this on when you turn the ignition
passenger front airbag ON/OFF position, it means the passenger switch to the ON (II) position.
switch located on the side panel of front airbag system is activated.
the instrument panel. Turn the When you turn the ignition switch to
key from the ON to the OFF the ON (II) position, the passenger
position anticlockwise, then front airbag off indicator will come
remove the key. When the key is on for several seconds, and then go
removed from the switch, the out.
passenger front airbag system is
deactivated.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:34:08 32TF0630_041
How to activate the passenger front 5. Remove the ignition key from the
airbag system switch before you close the door.
To turn the passenger front airbag
system on: 6. Check if the passenger front
airbag off indicator located near
1. Set the parking brake. the centre of the instrument panel
comes on for several seconds then
2. Turn the ignition switch to the goes out when you turn the
LOCK (0) position and remove the ignition switch to the ON (II)
key. position.
PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG
3. Open the front passengers door. ON/OFF SWITCH
4. Insert the ignition key to the

passenger front airbag ON/OFF
switch located on the side panel of
the instrument panel. Push the
key into the switch, then let go of
the key from the OFF to the
ON position, and remove the key.
When the key is removed from the
switch, the passenger front airbag
system is activated.

10/10/25 18:34:15 32TF0630_042
Precautions for deactivating the It is your responsibility to change

passenger front airbag system: the setting of the passenger front
Do not use a key other than your airbag system to OFF when you Make sure that the passenger
vehicles ignition key to change put a rearward facing child front airbag off indicator goes
the setting of the passenger front restraint system on the front off to activate the passenger
airbag system to ON or OFF. passenger seat. front airbag system when a
If you use a key other than your rearward facing child
vehicles ignition key, the restraint system is not used
passenger airbag ON/OFF switch on the front passenger seat.
can be damaged, or the passenger The passenger front airbag Deactivating the passenger
front airbag system may not work system must be turned off, if front airbag system can
properly. Also, with an it is not avoidable to put a result in serious injury or
inappropriate key, you may not be rearward facing child death in a crash.
able to switch the setting of the restraint system in the front
passenger front airbag system passenger seat. If the front
back to ON or OFF. passenger airbag inflates, it
can hit the rearward facing
Do not close the door or apply child restraint system with
excessive load on the ignition key enough force to kill or cause
while the key is in the passenger a very serious injury to the
front airbag ON/OFF switch. The infant.
switch or the ignition key can get
damaged.

10/10/25 18:34:22 32TF0630_043
How Your Side Airbags Work Only one airbag will deploy during a If a front seat passenger leans
side impact. If the impact is on the sideways and his head is in the
passengers side, the passengers deployment path of the side airbag,
side airbag will deploy even if there he can be seriously injured by an
is no passenger. inflating side airbag. An inflating
side airbag can strike the child with
To get the best protection from the enough force to kill or very seriously
side airbags, front seat occupants injure a child. For the information of
should wear their seat belts and sit the side airbags hazards, see pages
upright and well back in their seats. 47 and 69 .
If you ever have a moderate to

severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the drivers or the passengers
side airbag.

10/10/25 18:34:29 32TF0630_044
How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passengers To get the best protection from the
Work side, the passengers side curtain side curtain airbags, occupants
airbag will inflate even if there are no should wear their seat belts and sit
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG occupants on that side of the vehicle. upright and well back in their seats.
One or both side curtain airbags may

inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal collision which causes the
front airbags to deploy.
In a moderate to severe side impact,

sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag on the drivers or the
passengers side of the vehicle.

10/10/25 18:34:39 32TF0630_045
How the SRS Indicator If the indicator comes on at any If you see any of these indications,
Works other time, or does not come on at all, the airbags and seat belt tensioners
The SRS indicator alerts you to a you should have the system checked may not work properly when you
potential problem with your airbags, by your dealer. For example: need them.
sensors, seat belt tensioners, or
passenger front airbag off system. If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
When you turn the ignition switch to switch to the ON (II) position. Ignoring the SRS indicator
the ON (II) position, this indicator can result in serious injury or
comes on for several seconds then If the indicator stays on after the death if the airbag systems or
goes off. This tells you the system is engine starts. tensioners do not work
working properly. properly.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive. Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer as soon as possible if
You will also see the symbol the SRS indicator alerts you
or the symbol with a to a possible problem.
CHECK SYSTEM message on the
multi-information display.

10/10/25 18:34:49 32TF0630_046
Passenger Front Airbag Airbag Service

Off Indicator Your airbag systems and automatic
Remove the rearward facing This indicator is located next to the seat belt tensioners are virtually
child restraint system audio display. maintenance free, and there are no
immediately from the front It comes on for several seconds to parts you can safely service.
passenger seat if the SRS check the system when you turn the However, you must have your
indicator comes on. Even if ignition switch to the ON (II) vehicle serviced if:
the passenger front airbag position.
has been deactivated, do not An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
ignore the SRS indicator. If the passenger front airbag system that has deployed must be
is active, the indicator will come on replaced along with the control
The SRS system may have a for several seconds, and then will go unit and other related parts. Any
fault which could cause the off after the system checkup. seat belt tensioner that activates
passenger front airbag to be If the passenger front airbag system must also be replaced.
activated, causing serious is inactive, the indicator should
injury or death. remain on after the system checkup, Do not try to remove or replace
or it may come on for several any airbag by yourself. This must
seconds, go off for a short period of be done by your dealer or a
time after the system checkup, and knowledgeable body shop.
then come back on. It should then
remain on. The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly. CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:34:55 32TF0630_047
Handling is allowed by trained Additional Safety Precautions Do not expose the front seat-backs
personnel only. It is prohibited to Do not attempt to deactivate your to liquid. If water or another liquid
remove the airbag unit/belt- airbags. Together, airbags and soaks into the seat-back, it can
tensioner from the vehicle. In case of seat belts provide the best prevent the side airbag system
malfunction, shutdown or after protection. from working properly.
airbag inflation/belt-tensioner
operation you have to ask a qualified Do not tamper with airbag and
shop for repair or removal. automatic seat belt tensioner
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags and automatic seat belt
tensioners to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.

10/10/25 18:35:04 32TF0630_048
Protecting Children General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are
they are either unrestrained or not unrestrained or improperly
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle restrained can be seriously
collisions are the number one cause injured or killed in a crash.
of the death of children age 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in an approved
deaths and injuries, infants and child restraint system. A
children should be properly larger child should be
restrained when they ride in a properly restrained with a
Children depend on adults to protect vehicle. seat belt and use a booster
them. However, despite their best seat if necessary.
intentions, many adults do not know Infants and small children must be
how to properly protect child restrained in an approved child
passengers. restraint system that is properly Larger children must be restrained
secured to the vehicle (see pages with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
If you have children, or ever need to 50 68 ). a booster seat until the seat belt fits
drive with a child in your vehicle, be them properly (see pages 69 72 ).
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children. CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:35:13 32TF0630_049
In most countries, child restraint All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passengers Front Airbag
systems must meet the Seat Poses Serious Risks
specifications of the ECE 44 According to crash statistics, Front airbags have been designed to
regulation. children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to
safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this,
In many countries, the law requires back seat. It is recommended that all the passengers front airbag is quite
children younger than 12 years of children age 12 and under be large, and it can inflate with enough
age and less than 150 cm (60 in) in properly restrained in a back seat. force to cause very serious injuries.
height to be secured in an officially
approved and suitable child restraint Children who ride in back are less Infants
system. In those countries, officially likely to be injured by striking Never put a rearward facing child
approved and suitable child restraint interior vehicle parts during a restraint system in the front seat of a
systems must therefore be used in collision or hard braking. Also, vehicle equipped with a passengers
order to transport a child on any children cannot be injured by an front airbag. If the airbag inflates, it
passenger seat whatsoever. Please inflating airbag when they ride in the can hit the back of the child restraint
check your local legal requirements. back. system with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure an infant.

10/10/25 18:35:22 32TF0630_050
As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94; If the passengers front airbag Small Children
inflates, it can hit the rearward Placing a front facing child restraint
facing child restraint system with system in the front seat of a vehicle
great force. The rearward facing equipped with a passengers front
child restraint system can be airbag can be hazardous. If the
dislodged or struck with enough vehicle seat is too far forward, or the
force to cause very serious injury to childs head is thrown forward
the infant. during a collision, an inflating front
airbag can strike the child with
We strongly recommend to put a enough force to kill or very seriously
rearward facing child restraint injure a small child.
Do not use a rearward facing system in a rear seating position. If it
child restraint on a seat is not avoidable to put a rearward Larger Children
protected by an airbag in facing child restraint system in the Children who have outgrown child
front of it. front passenger seat, you should restraint systems are also at risk of
turn the passenger front airbag being injured or killed by an inflating
system off. In addition, make sure to passengers front airbag. Whenever
turn the system back on after you possible, larger children should sit in
remove the rearward facing child the back seat, on a booster seat if
restraint system. needed, and be properly restrained
with a seat belt (see page 69 for
important information about
protecting larger children).
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:35:28 32TF0630_051
In all cases observe the legal Front Passengers Sun Visor Passenger-side Instrument Panel
requirements of the countries in Passenger Front Airbag Off System
which you will drive.
To remind you of the passengers

front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has the
warning label on the front passengers
sun visor. Your vehicle also has the
warning label for the passenger front
airbag off system at the side panel DO NOT place rear-facing
on the front passenger-side child seat on this seat with
instrument panel. Please read and an active airbag.
follow the instructions on these
labels. DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY
can occur.

10/10/25 18:35:34 32TF0630_052
The Side Airbag Poses Serious To remind you of the side airbags
Risks hazards, and that children must be
Side airbags have been designed to properly restrained in the back seat,
help protect adults in a moderate to your vehicle has the warning label on
severe side impact. each front doorjamb.
If any part of a childs body is in the
path of a deploying airbag, an
inflating side airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a child. Leaning over the front door
can result in serious injury or
death if the side airbag
inflates.
Always sit upright with their

back against the seat-back.

10/10/25 18:35:45 32TF0630_053
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close Additional Safety Precautions
Children Attention Never hold an infant or child on
Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put your lap. If you are not wearing a
children can be properly restrained. an infant or a small child in the front seat belt in a crash, you could be
If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the thrown forward and crush the
children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires child against the dashboard or a
front: attention. seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat from your arms and be seriously
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a hurt or killed.
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision or a side impact, and
belt properly (see page 69 ). paying close attention to a child Never put a seat belt over yourself
distracts the driver from the and a child. During a crash, the
Move the vehicle seat as far to the important tasks of driving, placing belt could press deep into the child
rear as possible (see page 16 ). both of you at risk. and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Have the child sit upright and well If a child requires close physical Never let two children use the
back in the seat (see page 20 ). attention or frequent visual contact, same seat belt. If they do, they
we strongly recommend that another could be very seriously injured in a
Make sure the seat belt is properly adult ride with the child in the back crash.
positioned and secured (see page seat. The back seat is far safer for a
18 ). child than the front.

10/10/25 18:35:54 32TF0630_054
Do not leave children alone in a Use the childproof door locks to WARNING: Always take the ignition
vehicle. Leaving children without prevent children from opening the key with you whenever you leave the
adult supervision is illegal in some rear doors. This can prevent vehicle alone (with other occupants).
countries, and can be very children from accidentally falling
hazardous. out (see page 142 ). Never let children kneel on seats or
stand while the vehicle is in motion.
For example, infants and small WARNING: Use the main power The violent forces created during
children left in a vehicle on a hot window switch to prevent children emergency braking will cause the
day can die from heatstroke. A from opening the windows. Using this children to be thrown forward. The
child left alone with the key in the feature will prevent children from children could be seriously injured or
ignition switch can accidentally set playing with the windows, which killed.
the vehicle in motion, possibly could expose them to hazards or
injuring themselves or others. distract the driver (see page 162 ).
Lock all doors and the tailgate Keep vehicle keys and remote
when your vehicle is not in use. transmitters out of the reach of
Children who play in vehicles can children. Even very young
accidentally get trapped inside. children learn how to unlock
Teach your children not to play in vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
or around vehicles. switch, and open the tailgate,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.

10/10/25 18:36:04 32TF0630_055
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Only a rearward facing child Rearward Facing Child Restraint
restraint system provides proper System Placement
support for a babys head, neck and A rearward facing child restraint
back. system can be placed in any seating
position in the back seat, but not in
Two types of restraints may be used: the front. Never put a rearward
a restraint system designed facing child restraint system in the
exclusively for infants, or a front seat.
convertible restraint system used in
the rearward facing, reclining mode. EU models
An approved rearward facing child
EU models restraint system should be placed in
Refer to page 57 for the any seating position in the back seat
recommended child restraint system. (see page 57 ).
Child Restraint System Type
An infant must be properly Do not put a rearward facing child If the passengers front airbag
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining restraint system in a forward-facing inflates, it can hit the back of the
child restraint system until the child position. If placed facing forward, an restraint with enough force to kill or
reaches the restraint system makers infant could be very seriously injured seriously injure an infant.
weight or height limit for the during a frontal collision.
restraint system, and the child is at
least one year old.

10/10/25 18:36:12 32TF0630_056
When properly installed, a rearward As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94;

facing child restraint system may
prevent the driver or a front Placing a rearward facing
passenger from moving their seat as child restraint system in the
far back as recommended, or from front seat can result in
locking their seat-back in the desired serious injury or death if the
position. passengers front airbag
inflates.
In either situation, we strongly
recommend that you install the child Always place a rearward
restraint system directly behind the facing child restraint system
front passenger seat, move the seat in the back seat, not the front. Do not use a rearward facing
as far forward as needed, and leave it child restraint on a seat
unoccupied. Or you may wish to get protected by an airbag in
a smaller rearward facing child front of it.
restraint system.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:36:20 32TF0630_057
If the passengers front airbag Passenger Front Airbag Off System Protecting Small Children
inflates, it can hit the rearward We strongly recommend to put a
facing child restraint system with rearward facing child restraint
great force. The rearward facing system in a rear seating position. If it
child restraint system can be is not avoidable to put a rearward
dislodged or struck with enough facing child restraint system in the
force to cause very serious injury to front passenger seat, you should
the infant. turn the passenger front airbag
system off. In addition, make sure to
turn the system back on after you
remove the rearward facing child
restraint system.
Child Restraint System Type

A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child
restraint system makers weight and
height limits, should be restrained in
a front facing, upright child restraint
system.
Of the different restraint systems

available, we recommend those that
have a five-point harness system as
shown.

10/10/25 18:36:27 32TF0630_058
We also recommend that a small Child Restraint System Placement

child uses the child restraint system We strongly recommend placing a
as long as possible, until the child front facing child restraint system in Placing a front facing child
reaches the weight or height limit a back seat, not the front. restraint system in the front
for the restraint system. seat can result in serious
Placing a front facing child restraint injury or death if the front
EU models system in the front seat of a vehicle airbag inflates.
Refer to page 57 for the equipped with a passengers airbag
recommended child restraint system. can be hazardous. If the vehicle seat If you must place a front
is too far forward, or the childs head facing child restraint system
is thrown forward during a collision, in front, move the vehicle
an inflating airbag can strike the seat as far back as possible,
child with enough force to cause and properly restrain the
very serious or fatal injuries. child.
If it is necessary to put a front facing

child restraint system in the front,
move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible, and be sure the
child restraint system is firmly
secured to the vehicle and the child
is properly strapped in the restraint
system.

10/10/25 18:36:35 32TF0630_059
Selecting a Child Restraint System
When buying a child restraint We also recommend selecting a Whatever type of child restraint you
system, you need to choose either a lower anchorages system-compatible choose, to provide proper protection,
conventional child restraint system, child restraint system with a rigid, a child restraint system should meet
or one designed for use with the rather than a flexible, anchor (see three requirements:
lower anchorages and tethers. page 59 ).
1. The child restraint system should
Conventional child restraint systems In EU countries, a child restraint meet safety standards. In most
must be secured to a vehicle with a system with a flexible anchor is not countries, child restraint systems
seat belt, whereas lower anchorages available. must meet the specifications of
system-compatible child restraint the ECE 44 regulation. Look for
systems are secured by attaching the In seating positions not equipped the approval mark on the system
restraint to hardware built into the with lower anchorages, a lower and the manufacturers statement
two outer seating positions in the anchorages system-compatible child of compliance on the box.
back seat. restraint system can be installed
using a seat belt. The manufacturer of the vehicle
Since lower anchorages system- does not assume any responsibility
compatible child restraint systems for damage which would be caused
are easier to install and reduce the by a defect inherent in the
possibility of improper installation, recommended child restraint system.
we recommend selecting this style.

10/10/25 18:36:41 32TF0630_060
Selecting a Child Restraint System
2. The child restraint system should Before purchasing a conventional

be of the proper type and size to fit child restraint system, or using a
the child. previously purchased one, we
Rearward facing for infants, front recommend that you test the
facing for small children. restraint system in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
Make sure the restraint system fits where the child restraint system will
your child. Check the manufacturers be used.
instructions and labels for height and
weight limits. EU models
Refer to page 57 for the
3. The child restraint system should recommended child restraint system.
fit the vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.

10/10/25 18:36:51 32TF0630_061
Installing a Child Restraint System
After selecting a proper child 2. Make sure the child restraint 3. Secure the child in the child
restraint system and a good place to system is firmly secured. After restraint system. Make sure the
install the restraint system, there are installing a child restraint system, child is properly strapped in the
three main steps in installing the push and pull the restraint system child restraint system according to
restraint system: forward and from side-to-side to the child restraint system makers
verify that it is secure. instructions. A child who is not
1. Properly secure the child restraint properly secured in a child
system to the vehicle. All child A child restraint system secured restraint system can be seriously
restraint systems must be secured with a seat belt should be installed as injured in a crash.
to the vehicle with the lap part of a firmly as possible. However, it does
lap/shoulder belt or with the lower not need to be rock solid. Some The following pages provide the
anchorages system. A child whose side-to-side movement can be recommended child restraint
restraint system is not properly expected and should not reduce the systems for EU countries and
secured to the vehicle can be child restraint systems effectiveness. guidelines on how to properly install
endangered in a crash. a child restraint system. A front
If the child restraint system is not facing child restraint system is
On vehicles without lockable retractor secure, try installing it in a different mainly used in most of examples, but
fitted to the seat where the child is seating position, or use a different the instructions are the same for a
positioned style of child restraint system that rearward facing child restraint
If you use a lap/shoulder belt, be can be firmly secured. system.
sure you install a locking clip on the
seat belt (see page 66 ). EU models
Refer to page 57 for the
recommended child restraint system.

10/10/25 18:37:07 32TF0630_062
Child Restraint System for EU Countries

Various types of child restraint systems are available. Not all types are suitable for your vehicle. Please refer to the
table below to select which category of child restraint system can be used on each seating position.
Seating Position
Front passenger Rear passenger
Mass Group Passenger front airbag ON/OFF
switch position Outboard Centre
OFF ON
group 0 Up to 10 kg Honda BABY-SAFE X U U
group 0 Up to 13 kg Honda BABY-SAFE X IL (Honda BABY-SAFE ISO FIX) or U U
group I 9 kg to 18 kg Honda Eclipse IUF (Size class A, B1, B) or U U
group II 15 kg to 25 kg Honda KID or Honda KID FIX L (Honda KID FIX) or U U
group III 22 kg to 36 kg Honda KID or Honda KID FIX L (Honda KID FIX) or U U
IL: Suitable for particular ISO FIX child restraint systems (CRS) given in this table.
IUF: Suitable for front facing ISO FIX child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this mass
group.
For group I, the front facing genuine Honda ISO FIX child restraint system is available from your dealer.
U: Suitable for universal category child restraints approved for use in this mass group.
L: Suitable for particular child restraint systems given in this table. These restraints may be of the specific
vehicle, restricted, or semi-universal category.
X: Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
: Move the front seat to its rearmost position.
A size class is specified for some child restraint systems. Make sure to check the size class as indicated on the
manufacturers instructions, package, and labels of the child restraint.
The particular child restraints in the above table are Honda Genuine Parts. They are available from your dealer.
For a correct installation, please refer to the Child Restraint Instruction Manual. CONTINUED
10/10/25 18:37:12 32TF0630_063
Your vehicle is equipped with lower

anchorages at the outer seating
The use of any child restraint positions on the rear seat. These
system which is not suitable anchorages are only to be used with
for your vehicles would not a child restraint system designed to
properly secure the infant or be attached to the lower anchorages.
child who could therefore be Refer to page 59 for how to install a
killed or seriously injured. child restraint system to the lower
anchorages.

10/10/25 18:37:23 32TF0630_064
Installing a Child Restraint 2. Make sure there are no objects

System with the Lower LOWER ANCHORAGES near the anchorages that could
BUTTON
Anchorages prevent a secure connection
Your vehicle is equipped with lower between the child restraint system
anchorages at the outer rear seats. and the anchorages.
These anchorages are located 3. On some child restraint systems

between the seat-back and seat You may use optional guide-cups
bottom, and are to be used only with that came with your child restraint
a child restraint system designed for system to install it to the lower
use with the lower anchorages. anchorages without damaging the
seat surface.
The location of each lower
anchorage is indicated by a small To install a child restraint system
button above the anchorage point. designed to be attached to the lower
anchorages in either of the rear
You can find a lower anchorage in outer seats:
the slit on the seat-back.
1. Move the seat belt buckle or
EU models tongue away from the lower
Refer to page 57 for the anchorages.
recommended child restraint system.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:37:31 32TF0630_065
LOWER ANCHORAGE
GUIDE-CUP Rigid type Flexible type
Attach the guide-cups to the lower 4. Place the child restraint system on Other child restraints have a
anchorages as shown in the the vehicle seat, then attach the flexible-type connector as shown
illustration. child restraint system to the lower above.
anchorages according to the child
When using the guide-cups, restraint system makers
always follow the child restraint instructions.
system manufacturers
instructions. Some child restraint systems
designed for use with lower
anchorages have a rigid-type
connector as shown above.

10/10/25 18:37:40 32TF0630_066
5. Whatever type you have, follow

ATTACHING CLIP ATTACHING CLIP
the child restraint system makers
instructions for adjusting or
tightening the fit.
Flexible type child restraint

system is available in some
countries. In EU countries, this
type is not available.
6. Set the head restraint to its lowest

position. ANCHOR FITTING ANCHOR FITTING
7. Route the tether strap over the On some child restraint types,
head restraint, then attach the route the tether strap as shown.
attaching clip to the tether anchor
fitting in the ceiling as shown in
the illustration. Make sure the
strap is not twisted, then tighten
the strap according to the child
restraint system makers
instructions.
The above illustration shows how

the attaching clip should be routed
in EU countries. CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:37:48 32TF0630_067
8. Push and pull the child restraint Installing a Child Restraint EU models
system forward and from side-to- System with a Lap/Shoulder Belt Refer to page 57 for installing a child
side to verify that it is secure. When not using the lower restraint system.
anchorages system, all child
The design and suitability of the restraint systems must be secured to The procedures in the following
child restraint systems must be the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/ pages are described based on a front
carefully checked with the child shoulder belt. facing child restraint system
restraint system manufacturer available in EU countries.
concerned and the seller of those To properly route a lap/shoulder belt
systems. If you are not sure, consult through a child restraint system, 1. Place the child restraint system in
your dealer before purchasing this follow the restraint system makers the desired back seating position.
type of child restraint system. instructions. Make sure the child restraint is
positioned well back in the seat-
If you intend to install a child back.
restraint system in the centre
seating position of the rear seat,
make sure the detachable seat belt
anchor is securely latched (see page
158 ).

10/10/25 18:37:56 32TF0630_068
TAB
2. Route the belt through the 3. Push down the tab. Route the 4. Grab the shoulder part of the belt
restraint according to the restraint shoulder part of the belt into the near the buckle, and pull up to
system makers instructions, then slit at the side of the restraint. remove any slack from the lap part
insert the latch plate into the of the belt. Remember, if the lap
buckle and remove any slack from part of the belt is not tight, the
the lap portion of the belt. child restraint system will not be
secure.
To remove slack, put weight on

the child restraint system, or push
on the back of the restraint system
while pulling up on the belt.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:38:05 32TF0630_069
LOCKING CLIP
TAB
5. Secure the belt in the slit by 6. Push and pull the child restraint On vehicles without lockable retractor
pushing up the tab. Make sure the system forward and from side-to- fitted to the seat where the child is
belt is not twisted and it is side to verify that it is secure positioned
positioned properly in the slit. enough to stay upright during When you secure a child restraint
normal driving manoeuvres. system with a lap/shoulder belt, be
When pushing up the tab, make sure you install a locking clip on the
sure to pull up the upper shoulder To remove a child restraint system, seat belt (see page 66 ).
part of the lap/shoulder belt to unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
remove any slack from the belt. belt, and let the belt fully retract.

10/10/25 18:38:13 32TF0630_070
Installing a Rearward Facing Child Finally, push and pull the restraint
Restraint System with the Passenger forward and from side-to-side to
Front Airbag Off verify that it is secure enough to stay
We strongly recommend to put a upright during normal driving
rearward facing child restraint manoeuvres. If the restraint is not
system in a rear seating position. If it secure, unlatch the belt and repeat
is not avoidable to put a rearward these steps.
facing child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, you should To remove a child restraint system,
turn the passenger front airbag unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
system off. See page 34 for how to belt, and let the belt fully retract.
turn off the passenger front airbag
system. EU models
Then pull hard on the loose end of Refer to page 57 for the
To install a rearward facing child the belt to remove any slack (it may recommended rearward facing child
restraint system in the front help to put weight on the child restraint system.
passenger seat with the lap/shoulder restraint system while pulling on the
belt, route the belt through the belt).
restraint according to the restraint
system markers instructions, then
insert the latch plate into the buckle.

10/10/25 18:38:23 32TF0630_071
Using a Seat Belt Locking Clip To install a locking clip, do the LOCKING CLIP
On vehicles without lockable retractor following:
fitted to the seat where the child is
positioned 1. Place the child restraint in the seat
Always use a seat belt locking clip with a lap/shoulder belt. Route the
when you secure a child restraint lap/shoulder belt through the
system to your vehicle with a lap/ restraint according to the seat
shoulder belt. This helps prevent the manufacturers instructions.
restraint system from shifting
position or overturning. 2. Insert the latch plate into the
buckle. Pull on the shoulder part
A locking clip is usually included of the belt to make sure there is
with the child restraint system. If no slack in the lap portion.
you need a clip, contact the seats 4. Install the locking clip as shown.
manufacturer or a store that sells 3. Tightly grasp the belt near the Position the clip as close as
child restraints. latch plate. Pinch both parts of the possible to the latch plate.
belt together so they wont slip
If it is necessary to put a front facing through the latch plate. Unbuckle 5. Insert the latch plate into the
child restraint system in the front, the seat belt. buckle. Push and pull on the child
move the vehicle seat as far to the restraint system to verify that it is
rear as possible, be sure the child held firmly in place. If it is not,
restraint system is firmly secured to repeat these steps until the
the vehicle, and the child is properly restraint is secure.
strapped in the restraint system (see
page 53 ).

10/10/25 18:38:33 32TF0630_072
Installing a Child Restraint Since a tether can provide additional Using an Anchor Fitting
System with a Tether security to the lap/shoulder belt
Children riding in vehicles should be installation, we recommend using a ANCHOR FITTING
restrained to minimize the risk of tether whenever one is required or
injury in the event of an accident. available. (The owners may check
with the child restraint system
maker to determine whether a tether
is available for a particular child
restraint system.)
COVER
1. Set the head restraint to its lowest

position.
TETHER ANCHOR POINTS
2. After properly securing the child
A child restraint system with a tether restraint system (see page 62 ),
can be installed in either outer open the anchor cover.
seating position in the back seat,
using either of the anchor points
shown in the illustration.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:38:41 32TF0630_073
To attach the tether to the child

restraint system, follow the child
ATTACHING CLIP ATTACHING CLIP restraint system makers instructions.
When the child restraint system is

used, follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint system.
WARNING: Child restraint anchorages

are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are
ANCHOR FITTING ANCHOR FITTING they to be used for adult seat belts,
harnesses or for attaching other items
3. Attach the attaching clip to the On some child restraint types, or equipment to the vehicle.
anchor fitting, making sure the route the tether strap as shown.
strap is not twisted.
4. Tighten the strap according to the
child restraint system makers
instructions.

10/10/25 18:38:50 32TF0630_074
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a front facing child restraint Allowing a child age 12 or
system, the child should sit in a back under to sit in front can result
seat on a booster seat and wear the in injury or death if the
lap/shoulder belt. passengers front airbag
inflates.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper If a child must ride in front,
seat belt fit, what kind of booster move the vehicle seat as far
seat to use if one is needed, and back as possible, use a
important precautions for a child booster seat if needed, have
who must sit in front. the child sit up properly and
wear the seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
Make sure the seat-backs are put on the seat belt, then ask
latched securely before yourself:
driving. Leaning over the front door
can result in serious injury or 1. Does the child sit all the way back
death if the side airbag against the seat?
inflates.
2. Do the childs knees bend
Always sit upright with their comfortably over the edge of the
back against the seat-back. seat?
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:39:00 32TF0630_075
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat Booster seats can be high-back or
between the childs neck and arm? low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as approved safety standards (see page
possible, touching the childs 54 ) and that you follow the booster
thighs? seat makers instructions.
5. Will the child be able to stay If a child who uses a booster seat
seated like this for the whole trip? must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
If you answer yes to all these sure the child is wearing the seat
questions, the child is ready to wear belt properly.
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the A child may continue using a booster
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a front seat until the tops of their ears are
facing child restraint system should even with the top of the vehicles or
ride in a back seat and use a booster boosters seat-back. A child of this
seat until the lap/shoulder belt fits height should be tall enough to use
them properly without the booster. the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
EU models
Refer to page 57 for the booster seat
placement.

10/10/25 18:39:11 32TF0630_076
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And
Front while age may be one indicator of
It is recommended that all children when a child can safely ride in front,
age 12 and under be properly there are other important factors you
restrained in the back seat. should consider.
The back seat is the safest place for Physical Size

a child of any age or size. Physically, a child must be large
GUIDE
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
If the passengers front airbag properly fit (see pages 18 and 69 ). If
inflates in a moderate to severe the seat belt does not fit properly,
frontal collision, the airbag can cause with or without the child sitting on a
serious injuries to a child who is booster seat, the child should not sit
unrestrained, improperly restrained, in front.
A back-rest may be available for a sitting too close to the airbag, or out
specific booster seat. Install the of position. Maturity
back-rest to the booster seat and To safely ride in front, a child must
adjust it to the vehicle seat according A side airbag also poses risks. If any be able to follow the rules, including
to the booster seat makers part of a larger childs body is in the sitting properly, and wearing the seat
instructions. Make sure the seat belt path of a deploying side airbag, the belt properly throughout a ride.
is properly routed through the guide child could receive possibly serious
at the shoulder of the back-rest and injuries.
the belt does not touch and cross the
childs neck (see page 18 ).
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:39:20 32TF0630_077
If you decide that a child can safely Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a
ride up front, be sure to: Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a childs comfort or
Carefully read the owners manual, in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a
and make sure you understand all crash. seat belt can make the belt less
seat belt instructions and all safety effective and increase the chance
information. Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.
part of a seat belt behind the back
Move the vehicle seat to the rear- or under the arm. This could
most position. cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
Have the child sit up straight, back chance that the child will slide
against the seat, and feet on or under the belt in a crash and be
near the floor. injured.
Check that the childs seat belt is Two children should never use the
properly and securely positioned. same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
Remind the child not to lean crash.
toward the door.
Supervise the child. Even a mature

child sometimes needs to be
reminded to fasten the seat belt or
sit properly.

10/10/25 18:39:30 32TF0630_078
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicles exhaust contains With the tailgate open, airflow can
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon pull exhaust gas into your vehicles
monoxide should not enter the Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
vehicle in normal driving if you Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
maintain your vehicle properly and unconsciousness and even tailgate open, open all the windows,
follow the information on this page. kill you. and set the heating and cooling
system/climate control system as
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or shown below.
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide. If you must sit in your parked vehicle
The vehicle is raised for an oil with the engine running, even in an
change. unconfined area, adjust the heating
High levels of carbon monoxide can and cooling system/climate control
You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas, system as follows:
of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed. 1. Select the fresh air mode.
The vehicle was in a crash that Even with the door open, run the 2. Select the mode.
may have damaged the underside. engine only long enough to move the 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
vehicle out of the garage. 4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.

10/10/25 18:39:37 32TF0630_079
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations 1

shown. They warn you of potential PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG OFF SYSTEM LABEL
hazards that could cause serious CHILD SAFETY/SRS AIRBAG 1
injury. Read these labels carefully.

2
CHILD SAFETY/SRS AIRBAG
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read, contact your dealer for a FLEXIBLE LUGGAGE BOARD LABEL 3
replacement.
SIDE AIRBAG
RADIATOR CAP DANGER LABEL SIDE AIRBAG
BATTERY DANGER LABEL
1 : Left-hand drive type PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG OFF SYSTEM LABEL 2
2 : Right-hand drive type

3 : If equipped

10/10/25 18:39:48 32TF0630_080
Safety Labels
The label shown below is attached to The label shown below is attached to See the table below for what each
each front doorjamb. the side panel of the front passenger- icon refers to.
side instrument panel.
Front Passenger Front Airbag
Passenger OFF ON
Seat
Infant in a
rearward Can ride in Cannot ride
facing child the front in the front
restraint
system
Passenger
front airbag Inactive Active
is
Side Airbag
Safety alert symbol
Follow owner s manual

instructions carefully
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:39:52 32TF0630_081
Safety Labels
On vehicles with flexible luggage board

The label shown below is attached to
the left side of the flexible luggage
board.

10/10/25 18:39:57 32TF0630_082
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Tachometer .................................. 91 Drivers Seat Height
the controls and displays that Fuel Gauge ................................... 91 Adjustment ............................. 150
contribute to the daily operation of Multi-Information Display .............. 92 Armrests ..................................... 150
your vehicle. All the essential Controls Near the Steering Head Restraints ......................... 151
controls are within easy reach. Wheel .......................................... 122 Folding the Rear Seat Up ......... 155
Windscreen Wipers and Folding the Rear Seats Down .. 156
Washers ...................................... 124 Detachable Anchor.................... 158
Turn Signals and Headlights ........ 128 Seat Heaters ................................... 160
Front and Rear Fog Lights ........... 130 Luggage Area Cover ..................... 161
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 132 Power Windows ............................. 162
Hazard Warning Button ................ 133 Sunshade......................................... 164
Rear Window Demister ................ 133 Mirrors ............................................ 166
Headlight Adjuster ........................ 134 Parking Brake ................................ 168
Steering Wheel Adjustments ....... 135 Interior Convenience Items .......... 169
Keys and Locks.............................. 136 Lower Glove Box ....................... 170
Immobilizer System....................... 138 Upper Glove Box ....................... 170
Ignition Switch ............................... 139 Beverage Holders ...................... 171
Door Locks ..................................... 140 Front Console Box..................... 173
Power Door Locks ..................... 140 Seat Under Box .......................... 173
Super Locking ............................ 141 Sun Visor .................................... 173
Childproof Door Locks ............. 142 Vanity Mirror ............................. 174
Control Locations ............................ 78 Remote Transmitter ...................... 143 Coat Hook ................................... 174
Instrument Panel ............................. 80 Tailgate ........................................... 147 Accessory Power Socket .......... 175
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 82 Seats ................................................ 149 Flexible Luggage Board ........... 176
Gauges .............................................. 90 Front Seat Adjustments ............ 149 Cargo Floor Box ........................ 178
Speedometer ................................ 91 Interior Lights ................................ 179
Instruments and Controls 77

10/10/25 18:40:04 32TF0630_083
Control Locations
Left-hand drive type INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS SUNSHADE SWITCH

(P.82) (P.164)
GAUGES
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (P.90)
(P.92)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.195)
CLOCK
POWER DOOR LOCK (P.233)
MASTER SWITCH
(P.140)
DOOR LOCK TAB

POWER WINDOW (P.140)
SWITCHES
(P.162)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P.185)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
BONNET RELEASE HANDLE (P.190)
(P.260)
AT model is shown. (P.160) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (CVT)(P.277)
: If equipped
78 Instruments and Controls
10/10/25 18:40:12 32TF0630_084
Control Locations

SUNSHADE SWITCH MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.164) (P.92)
(P.82)
GAUGES
(P.90)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.195) POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
CLOCK (P.140)
(P.233)
DOOR LOCK TAB

(P.140) POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.162)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P.185) BONNET RELEASE
CLIMATE CONTROL HANDLE
SYSTEM (P.260)
(P.190)

AT model is shown. (P.160) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION(CVT) (P.277)
: If equipped
10/10/25 18:40:22 32TF0630_085
Instrument Panel
Manual transmission model
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.88) SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR (P.85)

REAR FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.86) IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.83)
FRONT FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.86)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.88)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.85)
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.83)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.83)
(P.87)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST SYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR
(VSA) SYSTEM OFF (P.40, 85)
INDICATOR
(P.87) DOOR AND TAILGATE
OPEN INDICATOR (P.83)
SHIFT UP INDICATOR
(P.276) SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR (P.82)
HIGH TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR (P.89) LOW FUEL INDICATOR
(P.89)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP (P.82, 417) PARKING BRAKE AND
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
MULTI-INFORMATION (P.84, 419)
(P.83, 416) DISPLAY (P.92)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(P.83, 413) ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (ABS) INDICATOR
LOW TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (P.89) (EPS) INDICATOR(P.86) (P.84)
SHIFT DOWN INDICATOR (P.276) ECO INDICATOR (P.83)
Since the indicators vary between models, some indicators are not on your vehicle.
10/10/25 18:40:32 32TF0630_086
Instrument Panel
Automatic transmission model
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR (P.85) IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.83)

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.88) CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.83)
REAR FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.86) LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.88)
FRONT FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.86)
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.83)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.85)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM INDICATOR SYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR
(P.87) (P.40, 85)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM DOOR AND TAILGATE
OFF INDICATOR OPEN INDICATOR (P.83)
(P.87)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
HIGH TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (P.82)
INDICATOR (P.89)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION (P.89)
INDICATOR LAMP
(P.82, 417)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
CHARGING SYSTEM MULTI-INFORMATION SYSTEM INDICATOR
INDICATOR (P.83, 416) DISPLAY (P.92) (P.84, 419)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(P.83, 413) ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (ABS) INDICATOR(P.84)
(EPS) INDICATOR (P.86)
LOW TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
(P.89) ECO INDICATOR (P.83)
Since the indicators vary between models, some indicators are not on your vehicle.
10/10/25 18:40:44 32TF0630_087
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many If you turn the ignition switch to the You will also see the symbol
indicators to give you important ON (II) position before fastening (for a driver)/ (for a front
information about your vehicle. your seat belt, the beeper sounds passenger), or this symbol with a
and the indicator flashes. If you do FASTEN SEAT BELT or
Malfunction Indicator not fasten your seat belt before the FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT
Lamp beeper stops, the indicator stops BELT message on the multi-
See page 417 . flashing but remains on. information display to remind you
and your passengers to fasten your
You will also see the symbol , If a front passenger does not fasten seat belts.
or this symbol with a CHECK their seat belt, the indicator will
SYSTEM message on the multi- come on about 6 seconds after the The seat belt system also monitors
information display. ignition switch is turned to the ON the seat belt use of all three rear
(II) position. seating positions according to the
Seat Belt Reminder activation of each seat belt retractor.
Indicator If either the driver or a front The multi-information display will
This indicator comes on when you passenger does not fasten their seat show you the seat belt use on the
turn the ignition switch to the ON belt while driving, the beeper will rear seat (see page 24 ).
(II) position. It reminds you and your sound and the indicator will flash
passengers to fasten your seat belts. again at regular intervals. For more
A beeper also sounds if you have not information, see page 23 .
fastened your seat belt.

10/10/25 18:41:00 32TF0630_088
Low Oil Pressure Cruise Main Indicator Immobilizer System

Indicator Indicator
The engine can be severely damaged If equipped This indicator comes on briefly when
if this indicator flashes or stays on This indicator comes on when you you turn the ignition switch to the
when the engine is running. For turn on the cruise control system by ON (II) position. It will go off if you
more information, see page 413 . pressing the CRUISE button (see have inserted a properly coded
page 235 ). ignition key. If it is not a properly
You will also see the symbol , coded key, the indicator will blink
or this symbol with an OIL Cruise Control Indicator and the engines fuel system will be
PRESSURE LOW message on the disabled (see page 138 ).
multi-information display. If equipped
This indicator comes on when you ECO Indicator
Charging System set the cruise control. See page
Indicator 235 for information on operating the This indicator comes on when you
If this indicator comes on when the cruise control. keep the engine operating in its
engine is running, the battery is not economical range.
being charged. For more information, Door and Tailgate Open
see page 416 . Indicator
This indicator comes on if any door
You will also see the symbol , or the tailgate is not closed tightly.
or this symbol with a CHECK
SYSTEM message on the multi- You will also see the symbol on the
information display. multi-information display to indicate
which door and/or the tailgate is not
closed tightly (see page 15 ).

10/10/25 18:41:12 32TF0630_089
Parking Brake and 2. If it remains lit after you fully Anti-lock Brake System
Brake System Indicator release the parking brake while (ABS) Indicator
This indicator has two functions: the engine is running, or if it This indicator normally comes on for
comes on while driving, there a few seconds when you turn the
1. It comes on when you turn the could be a problem with the brake ignition switch to the ON (II)
ignition switch to the ON (II) system. For more information, see position. If it comes on at any other
position. It is a reminder to check page 419 . time, there is a problem with the
the parking brake. A beeper ABS. If this happens, have your
sounds if you drive with the You will also see the symbol vehicle checked at a dealer. With
parking brake not fully released. (for the brake fluid level)/ this indicator on, your vehicle still
Driving with the parking brake not (for the brake system), or has normal braking ability but no
fully released can damage the this symbol with a BRAKE anti-lock function. For more
brakes and tyres. FLUID LOW or CHECK information, see page 289 .
SYSTEM message on the multi-
You will also see the symbol information display (see page You will also see the symbol ,
, or this symbol with a 419 ). or this symbol with a CHECK
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM message on the multi-
message in the multi-information information display (see page 289 ).
display (see page 168 ).

10/10/25 18:41:22 32TF0630_090
System Message Supplemental Restraint Security System Indicator

Indicator System Indicator If equipped
This indicator comes on when there This indicator comes on for several
is a system message on the multi- seconds when you turn the ignition
information display. Press the INFO switch to the ON (II) position. If it
button on the steering wheel to see comes on at any other time, it
the message (see page 93 ). indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This indicator will
Most of the time, this indicator also alert you to a potential problem
comes on along with other indicators with your side airbags, side curtain
in the instrument panel such as the airbags, passenger front airbag off
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS system, or automatic seat belt
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc. tensioners. For more information,
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
see page 40 .
You will also see the symbol , This indicator comes on when the
or this symbol with a CHECK security system is set. See page
SYSTEM message on the multi- 234 for more information on the
information display. security system.

10/10/25 18:41:34 32TF0630_091
Electric Power Steering If you turn the steering wheel to the Rear Fog Light Indicator
(EPS) Indicator full left or right position repeatedly
This indicator normally comes on while stopping or driving at very low This indicator comes on when you
when you turn the ignition switch to speed, you may feel slightly harder turn on the rear fog light. See pages
the ON (II) position and goes off steering in order to prevent damage 130 and 131 for information on
after the engine starts. If it comes on to the steering system caused by operating the rear fog light.
at any other time, there is a problem overheating. This may also happen if
in the electric power steering system. you hold the steering wheel on the Front Fog Light
full left or right position for a while. Indicator
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a (For some types)
safe place and turn off the engine. You will also see the symbol This indicator comes on when you
Reset the system by restarting the or this symbol with a CHECK turn on the front fog lights. See page
engine. The indicator will stay on, SYSTEM message on the multi- 131 for information on operating the
but should go off after driving a information display. front fog lights.
short distance. If it does not go off,
or comes back on again while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the indicator
on, the EPS may be turned off,
making the vehicle harder to steer.

10/10/25 18:41:44 32TF0630_092
Vehicle Stability Assist You will also see the symbol , VSA OFF Indicator
(VSA) System Indicator or this symbol with a CHECK
This indicator normally comes on for SYSTEM message on the multi- This indicator comes on as a
a few seconds when you turn the information display (see page 291 ). reminder that you have turned off
ignition switch to the ON (II) the vehicle stability assist (VSA)
position. system.
This indicator has two functions: This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
1. It flashes when VSA is active (see ignition switch to the ON (II)
page 291 ). position. For more information, see
page 292 .
2. If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, there is a problem with
the VSA system. Take your
vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your
vehicle still has normal driving
ability, but will not have VSA
traction and stability enhancement.
See page 291 for more information
on the VSA system.

10/10/25 18:41:54 32TF0630_093
Turn Signal and High Beam Indicator On vehicles with automatic lighting on
Hazard Warning feature
Indicators This indicator comes on with the This indicator also comes on when
The left or right turn signal indicator high beam headlights. For more the light switch is in AUTO and the
blinks when you signal a lane change information, see page 129 . lights turn on automatically.
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means Lights On Indicator You will see the symbol ,
one of the turn signal bulbs is or this symbol with a CHECK
burned out (see pages 343 , 344 , and This indicator reminds you that the SYSTEM message on the multi-
345 ). Replace the bulb as soon as exterior lights are on. It comes on information display if there is a
possible, since other drivers cannot when the light switch is in either the problem with the automatic
see that you are signaling. or position. If you turn the headlight control system.
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
When you press the hazard warning (I) or the LOCK (0) position without
button, both turn signal indicators turning off the light switch, this
and all turn signals on the outside of indicator will remain on. A reminder
the vehicle will flash. chime will also sound when you open
the drivers door without the key in
Your vehicle has the one-push turn the ignition switch.
signal feature to signal a lane change
easily (see page 128 ). You will also see the symbol
, or this symbol with a
HEADLIGHTS ON message on
the multi-information display (see
page 128 ).

10/10/25 18:42:06 32TF0630_094
High Temperature You will also see the symbol , Low Fuel Indicator
Indicator or this symbol with an ENGINE
This indicator shows the TEMP. HIGH message on the This indicator comes on as a
temperature of the engine coolant. It multi-information display. reminder that you must refuel soon.
normally comes on when you turn When the indicator comes on, there
the ignition switch to the ON (II) Low Temperature are about 7.9 (1.74 Imp gal) of fuel
position and goes off after a few Indicator remaining in the tank.
seconds. In normal driving This indicator shows the
conditions, this indicator should not temperature of the engine coolant. If You will also see the symbol
blink or stay on. In severe driving there is no problem, this indicator or this symbol with
conditions, such as very hot weather comes on when the engine is cold. If FUEL LOW message on the multi-
or a long period of uphill driving, this it comes on when the engine is warm information display.
indicator may blink. This means the (normal operating temperature),
engine coolant temperature is high. have the vehicle inspected by your When the needle reaches 0, there is
If the indicator begins to blink while dealer as soon as possible. a very small amount of fuel in the
you are driving, be sure to slow down tank.
to prevent overheating. If the
indicator stays on, pull safely to the
side of the road and turn off the
engine. See page 411 for instructions
and precautions on checking the
engines cooling system.
Do not drive the vehicle while the
indicator is on or the engine may be
damaged.

10/10/25 18:42:11 32TF0630_095
Gauges
SPEEDOMETER
TACHOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
SELECT/RESET KNOB
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
MT model is shown.

10/10/25 18:42:19 32TF0630_096
Gauges
Speedometer Tachometer Fuel Gauge

On vehicles with kilometer indication The tachometer shows the engine This shows how much fuel you have.
This shows your speed in kilometers speed in revolutions per minute It may show slightly more or less
per hour (km/h). (rpm). To protect the engine from than the actual amount.
damage, never drive with the
On vehicles with mile indication tachometer needle in the red zone.
This shows your speed in miles per
hour (mph). The inside scales show Avoid driving with an extremely low
the speed in kilometers per hour fuel level. Running out of fuel could
(km/h). cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
You can set the vehicle speed alarm.
For more information, see page 105 .

10/10/25 18:42:28 32TF0630_097
Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display in the Normal Display Symbols/

speedometer on the instrument Messages
panel displays various information
and symbols/messages when the UPPER SEGMENT UPPER SEGMENT
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the indicators/
messages help you operate your
vehicle more effectively. Others
keep you aware of the vehicles
condition for continued trouble-free
driving.
There are two types of symbols/

messages: normal display symbols/ LOWER SEGMENT LOWER SEGMENT
messages and system warning
symbols/messages. The multi-information display In normal display mode, the display
consists of an upper segment and a shows the trip computer, the rear
You can select the displayed lower segment. seat belt use, the Hands-Free
language and also customize some Telephone (HFT) use (if equipped),
vehicle control settings to your liking the odometer, the trip meter, the
with the multi-information display outside temperature, and the service
and the two buttons on the steering reminder (if equipped).
wheel (see page 93 ).

10/10/25 18:42:34 32TF0630_098
If there is any system warning,

system warning symbol(s) will be
shown on the multi-information
INFO BUTTON display. The system warning
symbol/message that has the
highest priority will be displayed first
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position.
INFO
BUTTON
SEL/RESET BUTTON SEL/RESET BUTTON

On vehicles with cruise control On vehicles without cruise control
In normal display mode, the upper then to no display as shown on the

display shows the trip computer and next page.
rear seat belt use when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II) When you turn the ignition switch to
position (see page 94 ). Each time the ON (II) position, what you last
you press the INFO button, the trip selected is shown in the multi-
computer changes from the instant information display.
fuel economy to the average fuel
economy, to the estimated distance,
to the elapsed time, to the average
speed, to the rear seat belt use and

10/10/25 18:42:40 32TF0630_099
Kilometer indication type
HFT If on.
: Press the INFO button.
Mile indication type
HFT If on.

: If equipped

10/10/25 18:42:56 32TF0630_100
Trip Computer Average Fuel Economy Range

Indicators in the trip computer show: : Your vehicles average fuel : The estimated distance you
economy since you last reset the trip can travel on the fuel remaining in
Instant Fuel Economy computer A. the tank.
Kilometer indication This distance is estimated from the
: Your vehicles instant fuel : Your vehicles average fuel fuel economy you have achieved
economy is shown in l/100 km. economy since you last reset the trip over the last few kilometers (miles),
computer B. so it will vary with changes in speed,
Mile indication traffic condition, etc.
: Your vehicles instant fuel The average fuel economy is
economy is shown in mpg. updated once every 10 seconds. Elapsed Time
When you reset a trip meter, the : The time travelled since
average fuel economy for that trip you last turned the ignition switch to
meter also resets. To reset the the ON (II) position.
values in the trip computer, press
and hold the SEL/RESET button Average Vehicle Speed
until the number resets to 0.0. : The average speed you are
travelling is displayed in kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per hour
(mph) depending on the model.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:43:06 32TF0630_101
Trip Meter
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
This meter shows the number of
kilometers or miles driven since you
ODOMETER TRIP A TRIP B SERVICE REMINDER last reset it.
(see page 317)
There are two trip meters: trip A and
trip B. To switch the display between
them, press the SEL/RESET button
repeatedly. When you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, your last selection is
displayed.
: Press the SEL/RESET button. Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
: If equipped different distances.
The lower segment shows the Odometer To reset a trip meter, display it, and
odometer, trip meter, the outside The odometer shows the total then press and hold the SEL/RESET
temperature and the service number of kilometers or miles your button until the number resets to
reminder (if equipped) in the normal vehicle has been driven. 0.0.
display mode.
Pressing the SEL/RESET button

changes the display as shown.

10/10/25 18:43:15 32TF0630_102
Outside Temperature Indicator If the outside temperature is Service Reminder Information

This indicator displays the outside incorrectly displayed, you can adjust If equipped
temperature in degrees Celsius. it by up to 3C warmer or cooler This shows the remaining distance
(see page 113 ). or time until a service is required. It
The temperature sensor is in the also displays a service item code to
front bumper. Therefore, the NOTE: The temperature must be indicate the service item(s) required
temperature reading can be affected stabilized before doing this at the next service maintenance. For
by heat reflection from the road procedure. more information, see page 307 .
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic. In certain weather conditions,
This can cause an incorrect temperature readings near freezing
temperature reading when your could mean that ice is forming on the
speed is under 30 km/h (19 mph). road surface. You will also see a
caution symbol on the multi-
The sensor delays the display update information display.
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several
minutes.

10/10/25 18:43:23 32TF0630_103
Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) To use the system, your cell phone System Warning Symbols
(For some types) and the HFT system must be linked. If there is a problem with your
Not all cell phones are compatible vehicle, for example, the parking
with this system. Refer to page brake is not fully released or a door
238 for instructions on how to link is not fully closed, the multi-
your cell phone to HFT and how to information display will show you the
receive or make phone calls. problem. It does this by interrupting
the current display with one or more
symbols/messages.
You can receive or make phone calls

from your cell phone through your
Hands-Free Telephone (HFT)
system without touching your cell
phone.

10/10/25 18:43:29 32TF0630_104
When your vehicle is new, the multi- The following pages describe each
information display shows the system warning symbol/message
system warning symbols without the that can be displayed. Here is a list of
messages. This is the default setting all symbols:
when the vehicle leaves the factory.
You can customize this setting to see
the system warning symbols with
messages (see page 112 ). Some
symbols such as the low outside
temperature, rear seat belt reminder
indicator, etc., do not come with a
message. SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
In this section, system symbols These symbols/messages also

without messages are used in almost trigger the appropriate indicator(s)
all examples. on the instrument panel and cause
the system message indicator to
come on. The system message
indicator does not go off until the
problem(s) are corrected.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:43:41 32TF0630_105
See page See page See pages

417. 415. 84 and 289.
See pages See page See pages

89 and 411. 86. 84 and 168.
See pages See pages See pages

83 and 413. 83 and 416. 335 and 419.
See pages See page See page

84 and 419. 418. 277.
See page See pages See page

414. 40 and 85. 240.

10/10/25 18:43:51 32TF0630_106
See page See pages See page

291. 88 and 128. 89.
See pages See page

Service Reminder System (If applicable)
23 and 82. 138.
See page
See pages See page 307.
23 and 82. 97.
See page
See page See pages 307.
24. 88 and 129.
See page See page

15. 105.

10/10/25 18:43:59 32TF0630_107
Customized Settings
You can customize some of the vehicle control settings to suit your needs. The table shows the settings you can
customize.
Group Setup Menu Item Description Setting Option Page
SPEED ALARM SPEED ALARM 1 (ON/OFF, Setting) Turns the speed alarm on or off and changes the ON/OFF2
(P.105) SPEED ALARM 2 (ON/OFF, Setting) alarm speed setting. over 5 km/h (mph) 105
with 5 km/h (mph) steps
SPEED ALARM 11 (ON/OFF) Turns the speed alarm on or off with the preset ON/OFF2 108
SPEED ALARM 21 (ON/OFF) alarm speed.
CHG SETTING WARNING MESSAGE Toggles warning message on or off. ON/OFF2 112
(P.110) ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY Adjusts the outside temperature reading above or up to 3C 113
below its current reading. 0C2
TRIP A RESET WITH REFUEL Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy ON/OFF2 115
A to reset when you refuel.
ELAPSED TIME RESET Resets the elapsed time of your current trip. IGN OFF2, TRIP A, 116
TRIP B
LANGUAGE Changes the language used in the display. ENGLISH2, ITALIAN,
(P.118) SPANISH, GERMAN, 118
FRENCH, PORTUGUESE
DEFAULT ALL Returns all settings to the factory default. CANCEL 2 120
(P.120) OK
1 : Setting is available while driving

2 : Factory default setting

10/10/25 18:44:08 32TF0630_108
To enter the customizing mode, the

vehicle must be stopped with the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position and the parking brake set on
vehicles with manual transmission. If
your vehicle has the automatic
transmission, the shift lever should
be in Park. (Exceptionally, this
condition is not applied on some
speed alarm settings.) Press and
hold the INFO button ( ) on the
steering wheel for about 3 seconds
while the multi-information display is
in its normal display. Here are the
settings you can customize.
: Press the
INFO button.
SPEED ALARM: To set the speed
alarm (see page 105 ).
DEFAULT ALL: To return to the Each time you press the INFO
CHG SETTING: To change default settings (see page 120 ). button, the display changes as shown
vehicle control settings (see page above.
110 ).
LANGUAGE: To select language

(see page 118 ).
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:44:17 32TF0630_109
You can also select the specified

speed alarm while driving. If you set
the alarm to the specified vehicle
speed while driving, select SPEED
ALARM, and refer to page 105 .
If you want to change any vehicle

control settings, select CHG
SETTING, and follow the
instructions on page 110 .
If you want the settings as they were

when the vehicle left the factory,
select DEFAULT ALL, as If you try to start driving while To exit the customizing mode, select
described on page 120 . customizing the settings, you will see the exit mode shown above by
the above display for a few seconds pressing the INFO button repeatedly,
Use the INFO button ( ) on the and customizing will be cancelled. then press the SEL/RESET button.
steering wheel to see and scroll The display goes back to the normal
through the settings, and the SEL/ Customizing is also cancelled, if you display.
RESET button to enter your turn the ignition switch out of the
selections. ON (II) position or release the
parking brake (M/T) or move the
shift lever out of Park (A/T).

10/10/25 18:44:24 32TF0630_110
Speed Alarm To set the speed alarm while the vehicle

You can access different alarm is stopped:
functions when the vehicle is
stopped or while driving. While
driving, you can select either of the
two speed alarm settings. When your
vehicle is stopped, you can customize
the setting speed to your preference.
Alarm at vehicle speed 50 km/h is set.
If you set the speed alarm function in

the custom settings, you will see this
indicator and hear a beep when the Press and hold the INFO button to
vehicle speed reaches the set speed. enter the customizing mode, then
You can set two different speeds for press and release the INFO button
the alarm. repeatedly to select SPEED
ALARM. While the multi-
information display is showing
SPEED ALARM, press the SEL/
RESET button. The display changes
to the setting mode.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:44:33 32TF0630_111
Speed setting 1: You can set the

alarm on or off, and adjust the
setting speeds above or below
Speed setting 1 off is selected. 50 km/h (30 mph). Alarm off Alarm on
Speed setting 2: You can set the

alarm on or off, and adjust the
setting speeds above or below
80 km/h (50 mph).
Each time you press and release the

INFO button ( ), the selected icon
is changed between set 1, 50 km/h
km/h type is shown. (30 mph), and set 2, 80 km/h (50
mph). Then press the INFO button
You can set the speed alarm in km/h again to exit ( ). Select either of the setting modes (1
or mph, depending on models. The or 2), then select on or off by
two speed selections and the on/off pressing the SEL/RESET button
setting icons are displayed. repeatedly.

10/10/25 18:44:40 32TF0630_112
Each time you press the SEL/

RESET button, the setting speed
increases or decreases by 5 km/h
(mph). You can set the speed values
over 5 km/h (5 mph) with 5 km/h
(mph) steps. Always follow the
posted speed limit and never drive
faster than is safe for the traffic
conditions.
To enter your selection, select the

SET icon by pressing the INFO
button, then press the SEL/RESET
button.
To adjust the setting speed, select The displayed number is the current
either of the setting speeds, then speed setting. Select either the or
press and release the SEL/RESET icon by pressing the INFO button
button. The display changes to the repeatedly, then press the SEL/
speed setting screen. RESET button to change the setting
value.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:44:46 32TF0630_113
Once you have made your selection, To select the alarm speed while driving: You can select the alarm speed
press and release the INFO button to between the two setting speeds:
move to the exit mode. Press the 50 km/h and 80 km/h, or 30 mph
SEL/RESET button to enter your and 50 mph, depending on models.
setting. If you press the INFO button, Each time you press and release the
the display goes back to the setting INFO button, the selected icon is
mode. Repeat the setup. changed between the setting speeds
and the exit icon.
km/h type is shown.
Press the INFO button for about 1

second to switch the display. You will
see the speed alarm settings on the
multi-information display.

10/10/25 18:44:53 32TF0630_114
After your selection, press and

release the INFO button to move to
the exit mode. Press the SEL/
RESET button to enter your setting.
Alarm on
If you press the INFO button, the
display goes back to the setting
mode. Repeat the setup.
Alarm off Alarm on
Select the desired setting speed, After pressing the SEL/RESET

then press the SEL/RESET button. button, the display shows your
Each time you press the SEL/ setting for a few seconds, then goes
RESET button, the selected speed back to the normal display.
icon switches between on and off.
If you do not press any button, the
display returns to the normal display
after about 10 seconds.

10/10/25 18:45:01 32TF0630_115
Change Setting
You can customize some of the
vehicle control settings to suit your
needs. The following items are the
settings you can customize.
WARNING MESSAGE: The

warning message is displayed with
the symbol or not (see page 112 ).
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.

DISPLAY: The outside
temperature indicator value is
adjustable up to or 3C (see
page 113 ).
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
TRIP A RESET WITH REFUEL:
Average fuel economy for trip ELAPSED TIME RESET: The
meter A can be reset after elapsed time can be reset when
refueling (see page 115 ). you turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position or when you
reset trip meter A or B (see page
116 ).

10/10/25 18:45:07 32TF0630_116
Press and hold the INFO button to Press and release the INFO button
enter the customizing mode, then repeatedly until you see the setup
press and release the INFO button you want to customize, and press the
repeatedly to select CHG SETTING. SEL/RESET button to enter your
While the multi-information display selection. Each time you press the
is showing CHG SETTING, press INFO button, the display changes as
the SEL/RESET button. The display shown. To customize each setting,
changes to the setting mode. follow the procedures described on
the following pages.
To exit the customizing mode after

your selection, select the exit mode
shown above by pressing the INFO
button repeatedly, then press the
SEL/RESET button. The display will
return to the normal display.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:45:14 32TF0630_117
Warning Message
You can see message(s) with the You can select ON or OFF. Each When your selection is successfully
system warning symbol on the multi- time you press the INFO button, the completed, the display shows
information display. While the multi- selected mode switches between on, SETUP ON for a few seconds,
information display is showing off, and exit ( ). Enter your then goes back to the CHG
WARNING MESSAGE, press the selection by pressing the SEL/ SETTING display. Press the SEL/
SEL/RESET button. The display RESET button. RESET button, then press the INFO
changes to the setting display. button repeatedly to select another
customizing mode.

10/10/25 18:45:20 32TF0630_118
To return to the normal display, Outside Temperature Display

select the display, then press Adjustment
the SEL/RESET button. If you find that the temperature
reading is always a few degrees
below or above the actual
temperature, adjust it as described in
the following section.
If you fail to enter your selection,

you will see INCOMPLETE on the
display for a few seconds. The
display returns to the setting mode.
Repeat the setup.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:45:27 32TF0630_119
While the multi-information display The highlighted number is the When your selection is successfully
is showing ADJUST OUTSIDE current adjustment above or below completed, the display shows
TEMP. DISPLAY, press the SEL/ the outside temperature. Select SETUP 0C for a few seconds,
RESET button. The display changes either or icon by pressing the then goes back to the CHG
to the setting display. INFO button repeatedly then press SETTING display. Press the SEL/
the SEL/RESET button to change RESET button, then press the INFO
the setting value. You can select the button repeatedly to select another
value between 0, 1, 2, 3, and 0, customizing mode.
1, 2, 3. To enter your selection,
select the SET icon by pressing the
INFO button, then press the SEL/
RESET button.

10/10/25 18:45:35 32TF0630_120
If you fail to enter your selection, Trip A Reset With Refuel

Repeat the setup.
To exit the customizing mode, select

the exit mode by pressing the INFO
SEL/RESET button. The display
goes back to the normal display.
To cause the trip meter A and the You can select ON or OFF. Each
average fuel economy for trip A to time you press the INFO button, the
reset every time you refuel your selected mode switches between on,
vehicle, adjust it as follows. off, and exit ( ). Enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
While the multi-information display RESET button.
is showing TRIP A RESET WITH
REFUEL, press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes to the
setting display.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:45:43 32TF0630_121
If you fail to enter your selection, Elapsed Time Reset

Repeat the setup.
To exit the customizing mode, select

the exit mode by pressing the INFO
SEL/RESET button. The display will
return to the normal display.
When your selection is successfully To cause the elapsed time to reset

completed, the display shows every time you turn the ignition
SETUP ON or SETUP OFF for a switch to the LOCK (0) position or
few seconds, then goes back to the reset trip meter A or B, adjust it as
CHG SETTING display. Press the described as follows.
SEL/RESET button, then press the
INFO button repeatedly to select While the multi-information display
another customizing mode. is showing ELAPSED TIME
RESET, press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes to the
setting display.

10/10/25 18:45:50 32TF0630_122
IGN OFF: The elapsed time is reset

when you turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position.
TRIP A: The elapsed time is reset

when you reset trip meter A.
TRIP B: The elapsed time is reset

when you reset trip meter B.
IGN OFF is selected.
You can select IGN OFF, When your selection is successfully

TRIP A, or TRIP B. Each time completed, the display shows the
you press the INFO button, the appropriate setting; SETUP IGN
selected mode switches between OFF, SETUP TRIP A, or SETUP
them. Enter your selection by TRIP B for a few seconds, then
pressing the SEL/RESET button. goes back to the CHG SETTING
display. Press the SEL/RESET
button, then press the INFO button
repeatedly to select another
customizing mode.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:45:56 32TF0630_123
If you fail to enter your selection, To exit the customizing mode, select Selecting Language
you will see INCOMPLETE on the the exit mode by pressing the INFO
display for a few seconds. The button repeatedly, then press the
display returns to the setting mode. SEL/RESET button. The display
Repeat the setup. goes back to the normal display.
Press and hold the INFO button to

enter the customizing mode, then
press and release the INFO button to
select LANGUAGE. While the
multi-information display is showing
LANGUAGE, press the SEL/
RESET button. The display changes
to the setting display.

10/10/25 18:46:02 32TF0630_124
ENGLISH is selected.
You can select any of the following When the language selection is If you fail to set the language setting,
languages: English, French, German, successfully completed, the display you will see INCOMPLETE on the
Spanish, Italian, Portuguese. Press changes to the screen shown above display for a few seconds. The
and release the INFO button to for a few seconds, then goes back to display returns to the setting mode.
select the language, then press the the LANGUAGE display. Press the Repeat the setup.
SEL/RESET button to enter the INFO button repeatedly to select
selection. another customizing mode.

10/10/25 18:46:09 32TF0630_125
Default Settings
If you want to set the customizable If you want to cancel DEFAULT To set the default settings, select
vehicle control settings to the default ALL, select CANCEL, then press OK by pressing the INFO button,
setting, press the INFO button on the SEL/RESET button. The screen then press the SEL/RESET button.
the steering wheel repeatedly until goes back to the previous display.
DEFAULT ALL is displayed, then
press the SEL/RESET button.

10/10/25 18:46:14 32TF0630_126
After the DEFAULT ALL operation If the DEFAULT ALL operation is

is completed, you will see the above not successful, you will see the above
display for a few seconds, then the display for a few seconds, then the
display switches to the language display goes back to the setting
setting mode. display.

10/10/25 18:46:23 32TF0630_127
Controls Near the Steering Wheel

PADDLE SHIFTERS2 WINDSCREEN HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS (P.282) WIPERS/WASHERS (P.133)
(P.128) (P.124)
REAR FOG LIGHT/
FRONT FOG LIGHTS2
(P.130) PASSENGER FRONT
REMOTE AUDIO (P.41)
CONTROLS2
(P.231)
MIRROR CONTROLS (P.133/167)
(P.166)
ACCESSORY POWER
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER SOCKET
(P.134) (P.175)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST USB ADAPTER CABLE

(VSA) OFF SWITCH 1
SOCKET2
(P.292) HORN (P.215, 223)
STEERING WHEEL CRUISE CONTROLS2

HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS (P.235)
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS2 (P.135)
(P.238)
MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS
AT model is shown. (P.93)
2 : If equipped
10/10/25 18:46:31 32TF0630_128
Controls Near the Steering Wheel

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS PADDLE SHIFTERS2 WINDSCREEN
(P.128) (P.282) WIPERS/WASHERS
REAR FOG LIGHT/FRONT FOG LIGHTS2 (P.124)
HAZARD WARNING (P.130)
BUTTON
(P.133) CRUISE CONTROLS2
(P.235)
PASSENGER FRONT
AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.41) (P.166)
REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/ VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON2 (VSA) OFF SWITCH
(P.133/167) (P.292)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER
(P.175) (P.134)
MULTI-INFORMATION
USB ADAPTER CABLE SOCKET2 REMOTE AUDIO STEERING WHEEL HORN1 BUTTONS
(P.215, 223) CONTROLS2 ADJUSTMENTS (P.93)
(P.231) (P.135)
AT model is shown. HANDS FREE TELEPHONE SYSTEM VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS2 (P.238)
2 : If equipped
10/10/25 18:46:43 32TF0630_129
Windscreen Wipers and Washers
Windscreen Wipers INT The wipers operate every

few seconds.
On some models
The length of the wiper interval is
varied automatically according to
the vehicles speed.
Vary the delay by turning the
adjustment ring. If you turn it to
the shortest delay
( position), the wipers
change to low speed operation
Vehicle with ADJ ring. when the vehicle speed exceeds
20 km/h (12 mph).
1. MIST Push the lever up or down to select a
2. OFF position. While the vehicle is stopped and in
3. INT Intermittent gear, the wipers sweep the
(AUTO) MIST The wipers run at high windscreen whenever you remove
4. LO Low speed speed until you release the lever. your foot from the brake pedal.
5. HI High speed
6. Windscreen washers OFF The wipers are not activated. LO The wipers run at low speed.
: On vehicles with automatic HI The wipers run at high speed.

intermittent wipers, see page
125 .

10/10/25 18:46:51 32TF0630_130
Windscreen Washers Pull the Automatic Intermittent Wipers When the system senses rainfall, it
wiper control lever toward you, On some models turns on the windscreen wipers and
and hold it. The washers spray varies their speed (intermittent, low
until you release the lever. The speed, or high speed) depending on
wipers run at low speed, then how hard it is raining.
complete one more sweep after
you release the lever. When the wiper lever is in the LO
(low speed) or HI (high speed)
position, the windscreen wipers run
at that speed. Automatic sensing is
disabled.
The automatic intermittent wiper

system senses rainfall and
automatically turns on the
windscreen wipers. To enable
sensing, push the lever down to
select AUTO.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:46:58 32TF0630_131
Do not position the wiper lever in

RAINFALL SENSOR AUTO when driving through a car
wash. Turn off this system when not
in use.
ADJUSTMENT RING
You can adjust the sensitivity of the The rainfall sensor is located in the
system by turning the adjustment windscreen near the rearview mirror.
ring on the wiper lever. If the sensor is covered with mud, oil,
dust, etc., the wipers may not
operate properly or may operate
unexpectedly.

10/10/25 18:47:10 32TF0630_132
Rear Window Wiper and Washer On some models

When you shift the transmission to
the reverse position with the front
windscreen wipers activated, the
rear window wiper operates
automatically.
When the front wiper control lever is

set to the INT position, the rear
wiper operates intermittently. When
the front wiper is set to the LO or HI
position, the rear wiper operates
Vehicle with ADJ ring. continuously.
1. OFF 3. Hold past ON to activate the rear When the front wiper control lever is
When you turn the wiper switch to window wiper a few times and to AUTO, the rear wiper operates
the OFF position, the wiper will spray the rear window washer. according to the front wiper
return to its parked position. operation.
4. Rotate the switch down from the
2. Rotate the switch to ON to turn OFF position also to spray the The rear window washer uses the
the rear window wiper on. window washer and turn the wiper same fluid reservoir as the
on. windscreen washer.
On some models
The wiper operates every 7
seconds after completing two
sweeps.

10/10/25 18:47:21 32TF0630_133
Turn Signals and Headlights
Turn Signal Push down or up on Headlights On Turning the

the lever to signal a turn. To signal a switch to the position turns
lane change, push lightly on the on the position lights, tail-lights,
lever in the proper direction and hold instrument panel lights, and rear
it. The lever will return to centre licence plate lights.
when you release it or complete a
turn. Turning the switch to the
position turns on the headlights.
One-push Turn Signal
To signal a lane change easily, push When the light switch is in the
the turn signal lever in the proper or the position, the
direction lightly and release it. The lights on indicator comes on as a
left or right turn signal indicator on reminder.
1. Turn signal the instrument panel and the
2. Off appropriate outside turn signals will This indicator stays on if you leave
3. Position and instrument panel blink three times. the lights on and turn the ignition
lights switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
4. AUTO If you hold the turn signal lever, the LOCK (0) position.
5. Headlights on turn signal continues to blink and
6. High beams will stop when you release it. If you leave the lights on with the
7. Flash high beams key removed from the ignition
8. Fog lights off switch, you will hear a reminder
9. Front fog lights on chime when you open the drivers
10.Front and rear fog lights on door.
11.Rear fog light on
: If equipped

10/10/25 18:47:33 32TF0630_134
Headlights
You will also see the symbol , On some models Even with the automatic lighting
or this symbol with a AUTO The automatic lighting feature turned on, we recommend
HEADLIGHTS ON message on feature turns on the headlights, all that you turn on the lights manually
the multi-information display. other exterior lights, and the when driving at night or in a dense
instrument panel lights when it fog, or when you enter dark areas
High Beams Push the lever senses low ambient light. such as long tunnels or parking
forward until you hear a click to turn facilities.
on the high beams. The blue high To turn on the automatic lighting,
beam indicator will come on (see turn the light switch to the AUTO Do not leave the light switch in
page 88 ). Pull the lever back to position. The lights will come on AUTO if you will not be driving the
return to the low beams. automatically when the outside light vehicle for an extended period (a
level becomes low (at dusk, for week or more). You should also turn
To flash the high beams, pull the example). The lights on indicator off the lights if you plan to leave the
lever back lightly, then release it. comes on as a reminder. The lights engine idling or the engine off for a
The high beams will stay on as long and indicator turn off automatically long time.
as you hold the lever back. when the system senses high
ambient light. If there is a problem with the
Daytime Running Lights automatic lighting control system,
(For some types) The lights turn off automatically you will see the symbol , or
The daytime running lights come on when you turn the ignition switch to the symbol with a CHECK
automatically when you turn the the LOCK (0) position. To turn them SYSTEM message on the multi-
ignition switch to the ON (II) on again, either turn the ignition information display. Have the vehicle
position. They go out automatically switch to the ON (II) position, or checked by your dealer as soon as
when the light switch is turned to turn the light switch to the possible.
the position. position.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:47:42 32TF0630_135
Headlights, Front and Rear Fog Lights
LIGHTING SENSOR
Rear Fog Light To operate the rear fog light, turn
(For some types) the switch up from the off ( )
position. The indicator in the
instrument panel comes on to
indicate that the rear fog light is on.
You can turn off the rear fog light

with the headlights on by turning the
switch up again.
The rear fog light will go off when

you turn the headlights off. To turn
REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH
the rear fog light on again, you have
The automatic lighting feature is to turn the rear fog light switch
controlled by a sensor located on the again with the headlights on.
windscreen near the rearview mirror. The rear fog light switch is located
Do not cover this sensor or spill next to the light control switch. You
liquids on it. can use the rear fog light when the
headlights are on (the light control
switch is in the position).

10/10/25 18:47:56 32TF0630_136
Front and Rear Fog Lights
Front and Rear Fog Lights in the instrument panel comes on as The front and rear fog lights will go
(For some types) a reminder. off when you turn the light control
switch off. When you turn the light
You can turn on the front fog lights control switch on again, the front fog
when the light control switch is in lights only will also turn on.
the or position.
Rear Fog Light On Turn the fog
To turn off the front fog lights, turn light switch down from the OFF
the fog light switch to the OFF position. The indicator in the
position. instrument panel comes on as a
reminder.
Front and Rear Fog Lights On
Turn the fog light switch one The rear fog light turns on only
position up from the front fog lights when the light control switch is in
on position. In addition to the the position.
1. Off indicator, the indicator
2. Front fog lights on comes on as a reminder to indicate To turn off the rear fog light with the
3. Front and rear fog lights on that the rear fog light is on. headlights on, turn the fog light
4. Rear fog light on switch down again.
You can turn on the rear fog light
The fog light switch is located next when the front fog light is turned on. When you turn off the headlights,
to the light control switch. the rear fog light will go off. To turn
To turn off the rear fog light with the it on again, you have to operate the
Front Fog Lights On Turn the front fog lights on, turn the fog light fog light switch again.
switch up from the OFF position to switch up again.
the ON position. The indicator

10/10/25 18:48:04 32TF0630_137
Instrument Panel Brightness
To reduce glare at night, the

instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to the
or position. Turning the
knob to the right until you hear a
tone will cancel the reduced
brightness.
BRIGHTNESS LEVELS
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL KNOB On the multi-information display
The knob on the instrument panel The brightness can be shown within
controls the brightness of the the six brightness levels.
instrument panel lights. Turn the When you turn the knob, the lower
knob to adjust the brightness with segment of the display changes to
the ignition switch in the ON (II) vertical bars that show you the
position and the position lights on. current level.
You will hear a tone when you reach

the maximum or minimum
brightness. The brightness level
goes out about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting.

10/10/25 18:48:12 32TF0630_138
Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Demister
Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Demister
Manual air conditioning system Automatic air conditioning system
Push the red button to turn on the The rear window demister will clear On models with automatic air
hazard warning lights (four-way fog, frost, and thin ice from the conditioning system
flashers). This causes all outside window. Turn the ignition switch to The demister will shut itself off
turn signals and both turn indicators the ON (II) position. Push the within about 10 to 30 minutes
in the instrument panel to flash. Use demister button to turn it on and off. according to the outside temperature.
these lights to give a warning to The indicator in the button comes on
other road users that your vehicle is to show the demister is on. It shuts In cold weather, the demister will not
causing a hazard. off when you turn off the ignition automatically shut itself off. You
switch. You have to turn the must manually shut off the rear
demister on again when you restart window demister when it is no
the vehicle. longer needed.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:48:23 32TF0630_139
Rear Window Demister, Headlight Adjuster
Make sure the rear window is clear Headlight Adjuster 0: A driver or a driver and passenger
and you have good visibility before in the front seat.
starting to drive. 1: Five persons in the front and rear
seats.
The demister wires on the inside of 2: Five persons in the front and rear
the rear window can be accidentally seats and luggage in the luggage
damaged. When cleaning the glass, area, within the limits of maximum
always wipe side-to-side. permissible rear axle weight or
maximum permissible vehicle
On some models weight.
Pushing the demister also turns the 3: A driver and luggage in the
mirror heaters on and off. For more luggage area, within the limits of
information, see page 167 . ADJUSTING DIAL maximum permissible rear axle
weight or maximum permissible
The vertical angle of the headlights vehicle weight.
can be adjusted according to the
number of persons and the loading
weight in the luggage area.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position. Turn the adjusting dial
to select an appropriate angle of the
headlights.

10/10/25 18:48:31 32TF0630_140
Steering Wheel Adjustments
Make any steering wheel 3. Push the lever down to lock the
adjustments before you start driving. steering wheel in position.
4. Make sure you have securely

locked the steering wheel in place
Adjusting the steering wheel by trying to move it up, down, in,
position while driving may and out.
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle and be seriously
injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel LEVER

only when the vehicle is
stopped. To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever under the steering

column all the way up.
2. Move the steering wheel up or

down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.

10/10/25 18:48:41 32TF0630_141
Keys and Locks
KEY NUMBER IGNITION KEY WITH You should have received a key These keys contain electronic
TAG REMOTE TRANSMITTER number tag with your keys. You will circuits that are activated by the
need this key number if you ever immobilizer system. They will not
have to get a lost key replaced. Use work to start the engine if the
only Honda-approved key blanks. circuits are damaged.
Remote Transmitter Protect the keys from direct

Your two ignition keys are also fitted sunlight, high temperature, and
with remote transmitters; see page high humidity.
142 for an explanation of the
operation. Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
Two ignition keys come with your Keep the keys away from liquids.
vehicle. You should keep one of If they get wet, dry them
them in a safe place, away from the immediately with a soft cloth.
vehicle, as a spare.
They fit all the locks on your vehicle.

10/10/25 18:48:47 32TF0630_142
Keys and Locks
Retractable Ignition Key If the key is not pivoted out fully and The key may come in contact with
securely, you may not turn the key your finger while being retracted or
RELEASE BUTTON properly and the immobilizer system extended. Make sure your fingers do
may not recognize your key properly. not touch the pivot of the key when
Push retracting or extending the key.
The ignition key can be retracted

into the remote transmitter. To use
the key, push the release button to
release the key from the transmitter.
The key should be fully extended.
To retract the key, push the release
button and at the same time push the
key into the remote transmitter until
it is securely latched.

10/10/25 18:48:54 32TF0630_143
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects If the system repeatedly does not EC Directives
your vehicle from theft. If an recognize the coding of your key, This immobilizer system complies
improperly coded key (or other contact your dealer. with the R & TTE (Radio equipment
device) is used, the engines fuel and Telecommunications Terminal
system is disabled. Do not attempt to alter this system Equipment and the mutual
or add other devices to it. Electrical recognition of their conformity)
When you turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make Directives.
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer your vehicle inoperable.
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator If you have lost your key and cannot
starts to blink, it means the system start your engine, contact your
does not recognize the coding of the dealer.
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.
The system may not recognize your

keys coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
chain) is near the ignition switch
when you insert the key.

10/10/25 18:49:03 32TF0630_144
Ignition Switch
If the front wheels are turned, the START (III) Use this position
anti-theft lock may make it difficult only to start the engine. The switch
to turn the key. Firmly turn the returns to the ON (II) position when
steering wheel to the left or right as you let go of the key.
you turn the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
ACCESSORY (I) You can you leave the key in the ignition
operate the audio system and the switch in the LOCK (0) or the
accessory power socket in this ACCESSORY (I) position and open
position. the drivers door. You will also see
the symbol , or the symbol
ON (II) This is the normal key with an IGNITION KEY message
position when driving. Several of the on the multi-information display.
The ignition switch has four indicators on the instrument panel Remove the key to turn off the
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY come on as a test when you turn the beeper and the warning symbol.
(I), ON (II), and START (III). ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
LOCK (0) You can insert or position.
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, push it in slightly. On some types, the headlights come
on automatically in this position.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:49:11 32TF0630_145
Ignition Switch, Door Locks
Power Door Locks
Removing the key from the MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH LOCK TAB
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle. Unlock
Remove the key from the

ignition switch only when
parked. Lock
The master door lock switch allows Each door has a lock tab next to the
control of all doors and the tailgate inside door handle. When you pull
locks from the drivers door. Push out or push in the lock tab on the
the top of the switch to lock all doors drivers door, all doors and the
and tailgate, and push the bottom to tailgate lock or unlock. The lock tab
unlock them. on each passengers door only locks
and unlocks that door.
When the door is unlocked, the red

mark on the lock tab is shown.

10/10/25 18:49:21 32TF0630_146
Door Locks
All doors and tailgate lock or unlock When you lock the doors and the Super Locking
when you use the key to lock or tailgate with the key or the remote (For some types)
unlock the drivers door. transmitter, all outside turn signals
and both indicators in the instrument
Locking and unlocking the drivers panel flash three times to verify the
door will also lock and unlock the doors and the tailgate are locked and
fuel fill door (see page 259 ). the security system (if equipped) has
set. When you unlock them, these
To lock any passengers door when lights flash once.
getting out of the vehicle, pull the
lock tab rearward and close the door. The security system also activates
To lock the drivers door, remove the after you lock the doors and the
key from the ignition switch, pull and tailgate with the lock tab on the
hold the outside door handle, and drivers door or the master door lock
pull the lock tab rearward or push switch (see page 234 ).
the top of the master door lock The super locking helps to protect
switch, then close the door. Lockout Prevention your vehicle and valuables from theft.
With the drivers door open and the To set the super locking, turn the
key in the ignition switch, the master key towards the front of the vehicle
door lock switch is disabled. It is not twice within 5 seconds.
disabled if the drivers door is closed.
If you try to lock the open drivers
door with the key in the ignition
switch by pushing in the lock tab, the
tabs on all doors pop up when you
close the door. CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:49:30 32TF0630_147
Door Locks
The super locking will not set if any Childproof Door Locks
door or the tailgate is not fully closed.
It will be set even if the bonnet, or If there are persons inside the
any window is open. vehicle with the super
locking set, they cannot
With the super locking set, the unlock the doors from the
master door lock switch on the inside.
Unlock
drivers door and the lock tabs on all
doors are disabled. Make sure there is no person
inside the vehicle before
You can also set the super locking setting the super locking.
with the remote transmitter. To set it, Lock
push the LOCK button twice within
5 seconds (see page 141 ).
The childproof door locks are
To cancel the super locking, unlock designed to prevent children seated
the drivers door with the key or the in the rear from accidentally opening
remote transmitter. the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened
from the inside regardless of the
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, push in the lock tab, and use
the outside door handle.

10/10/25 18:49:38 32TF0630_148
Remote Transmitter
UNLOCK Press this button to If you use the unlock feature on the
LED LOCK unlock all doors and the tailgate. remote transmitter, but do not open
BUTTON When you push the UNLOCK button, any door or the tailgate within 30
all outside turn signals, and both seconds, the doors and the tailgate
indicators in the instrument panel automatically relock.
flash once.
You cannot unlock the doors and the
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light tailgate if the key is in the ignition
switch is in the centre position) will switch.
UNLOCK
BUTTON come on when you press the
UNLOCK button. If you do not open Locking and unlocking the drivers
any of the doors within 30 seconds, door will also lock and unlock the
the light fades out. If you relock the fuel fill door (see page 259 ).
LOCK Press this button to lock doors with the remote transmitter
all doors and the tailgate. When you before 30 seconds have elapsed, the
push the LOCK button, all outside light will go off immediately.
turn signals and both indicators in
the instrument panel flash three
times to verify the doors and the
tailgate are locked and the security
system (if equipped) has set. You
cannot lock the doors and the
tailgate if any door or the tailgate is
not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:49:48 32TF0630_149
Remote Transmitter
Super Locking Remote Transmitter Care

(For some types) Avoid dropping or throwing the
You can set the super locking with If there are persons inside the transmitter.
the remote transmitter. To set the vehicle with the super
super locking, push the LOCK locking set, they cannot Protect the transmitter from
button twice within 5 seconds. unlock the doors from the extreme temperature.
inside.
The super locking will not set if any Do not immerse the transmitter in
door or the tailgate is not fully closed. Make sure there is no person any liquid.
It will be set even if the bonnet or inside the vehicle before
any window is open. setting the super locking. If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
To cancel the super locking, push reprogrammed by your dealer.
the UNLOCK button on the remote
transmitter, or unlock the drivers
door with the key.
See page 141 for information on the

super locking.

10/10/25 18:49:58 32TF0630_150
Remote Transmitter
Replacing the Transmitter

Battery KEYPAD
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors BATTERY
and the hatch, replace the battery as
soon as possible.
Battery type: CR1616
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of SCREW

the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver. 2. Separate the keypad from the 3. Place a cloth on the edge of the
transmitter by pushing any button keypad to prevent scratches, and
NOTE: Be careful when removing from outside. remove the upper half by carefully
this screw as the head of the screw prying on the edge with a small
can strip out. flat-tip screwdriver.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:50:06 32TF0630_151
Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery and note This symbol on the battery (EU models)
the polarity. Make sure the means that this product must EC Directives
polarity of the new battery is the not be treated as household This immobilizer system complies
same ( side facing down), then waste. with the R & TTE (Radio equipment
insert it in the keypad. and Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment and the mutual
5. Snap the two halves of the keypad, recognition of their conformity)
then install the parts in reverse An improperly disposed of battery Directives.
order. can be harmful to the environment
and human health.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.

10/10/25 18:50:14 32TF0630_152
Tailgate
The tailgate will lock or unlock when

you lock or unlock the drivers door
with the key, the master door lock
switch, or the lock tab on the drivers
door.
The tailgate will also lock or unlock

when you lock or unlock the doors
with the remote transmitter.
HANDLE INNER HANDLE
To open the tailgate, pull the handle, Be sure all passengers or any objects
then lift up. To close it, use the inner are clear of the tailgate before
handle to pull down, then press down opening or closing it.
on the back edge.
Make sure the tailgate is closed
before you start driving.
Keep the tailgate closed at all times

while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
73 .

10/10/25 18:50:22 32TF0630_153
Tailgate
Opening the Tailgate Manually

If the power door lock system cannot
unlock the tailgate, unlock it Unlock
manually.
COVER
RELEASE LEVER
To open the tailgate, access the Push the release lever to the lower
tailgate release lever from inside the left as shown.
vehicle.
If you need to open the tailgate
Place a cloth on the upper edge of manually, it means there is a
the cover to prevent scratches, then problem with the tailgate. Have the
use a small flat-tip screwdriver to vehicle checked by your dealer.
remove the cover on the back of the
tailgate.

10/10/25 18:50:30 32TF0630_154
Seats
Front Seat Adjustments

See pages 16 17 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
Make all seat adjustments before

you start driving.
BAR LEVER
To adjust the seat forward or To change the seat-back angle, pull

backward, pull up on the bar under up on the lever on the outside of the
the seat cushions front edge. Move seat cushion.
the seat to the desired position, and
release the bar. Try to move the seat Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
to make sure it is locked in position. rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.

10/10/25 18:50:37 32TF0630_155
Seats
Drivers Seat Height Adjustment Make all seat adjustments before Armrests
you start driving. (For some types)
FRONT
LEVER
The height of your drivers seat is

adjustable. To raise the seat, The drivers seat has an armrest on
repeatedly pull up the lever on the the side of the seat-back. To use it,
outside of the seat cushion. To lower pivot it down.
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.

10/10/25 18:50:44 32TF0630_156
Seats
Head Restraints The head restraints help protect you

See page 17 for important safety and your passengers from the
information and a warning about likelihood of whiplash and other
improperly positioning head restraints. injuries.
Your vehicle is equipped with head

restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from the likelihood of
whiplash and other injuries.
They are most effective when you

adjust them so the centre of the back
of the occupants head rests against
the centre of the restraint.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:50:52 32TF0630_157
Seats
Front Position Rear Outer Position Rear Centre Position

CUSHION RELEASE
BUTTON CUSHION CUSHION
RELEASE
RELEASE LEGS LEGS BUTTON
LEGS SEAT-BACK BUTTON SEAT-BACK SEAT-BACK
Adjusting the Head Restraint When a passenger is seated in the

The front head restraints adjust for rear seating position, make sure the
height. You need both hands to rear head restraint is adjusted to its
adjust a restraint. Do not attempt to highest position.
adjust it while driving. To raise it,
pull upward. To lower the restraint,
push the release button sideways,
and push the restraint down.

10/10/25 18:50:59 32TF0630_158
Seats
Removing the Head Restraint Make sure the removed head

To remove a head restraint for restraints are securely stored.
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as Failure to reinstall the head
it will go. Push the release button, restraints can result in severe When reinstalling a head restraint,
then pull the restraint out of the seat- injury during a crash. put the legs back in place. Then
back. adjust it to the appropriate height
Always replace the head while pressing the release button.
restraints before driving.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:51:09 32TF0630_159
Seats
Active Head Restraints This reduces the distance between For a head restraint system to work
the restraint and the occupants head. properly:
It also helps protect the occupants
against the likelihood of whiplash Do not hang any items on the head
and injuries to the neck and upper restraints, or from the restraint
spine. legs.
After a collision, the activated Do not place any object between

restraint should return to its normal an occupant and the seat-back.
position.
Install each restraint in its proper
If the restraints do not return to their location.
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle Only use genuine Honda
The drivers and front passengers inspected by a Honda dealer. replacement head restraints.
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.

10/10/25 18:51:18 32TF0630_160
Seats
Folding the Rear Seat Up

The left and right rear seat cushions
can be lifted up separately to make
room for luggage.
Remove any items from the seat

LATCH
before you fold up the seat cushion.
This label on the back of

the rear seats instructs you
to refer to the owners manual for
correct operation. FLOOR GUIDE
Make sure the detachable anchor is Pull up the rear seat cushion, and To return the seat cushion to its
unlatched and stored in the retractor fold the seat leg down. Push the seat original position, first make sure
housing (see page 158 ) before cushion firmly against the seat-back there are no items on the floor, then
lifting the rear seat cushion up. to lock it. pull up the seat leg fully, and push
down the seat cushion slowly while
holding it with your hands. Set the
seat leg in the floor guide. A latch
comes out when the leg is set
properly.

10/10/25 18:51:28 32TF0630_161
Seats
Folding the Rear Seats Down LATCH PLATE

The rear seat-backs can be folded
down for more luggage room.
Each side folds down separately, so

you can still carry a passenger in the
rear outer seating position.
Remove any items from the seat

before folding down the seat-back.
Make sure there are no items on the

floor before folding down the seats.
When you are folding the rear centre 1. Lower the rear head restraint to
seat-back, use the latch plate to its lowest position.
release the centre seat belt from the
detachable anchor (see page 158 ). 2. Pull up the release lever on the
Allow the seat belt to retract into the outside of the seat-back.
holder on the ceiling and store the
buckles in it. 3. Fold the seat-back forward.

10/10/25 18:51:35 32TF0630_162
Seats
Do not put any heavy items on the Make sure all items in the luggage If your vehicle is equipped with a
seat-back when it is folded down. area are secured. Loose items can fly flexible luggage board, do not use
forward and cause injury if you have the board when any seat-back is
Reverse this procedure to return the to brake hard (See Carrying folded down. Objects placed on this
seat-back to the upright position. Luggage on page 267 ). board can be thrown forward and
Make sure the seat is secured and occupants can be injured during
the seat belt is in front of the seat- sudden stops or a collision.
back before driving.
For more information on the flexible
In the rear centre seating position, luggage board, see page 176 .
be sure the detachable anchor is
latched securely (see page 158 ).

10/10/25 18:51:42 32TF0630_163
Seats
Detachable Anchor
DETACHABLE ANCHOR Using the seat belt with the
detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of
serious injury or death in a
crash.
Before using the seat belt,

make sure the detachable
anchor is correctly latched.
SMALL LATCH PLATE
LATCH PLATE
The seat belt in the rear centre seat Pull out the small latch plate and the
is equipped with a detachable anchor. latch plate from each holding slot in
This allows the centre seat belt to be the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt
unlatched when the rear centre seat to extend it.
is folded.

10/10/25 18:51:48 32TF0630_164
Seats
ANCHOR BUCKLE
TRIANGLE
MARKS
ANCHOR BUCKLE LATCH PLATE
Line up the triangle marks on the To unlatch the detachable anchor,

small latch plate and anchor buckle insert the latch plate into the slot on
when reattaching the belt and buckle. the side of the anchor buckle. Store
the detachable anchor and seat belt
Tug on the seat belt to verify that latch plates in the retractor housing.
the detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.

10/10/25 18:51:55 32TF0630_165
Seat Heaters (For some types)
Push the front of the switch, HI, to Follow these precautions whenever
rapidly heat up the seat. After the you use the seat heaters:
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing Use the HI setting only to heat the
the back of the switch. This will keep seats quickly, because it draws
the seat warm. large amounts of current from the
battery.
In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns If the engine is left idling for an
back on after the seats temperature extended period, do not use the
drops. seat heaters, even on the LO
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES setting. It can weaken the battery,
In the LO setting, the heater runs causing hard starting.
Both front seats are equipped with continuously. It does not cycle with
seat heaters. The ignition switch temperature changes.
must be in the ON (II) position to
use the heaters.

10/10/25 18:52:02 32TF0630_166
Luggage Area Cover (For some types)
To install the cover, set the mount-

ing rods to the recesses and slide the
cover towards the front until it clips
into place. Make sure it is securely
latched so it will not come loose
while you are driving.
Lower the tailgate and put the hooks

back in place.
HOOK MOUNTING ROD
The luggage area cover can be To remove the cover, take off the
removed to give you more luggage hooks from the tailgate, slide the
height. cover towards the rear, then lift it
straight up.

10/10/25 18:52:10 32TF0630_167
Power Windows
DRIVERS WINDOW SWITCH AUTO To open the drivers

window fully, push the window
Closing a power window on switch firmly down, then release it.
someones hands or fingers The window automatically goes
can cause serious injury. down all the way. To stop the
window from going all the way down,
Make sure your passengers pull back on the window switch
are away from the windows briefly.
before closing them.
To close the drivers window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly,
MAIN SWITCH WARNING: Always take the ignition then release it. The window
key with you whenever you leave the automatically goes all the way up. To
Turn the ignition switch to the ON vehicle alone (with other occupants). stop the window from going all the
(II) position to raise or lower any way up, push down on the window
window, on some models, either The drivers door armrest has a switch briefly.
front window. To open a window, master power window control panel.
push the switch down lightly and To open any of the passengers
hold it. Release the switch when you windows, push down lightly on the
want the window to stop. Pull back appropriate switch, and hold it until
on the switch and hold it to close the the window reaches the desired
window. position. To close the window, pull
back lightly on the window switch.
Release the switch when the window
gets to the position you want.

10/10/25 18:52:16 32TF0630_168
Power Windows
To open or close the drivers window AUTO REVERSE If the drivers The power windows have a key-off
partially, push down or pull back on window senses any obstacle while it delay. You can still open and close
the window switch lightly and hold it. is closing automatically, it will the windows for up to 10 minutes
The window will stop when you reverse direction, and then stop. To after you turn off the ignition switch.
release the switch. close the window, remove the The key-off delay cancels as soon as
obstacle, then use the window switch you open either front door. You must
When you push the MAIN switch in, again. then turn the ignition switch to the
the switch is off, and the passengers ON (II) position for the power
windows cannot be raised or lowered. Auto reverse stops sensing when the windows to operate.
To cancel this feature, push on the window is almost closed. You should
switch again to get it to pop out. always check that all passengers and
Keep the MAIN switch pushed in objects are away from the window
when you have children in the before closing it.
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the NOTE: The drivers window auto
windows unintentionally. reverse function is disabled when
you continuously pull up the switch.

10/10/25 18:52:23 32TF0630_169
Sunshade (For some types)
Open Opening or closing the

sunshade on someones
hands or fingers may cause
injury.
Make sure all hands and

fingers are clear of the
Close sunshade before opening or
closing it.
Use the switch on the front ceiling to To open the sunshade, pull the WARNING: Always take the ignition
operate the sunshade. You must turn switch rearward and hold it. Release key with you whenever you leave the
the ignition switch to the ON (II) the switch when the sunshade vehicle alone (with other occupants).
position to operate the sunshade. reaches the desired position. Push
the switch forward and hold it to
close the sunshade. Release the
switch to stop the operation.

10/10/25 18:52:30 32TF0630_170
Sunshade (For some types)
AUTO To open the sunshade AUTO REVERSE If the The sunshade has a key-off delay.
fully, pull the switch rearward firmly, sunshade runs into any obstacle You can still open and close the
then release it. The sunshade while it is closing automatically, it sunshade for up to 10 minutes after
automatically opens all the way. To will reverse direction and then stop. you turn off the ignition switch. The
stop the sunshade from opening, To close the sunshade, remove the key-off delay cancels as soon as you
push on the switch briefly. obstacle, then use the sunshade open either front door.
switch again.
To close the sunshade fully, push the
switch forward firmly, then release it. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
The sunshade automatically closes sunshade is almost closed. You
all the way. To stop the sunshade should always check that all
from closing, push on the switch passengers and objects are away
briefly. from the sunshade before closing it.
To open or close the sunshade

partially, pull or push the sunshade
switch lightly and hold it. The
sunshade will stop when you release
the switch.

10/10/25 18:52:39 32TF0630_171
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
TAB
SELECTOR SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON 3. Push the appropriate edge of the
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before (II) position. adjustment switch to move the
you start driving. mirror right, left, up, or down.
2. Move the selector switch to L (left
The inside mirror has day and night side) or R (right side). 4. When you finish, move the
positions. The night position reduces selector switch to the centre (off)
glare from headlights behind you. position. This turns off the
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of adjustment switch to keep your
the mirror to select the day or night settings.
position.

10/10/25 18:52:48 32TF0630_172
Mirrors
Power Mirror Heaters Folding Door Mirrors Never drive your vehicle with the
(For some types) (For some types) outside mirrors folded.
REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/ FOLDING SWITCH
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
The outside mirrors are heated to Door mirrors can be folded by the
remove fog and frost. With the folding switch next to the selector
ignition switch in the ON (II) switch, which enables you to park
position, turn on the heaters by your vehicle in a limited parking
pressing the rear window demister space easily. Make sure you fold out
button. The indicator in the button the mirrors before you start driving.
comes on as a reminder. Press the With the ignition switch in the ON
button again to turn the heaters and (II) position, press the folding switch
the demister off. to fold up both outside mirrors simul-
On some types, this heated mirror taneously. To fold out, press the
function has a timer (see page 133 ). switch again.

10/10/25 18:52:54 32TF0630_173
Parking Brake
Driving the vehicle with the parking

brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and hubs. A beeper will
sound if the vehicle is driven with
the parking brake on.
You will also see the symbol ,

or this symbol with a RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE message on the
PARKING BRAKE LEVER multi-information display.
To apply the parking brake, pull the

lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page 84 ).

10/10/25 18:52:59 32TF0630_174
Interior Convenience Items
COAT HOOK SUN VISOR VANITY MIRROR

FLEXIBLE LUGGAGE BOARD /
CARGO FLOOR BOX UPPER GLOVE BOX/
COOL BOX
BEVERAGE
HOLDER
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
LOWER GLOVE BOX
SEAT UNDER BOX BEVERAGE HOLDERS FRONT CONSOLE BOX/

BEVERAGE HOLDER
: If equipped

10/10/25 18:53:05 32TF0630_175
Lower Glove Box Upper Glove Box

UPPER GLOVE BOX An open glove box and an
upper box can cause serious
injury to your passenger in a
crash, even if the passenger
is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box

and the upper box closed
while driving.
LOWER GLOVE BOX LEVER
Open the lower glove box by pulling Open the upper glove box by pulling
the bottom of the handle. Close it up the lever. Push down to close the
with a firm push. lid.

10/10/25 18:53:16 32TF0630_176
Cool Box position. Beverage Holders

(On some models) Be careful when you are using the
The cool air is diverted from the air beverage holders. A spilled liquid
DIAL conditioning system into the upper that is very hot can scald you or your
glove box through the air vent. passengers. Spilled liquids can also
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
Use only resealable containers or and electrical components in the
Close keep unopened cans in the upper interior.
glove box. Spilled liquids can damage
the upholstery and electrical The front beverage holder is in the
components in the upper glove box centre console compartment.
and inside the dashboard. Make sure
Open to close the air vent by turning the
dial upward when it is not used.
You can store beverage bottles and If you use the heating, the warmed
cans in the upper glove box, and air is diverted into the upper glove
keep them cool with the air box with the air vent opened.
conditioning system. To keep the
inside of the upper glove box cool,
open the upper glove box, then open
the air vent on the passengers side
by turning the dial downward. Turn
on the air conditioning (see page
186 and 193 ), and set the mode
control to or CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:53:24 32TF0630_177
FRONT
Centre
FRONT
Drivers side REAR
There are also front beverage The beverage holders for the rear
holders in each side of the passengers are located on the upper-
instrument panel. rear section of the centre console.
For some types

10/10/25 18:53:33 32TF0630_178
Front Console Box Seat Under Box Sun Visor
DIVIDER
Open
Close
On models with a divider in the front The seat under box is underneath To use the sun visor, pull it down.
console box the left rear seat cushion. To open it, You can also use the sun visor at the
You can remove the divider to store fold the left rear seat cushion up side window. Remove the support
larger items. Pull it out to remove it. (see page 155 ), and turn the handles. rod from the clip and swing the sun
When reinstalling it, line up the To close it, turn the handles and visor toward the side window.
triangle marks on the divider and make sure the circle marks are
front console box. aligned. Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.

10/10/25 18:53:40 32TF0630_179
Vanity Mirror Coat Hook Make sure the coat hook is folded up
when you are not using it. This hook
GRAB RAIL is not designed for large or heavy
items.
VANITY MIRROR COAT HOOK
To use the vanity mirror on the back To use a coat hook, slide it out
of the sun visor, pull up the cover. slightly, then pull it down.

10/10/25 18:53:48 32TF0630_180
Accessory Power Socket This socket is intended to supply It is recommended that this
power for 12 volt DC accessories accessory socket is used for genuine
that are rated 120 watts or less (10 Honda accessories.
amps).
Make sure to put the socket cover
It will not power an automotive type back in place to prevent any small
cigarette lighter element. foreign objects from getting into the
socket.
Your vehicle has an accessory power

socket in the front console panel.
To use the accessory power socket,

pull up the cover. The ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.

10/10/25 18:53:57 32TF0630_181
Flexible Luggage Board

(On some models)
STRAP
LID
HANDLE
The flexible luggage board enables Pull the strap to lift up the lid and To store items under the board, hold
you to store items in various ways fold it down. the handle on the board as shown
according to their size, weight and above and lift it up.
height.

10/10/25 18:54:04 32TF0630_182
When you set the flexible luggage

board in the middle position, do not
place any objects on the upper level
ROD ROD with the rear seat-backs folded
down; items can fly forward and
injure someone.
RECESS RECESS
To prevent items from being thrown
about the vehicle and possibly hurt
someone in an accident or sudden
stop, be sure the rods are securely
locked into the recesses, so the
board is latched.
BOARD BOARD
When you store tall items, lift up the Placing the board in the middle
board, push it forward and fold it to position divides the luggage space
extend the luggage space. into two levels; you can store items
on each level depending on their size
and weight.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:54:13 32TF0630_183
Cargo Floor Box

(On some models)
To prevent damage, do not place
more than 10 kg on the flexible
luggage board.
NOTE:
You should not use this board in any
other position than previously shown.
If you do, the board may be damaged.
Make sure all items in the luggage

LID
area are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have STRAP CARGO FLOOR BOX
to brake hard (See Carrying
The maximum load on the flexible Luggage on page 267 ). The cargo floor box is under the
luggage board is 10 kg. This is luggage area floor. To use it, raise
shown on a label on the left side of the lid by pulling the strap.
the board. To prevent damage to the
board, do not exceed the maximum
load.

10/10/25 18:54:23 32TF0630_184
Interior Lights
Ceiling Light Unlock the drivers door with the Spotlights

master door lock switch, lock tab, (For some types)
DOOR ACTIVATED key, or the remote transmitter.
ON
After all doors are closed tightly, the
light dims slightly, then fades out in
about 30 seconds. The light turns off
OFF before 30 seconds have elapsed if
you insert the key to the ignition
switch.
If you leave any door open without

the key in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light will go off after about 15 On vehicles without sunshade
The ceiling light has a three-position minutes.
switch: ON, Door Activated, and Turn on a spotlight by pushing the
OFF. In the Door Activated (centre) lens. Push the lens again to turn it
position, the light comes on when off. You can use the spotlights at all
you: times.
Open any door.
Remove the key from the ignition

switch. If you do not open a door,
the light fades out in about 30
seconds. CONTINUED

10/10/25 18:54:30 32TF0630_185
Interior Lights
The spotlights (with the switch in Luggage Area Light

the DOOR position) also come on
when you open any door, unlock the
door with the key, lock tab on the
drivers door, master door lock
switch, or the remote transmitter,
and when you remove the key from
the ignition switch.
On vehicles with sunshade

On vehicles without luggage area cover
The spotlights have a two-position Your vehicle has a luggage area light
switch. In the DOOR position, the on the left side panel in the luggage
lights come on when you open any area. The luggage area light comes
door. In the OFF position, the lights on when you open the tailgate.
do not come on.

10/10/25 18:54:35 32TF0630_186
Features
The heating and air conditioning Vents ............................................... 182

systems in your vehicle provide a Heating and Cooling System ........ 184
comfortable driving environment in Heating and A/C............................ 185
all weather conditions. Climate Control System ................ 190
Audio System ................................. 195

Air conditioning is standard on Protecting Your Discs ................... 228
some models. Remote Audio Controls................. 231
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 232
The standard audio system on some Radio Theft Protection.................. 232
models has many features. This Setting the Clock ........................... 233
section describes those features and Security System ............................. 234
how to use them. Cruise Control ................................ 235
Hands-Free Telephone (HFT)
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio System......................................... 238
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
Features 181
10/10/25 18:54:43 32TF0630_187
Vents
Vent Controls
CENTRE VENTS
Push
FLAP FLAP
TABS
The direction of airflow from the The vents in the corners of the
vents in the centre and each side of dashboard can be opened and closed
the dashboard is adjustable. with the upper and lower flaps. To
open it, push in the flap as shown. To
To adjust the airflow from each close the vent, push the bottom of
centre vent, move the tab up-and- either flap. To adjust the airflow
down and side-to-side. from the vent, push in the flap to
open it, then move the flap up-and-
down and rotate the vent.
182 Features
10/10/25 18:54:46 32TF0630_188
Vents
Features 183
10/10/25 18:54:54 32TF0630_189
Heating and Cooling System
Proper use of the heating and Manual System

cooling system can make the interior
dry and comfortable, and keep the
windows clear for the best visibility.
The engine must be running for the

heater and air conditioning to
generate hot and cold air.
Read the appropriate pages in this

section for operation of the heating
and cooling system installed in your
vehicle.
Automatic System
See page 185 to 189 for the manual
system.
See page 190 to 194 for the

automatic system.
184 Features
10/10/25 18:55:05 32TF0630_190
Heating and A/C
Fan Control Dial FAN CONTROL DIAL

Turn the dial clockwise to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
dial anticlockwise to decrease them.
REAR WINDOW DEMISTER BUTTON
Temperature Control Dial
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
MODE
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button CONTROL DIAL
(For some types)
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. The
indicator in the button is on when
the A/C is on.
Rear Window Demister

Button
This button turns the rear window
demister on and off (see page 133 ).
On some models, when you turn on AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) BUTTON REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/
the rear window demister, the HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
heated door mirrors are also turned RECIRCULATION BUTTON
on automatically.
: If equipped
Features 185
10/10/25 18:55:16 32TF0630_191
Heating and A/C
Recirculation Button The system should be left in fresh Mode Control Dial
When the recirculation indicator is air mode under almost all conditions. Use the mode control dial to select
on, air from the vehicles interior is Keeping the system in recirculation the vents the air flows from. Some
sent throughout the system again. mode, particularly with the A/C off, air will flow from the dashboard
When the indicator is off, air is can cause the windows to fog up. corner vents in all modes.
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode). Switch to recirculation mode when Air flows from the centre
driving through dusty or smoky and corner vents in the dashboard.
The outside air intakes for the conditions, then return to fresh air
heating and cooling system are at mode. Airflow is divided between
the base of the windscreen. Keep the vents in the dashboard and the
this area clear of leaves and other floor vents.
debris.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
186 Features
10/10/25 18:55:30 32TF0630_192
Heating and A/C
Airflow is divided between Ventilation Using the A/C

the floor vents and demister vents at The flow-through ventilation system (For some types)
the base of the windscreen. draws in outside air, circulates it Air conditioning places an extra load
through the interior, then exhausts it on the engine. Check the high
Air flows from the demister through vents near the tailgate. temperature indicator (see page
vents at the base of the windscreen. 89 ). If the indicator begins to blink,
1. Set the temperature control dial to turn off the A/C until the indicator
When you select or , the lower limit. goes off.
the system automatically switches to Make sure the A/C is off.
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C 2. Select and fresh air mode. 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
(if equipped). 3. Set the fan to the desired speed. button. The indicator in the button
comes on when a fan speed is
Using the Heater selected.
The heater uses engine coolant to 2. Make sure the temperature
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it control dial is set to maximum cool.
will be several minutes before you 3. Select .
feel warm air coming from the 4. If the outside air is humid, select
system. recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
1. Select and fresh air mode. 5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
2. Set the fan to the desired speed.
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
CONTINUED
Features 187
10/10/25 18:55:39 32TF0630_193
Heating and A/C
If the interior is very warm, you can Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost
cool it down more rapidly by partially On vehicles with air conditioning To remove fog from the inside of the
opening the windows, turning on the Air conditioning, as it cools, removes windows:
A/C, and setting the fan to moisture from the air. When used in
maximum speed in fresh air mode. combination with the heater, it 1. Set the fan to the desired speed or
makes the interior warm and dry and high for faster defrosting.
can prevent the windows from 2. Select . The system
fogging up. automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C (if
1. Turn the fan on. equipped).
2. If the A/C is off, turn it on. 3. Adjust the temperature so the
3. Select and fresh air mode. airflow feels warm.
4. Adjust the temperature control 4. Select to help clear the rear
dial to your preference. window.
5. To increase airflow to the
This setting is suitable for all driving windscreen, close the corner vents.
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 0C.
188 Features
10/10/25 18:55:47 32TF0630_194
Heating and A/C
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice To clear the windows faster, you can To Turn Everything Off
From the Windows close the dashboard corner vents by Turning the fan control dial all the
1. Select . The system pushing the bottom of either flap. way to the left shuts the system off.
automatically switches to fresh air This sends more warm air to the
mode and turns on the A/C (if windscreen demister vents. Once the Keep the system off for short
equipped). windscreen is clear, select the fresh periods only.
2. Select . air mode to avoid fogging the
3. Set the fan and temperature windows. To keep stale air and mustiness
controls to maximum level. from collecting, you should have
For your safety, make sure you have the fan running at all times.
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
Features 189
10/10/25 18:55:54 32TF0630_195
Climate Control System
Fully-automatic Operation
To put the automatic climate control FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
in fully-automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.

AUTO BUTTON
2. Set the desired temperature with
the temperature control buttons. ON/OFF BUTTON
You will see AUTO in the systems AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) BUTTON
display.
FRESH AIR BUTTON
MODE BUTTON RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
BUTTONS
DISPLAY
WINDSCREEN REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/

DEMISTER BUTTON HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
190 Features
10/10/25 18:56:06 32TF0630_196
The system automatically selects the Semi-automatic Operation Fan Control Buttons
proper mix of conditioned and/or You can manually select various Select the fan speed by pressing the
heated air that will, as quickly as functions of the climate control fan control buttons ( or
possible, raise or lower the interior system when it is in fully-automatic ). The fan speed is
temperature to your preference. mode. All other features remain represented by horizontal bars in the
automatically controlled. Making any display.
When you set the temperature to its manual selection causes the word
lower limit ( ) or its upper limit AUTO in the display to go out. Temperature Control Buttons
( ), the system runs at full To adjust the desired temperature,
cooling or heating only. It does not push the temperature control
regulate the interior temperature. buttons ( or ).
In cold weather, the fan will not Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
come on automatically until the This button turns the air
heater starts to develop warm air. conditioning on and off. You will see
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the

system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature below the outside
temperature.
CONTINUED
Features 191
10/10/25 18:56:20 32TF0630_197
Fresh Air and Recirculation Windscreen Demister Button When you turn off by
Buttons This button directs the main airflow pressing the button again, the
These two buttons control the to the windscreen for faster system returns to its former settings.
source of air going into the system. defrosting. It also overrides any
In fresh air mode , air comes mode selection you may have made. For your safety, make sure you have
from outside the vehicle. In a clear view through all the windows
recirculation mode , the When you select , the system before driving.
interior air recycles through the automatically switches to fresh air
system. mode and turns on the A/C. For Rear Window Demister Button
faster defrosting, manually set the This button turns the rear window
The outside air intakes for the fan speed to high. You can also demister on and off (see page 133 ).
climate control system are at the increase airflow to the windscreen
base of the windscreen. Keep this by closing the corner vents on the When you turn on the rear window
area clear of leaves and other debris. dashboard. demister, the heated door mirror is
also turned on automatically.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when

driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
192 Features
10/10/25 18:56:31 32TF0630_198
Mode Button Air flows from the centre To Turn Everything Off
Use the MODE button to select the and corner vents in the dashboard. To turn the system completely off,
vents the air flows from. Some air press the ON/OFF button.
will flow from the dashboard corner Airflow is divided between
vents in all modes. the vents in the dashboard and the Keep the system off for short
floor vents. periods only.
Each time you press the MODE
button, the display shows the mode Air flows from the floor To keep stale air and mustiness
selected. vents. from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and demister vents at
the base of the windscreen.
Features 193
10/10/25 18:56:37 32TF0630_199
Sunlight, Temperature, and

Humidity Sensors
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE AND
HUMIDITY SENSORS
The climate control system has three

sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and the
temperature and humidity sensors
are next to the steering column. Do
not cover the sensors or spill any
liquid on them.
194 Features
10/10/25 18:56:48 32TF0630_200
Audio System (For some types)
Playing the Radio Italian models only

This product conforms to DM 28/8/
ST INDICATOR 1995, N. 548, by complying with the
requirements specified in DM 25/6/
PRESET BUTTONS DISPLAY 1985 (par. 3, All. A) and DM 27/8/
1987 (All. I).
BUTTON
To Play the Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position
to operate the audio system. Turn
the system on by pushing the
button, or the AM/FM button.
AM/FM BUTTON Adjust the volume by turning the
BUTTON knob.
CD/AUX
BUTTON The band and frequency that the
AUTO SELECT radio was last tuned to are displayed.
BUTTON
To change bands, press the AM/FM
SCAN BUTTON button. On the FM band, ST will be
SOUND BUTTON TA BUTTON displayed if the station is
VOL KNOB broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not available.
TUNE/SEEK BUTTONS BUTTON
SELECT BUTTON On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
Features 195
10/10/25 18:56:57 32TF0630_201
To Select a Station You can also use the select button SEEK The SEEK function
You can use any of five methods to and VOL knob to tune the radio to a searches up and down from the
find radio stations on the selected desired frequency. Push the select current frequency to find a station
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset button. You will see in the with a strong signal. To activate it,
buttons, and auto select. display. Turn the VOL knob press and hold the or
clockwise to tune to a higher button until you hear a beep.
TUNE Use the TUNE button to frequency, or anticlockwise to tune
tune the radio to a desired frequency. to a lower frequency. SCAN The scan function samples
Press the button to tune to a all stations with strong signals on the
higher frequency, and press the The mode will be cancelled about 10 selected band. To activate it, press
button to tune to a lower seconds after you stop adjusting the the SCAN button, then release it.
frequency. knob. If you want to cancel the mode You will see SCAN in the display.
within 10 seconds, push the select When the system finds a strong
button, ( ) button, or ( ) signal, it will stop and play that
button. station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will

scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
196 Features
10/10/25 18:57:06 32TF0630_202
Preset Each preset button can AUTO SELECT If you are If you do not like the stations auto
store one frequency on AM and two travelling and can no longer receive select has stored, you can store
frequencies on FM. your preset stations, you can use the other frequencies on the preset
auto select feature to find stations in buttons as previously described.
1. Select the desired band, AM or the local area.
FM. You can store one frequency To turn off Auto Select, press the
on FM1, and one frequency on Press the A. SEL button. You will see A. SEL button. This restores the
FM2 with each preset button. A. SEL flashing in the display, and presets you originally set.
the system goes into scan mode for
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan several seconds. The system stores
function to tune the radio to a the frequencies of 6 FM stations in
desired station. the preset buttons.
3. Pick the preset number (1 6), You will see a 0 displayed after
and hold it until you hear a beep. pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a every preset button.
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
Features 197
10/10/25 18:57:16 32TF0630_203
Radio Data System (RDS) You can turn on or off the RDS Preset 1 button: AF ON/OFF
With your audio system, you can function and select the RDS Alternative frequency function on or
utilize many convenient features programmes. To switch the function off
provided by the radio data system and select the programme, press the
(RDS). button for more than 2 seconds Preset 2 button: REGIONAL ON/
with the audio system on. You will OFF Regional programme on or
With the FM band selected, you can hear a beep. Press any of the preset off
keep listening to the same station buttons (1 through 6) to select the
even if its frequency changes as you function. Each preset button has the Preset 3 button: PS DISP ON/
enter different regions while you are following function. Pressing the OFF Programme service function
travelling. preset button switches the function on or off
between on and off (24H and 12H on
The RDS function turns on the clock mode). Preset 4 button: AUTO TP ON/
automatically when you turn the OFF Automatic traffic
system on. If the station you are programme on or off
listening to is an RDS station, the
frequency display will change to the Preset 5 button: NEWS ON/OFF
station name. Then, the system will News programme on or off
automatically keep selecting the
frequency with the strongest signal Preset 6 button: CLOCK 24H/
from the frequencies that carry the 12H
same programmes. This can save
you the trouble of retuning to obtain
the same station as long as you are in
the same RDS network area.
198 Features
10/10/25 18:57:26 32TF0630_204
AF (Alternative Frequency) CLOCK With this function, you

This function automatically selects a can switch the clock display between
frequency with the same programme 24-hours and 12-hours.
in the RDS network area.
When the signals of the RDS station
REGIONAL (Regional become so weak that the system can
Programme) This function keeps no longer follow the station, the
the regional programme and does system will hold the last tuned
not change the frequency even if the frequency and the display will
signal becomes too weak. change from the station name to the
frequency.
PS DISP (Programme Service
Display) This function shows the In some countries, you cannot utilize
To turn on the RDS, select 1 AF ON radio station name which you are features provided by RDS as the
by pressing the preset 1 button. To listening to. RDS function is not provided for all
turn off the RDS, select 1 AF OFF. stations.
Press the button again to store AUTO TP (Automatic Traffic
the setting. Information Programme) This
function automatically tunes to the
radio station which is broadcasting
the traffic information.
NEWS (News Programme) This

function automatically tunes to the
radio station which is broadcasting
newscasts. CONTINUED
Features 199
10/10/25 18:57:33 32TF0630_205
Programme Service Name Display TA (Traffic Announcement) Standby You can receive traffic information
If the station you are listening to is Function while you are listening to a disc or
an RDS station, the frequency When you press and release the TA playing an appropriate audio device.
display will disappear and the station button, TA comes on in the display If the system is tuned to a TP station
name or PTY information will be and the system stands by for traffic before playing a disc or an audio
displayed. For more information on announcements. device, the system will stand by for
the PTY, see page 201 . traffic announcements with the TA
When the automatic traffic button pressed (TA indicator is on)
information programme (AUTO TP and the system will switch from disc
ON) is selected, TP will come on in or AUX mode to the traffic
the display. This indicates that the announcement when it begins. You
traffic reports can be received from will see TA-INFO in the display. The
the traffic information broadcasting system will return to the disc or AUX
station. mode when the traffic information is
finished.
AUTO TP cross-references other
programme services that broadcast You can also switch to the normal
traffic information, and the traffic audio mode while you are listening to
reports can be received through the traffic information by pressing
another programme service in the the TA button. It does not cancel the
RDS network area. TA standby function.
200 Features
10/10/25 18:57:42 32TF0630_206
To adjust the volume of the traffic Pressing the TA button will not turn PTY (Programme Type) Display
announcement, turn the VOL knob off the TA function while you are Function
while the announcement is listening to the traffic information. It When either of the or the
broadcasting. The adjusted volume will just switch to the selected audio button is pressed, the display
level will be stored, then that level playing mode. shows you the programme type of
will be used on the next traffic the selected RDS station. For
announcement. If you adjust the If you use seek or auto select with example, if the station is
volume below the minimum level, the TA function on, the system broadcasting drama, DRAMA is
the default level (level 9) will be used searches only TP stations. shown in the display. If it is a station
the next time. The volume of the of scientific programmes, SCIENCE
PTY NEWS or the PTY ALARM is shown. The principal PTYs are
function can also be adjusted (see shown as follows.
page 203 ).
NEWS: Short accounts of facts,
If your vehicles battery goes dead, events, publicly expressed views,
or is disconnected, the traffic reportage, etc.
announcement volume level will be CURRENT AFFAIRS: Topical
reset to the default setting (level 9). programmes expanding upon the
news.
To turn off the TA function, press
the TA button again. TA will go out
from the display.
CONTINUED
Features 201
10/10/25 18:58:00 32TF0630_207
INFORMATION: General LIGHT CLASSICS M: Light classics; PHONE IN: Programmes consisting
information and advice. classical music for non-specialist of listeners message.
SPORT: Programmes concerned appreciation. TRAVEL/TOURING: Programmes
with any aspect of sports. SERIOUS CLASSICS: Traditional concerned with travel.
EDUCATION: Educational classics. LEISURE/HOBBY: Programmes
programmes. OTHER MUSIC: Other types of about hobbies and recreational
DRAMA: All radio plays and serials. music, such as R & B, Reggae. activities.
CULTURES: Programmes WEATHER/METR: Weather JAZZ MUSIC: Jazz music.
concerned with any aspect of information. COUNTRY MUSIC: Country music.
national or regional culture. FINANCE: Programmes concerned NATIONAL MUSIC: National music.
SCIENCE: Programmes about with economy. OLDIES MUSIC: Oldies music,
nature, science, and technology. CHILDRENS PROGS: Programmes Golden age based programmes.
VARIED SPEECH: Light for children. FOLK MUSIC: Folk music.
entertainment programmes. RELIGION: Programmes concerned DOCUMENTARY: Documentary
POP MUSIC: Commercial music of with religion. programmes.
popular appeal. SOCIAL AFFAIRS: Social affairs
ROCK MUSIC: Contemporary programmes.
modern music.
EASY LISTENING: Light music.
202 Features
10/10/25 18:58:12 32TF0630_208
When you press either of the If the selected RDS station does not PTY/News Interrupt Function
button or button, the transmit PTY data, NO PTY is To activate this function, press the
display will show different PTYs (see displayed. When the selected station button for more than 2 seconds
the PTYs list on the previous page). is not an RDS station, NO RDS is and select NEWS. The system will
displayed for about 5 seconds. hold the last tuned FM station/
After you select the desired network PTY while you are listening
programme type, the system will The PTY setting mode is cancelled if to the disc. With this function on,
search for a station with the same no further steps are taken within 5 playing disc is interrupted and the
PTY code as the selected seconds after selecting the desired system switches from disc mode to
programme type. When you use this PTY with the or button. the FM newscast when the newscast
function for the first time, NEWS is broadcasting from the FM station.
will appear as it was preset at the Some stations may broadcast the
factory. programmes with different contents You can change the volume level of
from their PTY code. the interrupted newscast. Refer to
After your desired PTY is displayed, page 201 for how to adjust the
press either TUNE/SEEK button volume level.
( or ) within 5 seconds.
The system will go into the PTY When the programme is changed to
search mode and search for a station another programme or the
of the selected PTY. If there is no frequency cannot be received for 10
station available in the selected PTY, seconds due to a weak signal, the
NO PTY is displayed for about 5 system will return to the disc mode
seconds and the PTY search mode is automatically.
cancelled.
CONTINUED
Features 203
10/10/25 18:58:20 32TF0630_209
Your audio system has another PTY Alarm Adjusting the Sound
interrupt function (including TA PTY code ALARM is used for Press the SOUND ( ) button
function). The first activated emergency announcements, such as repeatedly to display the BASS,
interrupt function has priority over natural disasters. When this code is TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, and
the others and the indication of the received, ALARM comes on the SVC (speed-sensitive volume
other interrupt function goes out. To display and the volume is changed. compensation) settings.
activate the other interrupt function, When the alarm is cancelled, the
turn off the current interrupt system will return to the normal BASS Adjusts the bass.
function. operation mode.
TREBLE Adjusts the treble.
FADER Adjusts the front-to-back

strength of the sound.
BALANCE Adjusts the side-to-

side strength of the sound.
SVC Adjusts the volume level

based on the vehicle speed.
204 Features
10/10/25 18:58:27 32TF0630_210
Each mode is shown in the display as Speed-sensitive Volume The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
it changes. Turn the VOL knob to Compensation (SVC) SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
adjust the setting to your liking. The SVC mode controls the volume HIGH. Turn the selector knob to
based on vehicle speed. The faster adjust the setting to your liking. If
Except for SVC you go, the louder the audio volume you feel the sound is too loud,
When the level reaches centre, you becomes. As you slow down, the choose low. If you feel the sound is
will see a C in the display. Each audio volume decreases. too quiet, choose high.
time the level reaches maximum,
minimum or centre, you will hear a
beep.
The system will return to the audio

display about 10 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
Features 205
10/10/25 18:58:36 32TF0630_211
Playing a Disc To Play a Disc

To load or play discs, the ignition
RDM BUTTON switch must be in the ACCESSORY
AM/FM BUTTON DISPLAY (I) or ON (II) position.
EJECT BUTTON
BUTTON SKIP BUTTONS You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the
CD/AUX button. You will see CD
in the display. The number of the
track playing and the elapsed time
are shown in the display. You can
also select the displayed information
with the TITLE button (see page
208 ). The system will continuously
CD/AUX play a disc until you change modes.
BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON RPT BUTTON

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
SCAN BUTTON The label can curl up and cause the
BUTTON
disc to jam in the unit.
VOL KNOB
SELECT BUTTON
BUTTON
206 Features
10/10/25 18:58:42 32TF0630_212
This audio system can also play NOTE: Depending on the software the files
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is were made with, it may not be
MP3 or WMA standard. You can protected by digital rights possible to play some files, or display
select up to 99 folders, or up to 255 management (DRM), the audio unit some text data.
tracks/files. displays UNSUPPORTED, and then
skips to the next file.
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
this unit.
CONTINUED
Features 207
10/10/25 18:58:52 32TF0630_213
To Load a Disc Text Data Display Function The display shows up to 16

Insert a disc about halfway into the Each time you press the TITLE characters of selected text data (the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc button, the display shows you the folder name, file name, etc.). If the
in the rest of the way and begin to text, if the disc was recorded with text data has more than 16
play it. The number of the track text data. characters, you will see the first 15
playing is shown in the display. The characters and the indicator in
system will continuously play a disc You can see the album, artist, and the display. Press and hold the
until you change modes. track name in the display. If a disc is TITLE button until the next 16
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can characters are shown.
You cannot load and play 8-cm see the folder and file name, and the
(3-inch) discs in this system. artist, album, and track tag. You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
If the disc has a complex structure, it
will take a while to read the disc When a new folder, file, or track is
before the system begins to play it. selected.
When you change the audio mode

to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the

system begins to play.
208 Features
10/10/25 18:59:04 32TF0630_214
When playing a CD-DA with text You can also select a folder or track/ SKIP Each time you press and
data, the album and track name are file directly by using the select release the SKIP button, the
shown in the display. With MP3 or button and VOL knob. Push the player skips forward to the
WMA files on a disc, the display select button. You will see in beginning of the next track (file in
shows the folder and file name. the display. Turn the VOL knob to MP3 or WMA mode). Press and
select a track, then push the select release to skip backward to the
To Change or Select Tracks/Files button to play your selection. In MP3 beginning of the current track. Press
You can use the SKIP buttons while or WMA mode, turn the knob to it again to skip to the beginning of
a disc is playing to select passages select a folder, push the button to set the previous track.
and change tracks (files in MP3/ the selected folder, and turn the
WMA mode). knob again to select a file, then push To move rapidly within a track or file,
the button to play the selected file. press and hold ( or ) of the
In MP3 or WMA mode, use the SKIP button.
button or button to select
folders in the disc and use the SKIP In MP3 or WMA mode
buttons to change files. FOLDER SELECTION To
select a different folder, press the
button or button. Press
the side to skip to the next
folder, and press the side to
skip to the beginning of the previous
folder.
CONTINUED
Features 209
10/10/25 18:59:12 32TF0630_215
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE SCAN The SCAN function In MP3 or WMA mode

REPEAT) To continuously replay samples all the tracks on the disc in FOLDER SCAN This feature,
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode), the order they are recorded on the when activated, samples the first file
press and release the RPT button. disc (all files in the current folder in of each folder on the disc. To
You will see RPT in the display. MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the activate folder scan, press the SCAN
Press and hold the RPT button for 2 scan feature, press and release the button twice. You will see F-SCAN in
seconds to turn it off. SCAN button. You will see SCAN the display.
in the display. You will get a 10
In MP3 or WMA mode second sampling of each track/file in The system plays the first file in the
FOLDER-REPEAT This feature, the disc/folder. Press and hold the first folder for about 10 seconds. If
when activated, replays all the files SCAN button to get out of scan you do nothing, the system will then
in the selected folder in the order mode and play the last track sampled. play the first files in the next folders
they are compressed in MP3/WMA. for 10 seconds. After playing the first
To activate folder repeat mode, press file in the last folder, the system
the RPT button repeatedly until you plays normally.
see F-RPT in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder. Press and hold the RPT
button to turn it off.
Each time you press and release the

RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal play.
210 Features
10/10/25 18:59:22 32TF0630_216
RANDOM (Random within a To Stop Playing a Disc If you turn the system off while a
disc) This feature plays the Press the eject button ( ) to disc is playing, either with the
tracks within a disc (the files within remove the disc. If you eject the disc, ( ) button or by turning off the
a disc in MP3 or WMA mode) in but do not remove it from the slot, ignition switch, the disc will stay in
random order. To activate random the system will automatically reload the drive. When you turn the system
play, press and release the RDM the disc after 10 seconds and put it in back on, the disc will begin playing
button. In MP3 or WMA mode, press pause mode. To begin playing, press where it left off.
the RDM button repeatedly to select the CD/AUX button.
RDM (within a disc random play). Protecting Discs
You will see RDM in the display. You can also eject the disc when the For information on how to handle
Press the RDM button for 2 seconds ignition switch is off. and protect compact discs, see page
to return to normal play. 228 .
To play the radio when a disc is
In MP3 or WMA mode playing, press the AM/FM button.
FOLDER RANDOM This Press the CD/AUX button again to
feature, when activated, plays the switch back to the disc player.
files within a current folder in
random order, rather than in the To play an audio unit connected to
order they are compressed in MP3 the auxiliary input jack or the USB
or WMA. To active folder random adapter cable when a disc is playing,
play, press and release the RDM press the CD/AUX button. Press the
button. You will see F-RDM in the CD/AUX button again to switch
display. Press and hold the RDM back to the disc player.
button to return to normal play.
Features 211
10/10/25 18:59:30 32TF0630_217
Disc Player Error Messages

The chart on the right explains the Error Cause Solution
error messages you may see in the Message
display while playing a disc. HEAT ERROR High temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
If you see an error message in the UNSUPPORTED Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next
display while playing a disc, press supported supported track or file plays automatically.
the eject button. After ejecting the BAD DISC Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
disc, check it for damage or PLEASE CHECK Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation. If there is no damage, OWNERS Mechanical Error deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
insert the disc again. MANUAL PUSH (see page 229). Insert the disc again. If the code
EJECT does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
For additional information on BAD DISC removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
damaged discs, see page 229 . PLEASE CHECK Servo Error force the disc out of the player.
OWNERS
The audio system will try to play the MANUAL
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
212 Features
10/10/25 18:59:39 32TF0630_218
Playing an iPod To Play an iPod

(For some types) This audio system can operate the
audio files on the iPod with the
iPod INDICATOR
same controls used for the disc
player. To play an iPod, connect it to
AM/FM BUTTON
the USB adapter cable equipped with
USB INDICATOR RDM BUTTON your vehicle by using your dock
connector, then press the CD/AUX
BUTTON DISPLAY button. The ignition switch must be
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position. The iPod can also be
recharged with the ignition switch in
these positions.
CD/AUX
BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
SKIP BUTTONS VOL KNOB
SELECT BUTTON
CONTINUED
Features 213
10/10/25 18:59:47 32TF0630_219
The audio system reads and plays iPod models confirmed to be NOTE:
playable sound files on the iPod. The compatible with your audio system Do not connect your iPod using a
system cannot operate an iPod as a using the USB adapter cable are: hub.
mass storage device. The system will
only play songs stored on the iPod Model Do not keep the iPod in the
with iTunes. iPod (5th generation) vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
iPod classic 80 GB/160 GB heat will damage it.
iPod and iTunes are registered (launch in 2007)
trademarks owned by Apple Inc. iPod classic 120 GB (launch in 2008) Do not use an extension cable
iPod classic 160 GB (launch in 2009) between the USB adapter cable
iPod nano equipped with your vehicle and
iPod touch your dock connector.
This system may not work with all We recommend backing up your
software versions of these devices. data before playing it.
214 Features
10/10/25 18:59:55 32TF0630_220
Some devices cannot be powered Connecting an iPod

or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory DOCK CONNECTOR
adapter to supply power to your
device.
USB ADAPTER
CABLE
USB ADAPTER CABLE SOCKET USB CONNECTOR
1. Open the lid of the USB adapter 2. Connect your dock connector to
cable socket. Insert the USB the iPod correctly and securely.
adapter cable connector into it
securely. 3. Install the USB connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
CONTINUED
Features 215
10/10/25 19:00:02 32TF0630_221
If the iPod indicator does not appear You can disconnect the iPod at any Text Data Display Function
in the audio display, check the time when the display on the iPod Each time you press the TITLE
connections, and try to reconnect the allows to disconnect it. Always button the display mode switches
iPod a few times. confirm the notice on the iPod when between the album name, the song
to disconnect it and make sure to name, the artist name, or name off
If the system still does not recognize follow the makers instructions to (which turns off the text display).
the iPod, it may need resetting. disconnect the dock connector from
Disconnect the iPod and reset it the USB adapter cable. The display shows up to 16
following the iPods instructions. characters of the selected data. If the
text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 16
characters are shown.
216 Features
10/10/25 19:00:10 32TF0630_222
To Change or Select Songs SKIP Each time you press and SHUFFLE ALL Press and
Use the SKIP button while an iPod is release the SKIP button, the release the RDM button to play the
playing to select passages and player skips forward to the songs in random order. You will see
change songs. beginning of the next song. Press RDM in the display. Press and hold
and release to skip backward to the RDM button to return to normal
You can also select playlists, artists, the beginning of the current song. play.
albums or songs from the list by Press it again to skip to the
using the select button and VOL beginning of the previous song. SHUFFLE ALBUM This feature,
knob. Push the select button to when activated, plays all songs in
switch the display to the list To move rapidly within a song, press each album in random order. To
displayed, then turn the VOL knob to and hold ( or ) of the SKIP activate shuffle album, press the
select a desired subject. Press the button. RDM button twice. You will see
( ) button to start playing the F-RDM in the display. Press and
song. REPEAT To continuously replay release the RDM button to return to
Press the select button to change the a song, press and release the RPT normal play.
display to the song list, then turn the button. You will see RPT in the
same knob to select a song. Press display. Press it again to turn it off.
the select button or ( ) button
to set your selection.
CONTINUED
Features 217
10/10/25 19:00:18 32TF0630_223
NOTE: To Stop Playing Your iPod If you reconnect the same iPod, the
Available operating functions vary on Disconnect the dock connector of audio unit may begin playing where
models or versions. Some functions the iPod from the USB adapter cable. it left off, depending on the iPod
may not be available on the vehicles Make sure to follow the makers specification.
audio system. instructions to disconnect it.
iPod Error Messages
To play the radio, press the AM/FM If you see an error message in the
button. Press the CD/AUX button to display, see page 219 .
switch to the disc mode (if a disc is
loaded). Press the CD/AUX button
again to switch back to the iPod
mode.
218 Features
10/10/25 19:00:25 32TF0630_224
iPod Error Messages

If there is a problem with your iPod, Error Cause Solution
an error message will appear. The Message
chart on the right explains the error USB ERROR USB ROM Error There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
messages you may see. Disconnect BAD USB Appears when the overcurrent protection
the iPod, and reconnect it. If there is DEVICE feature of the system stops supplying power to
still a problem, the error message PLEASE CHECK Abnormal power source USB because an incompatible device is
will reappear. Take your vehicle to a OWNERS connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn
dealer. MANUAL the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.
iPod NO SONG No files in iPod Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some
files in the iPod.
Appears when an unsupported iPod is
UNSUPPORTED connected. See page 214 for the specification
VER. Use of unsupported iPod information for iPods. If it appears when a
supported iPod is connected, update the iPod
software to the newer version.
CONNECT Recognition failure of Appears when the system does not
RETRY iPod acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
Features 219
10/10/25 19:00:32 32TF0630_225
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device To Play a USB Flash Memory

(For some types) Device
This audio system can operate the
AM/FM BUTTON audio files on the USB flash memory
device with the same controls used
USB INDICATOR RDM BUTTON for the disc player. To play a USB
flash memory device, connect it to
BUTTON DISPLAY the USB adapter cable equipped with
your vehicle, then press the CD/
AUX button. The ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.
CD/AUX
BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON RPT BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON
SKIP BUTTONS VOL KNOB
SELECT BUTTON
220 Features
10/10/25 19:00:40 32TF0630_226
The audio system reads and plays The recommended USB flash NOTE:
the audio files on the USB flash memory devices are 256 MB or Do not use a device such as a card
memory device in MP3, WMA or higher, and formatted with the FAT reader or hard drive as the device
AAC formats. Depending on the file system. Some digital audio or your files may be damaged.
format, the display shows MP3, players may be compatible as well.
WMA or AAC when a USB flash Do not connect your USB flash
memory device is playing. The USB Some USB flash memory devices memory device using a hub.
flash memory device limit is up to (such as devices with security lock-
700 folders or up to 65535 files. out features, etc.) will not work in Do not use an extension cable to
this audio unit. For more information, the USB adapter cable equipped
: Only AAC format files recorded consult your dealer. with your vehicle.
with iTunes are playable on this
audio unit.
CONTINUED
Features 221
10/10/25 19:00:47 32TF0630_227
Do not keep a USB flash memory Depending on the type and Some versions of MP3, WMA, or
device in the vehicle. Direct number of files, it may take some AAC format may not be supported. If
sunlight and high heat will damage time before they begin to play. an unsupported file is found, the
it. audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,
Depending on the software the then skips to the next file.
We recommend backing up your files were made with, it may not be
data before playing it. possible to play some files, or
display some text data.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If Depending on the type of
this is the case, use the accessory encoding and writing software
adapter to supply power to your used, there may be cases where
device. character information does not
display properly.
222 Features
10/10/25 19:00:57 32TF0630_228
Connecting a USB Flash Memory You can disconnect the USB flash
Device memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Make sure to follow
the USB flash memory devices
instructions when you remove it.
Text Data Display Function

Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display shows you the
text data (folder, file, artist, album or
track name) on a file.
USB ADAPTER CABLE SOCKET USB ADAPTER CABLE The display shows up to 16
characters of the selected data. If the
1. Open the lid of the USB adapter 2. Connect the USB flash memory text data has more than 16
cable socket. Insert the USB device to the USB adapter cable characters, you will see the first 15
adapter cable connector into it correctly and securely. characters and the indicator in
securely. the display. Press and hold the
When the USB flash memory device TITLE button until the next 16
is connected, the USB indicator is characters are shown.
shown in the display.
CONTINUED
Features 223
10/10/25 19:01:07 32TF0630_229
To Change or Select Files You can also select a folder or an SKIP Each time you press and
Use the SKIP button while a USB MP3, WMA or AAC file from the list release the SKIP button, the
flash memory device is playing to by using the select button and VOL player skips forward to the
select passages and change MP3, knob. Push the select button to beginning of the next MP3, WMA or
WMA or AAC file. switch the display to the list AAC file. Press and release to
displayed, then turn the VOL knob to skip backward to the beginning of
Use the ( or ) button to select a folder. Press the select the current track. Press it again to
select folders in the USB flash button to change the display to the skip to the beginning of the previous
memory device. MP3, WMA or AAC file list, then file.
turn the same knob to select a file.
Press the select button or ( ) To move rapidly within a file, press
button to set your selection. and hold ( or ) of the SKIP
button.
FOLDER SELECTION To
select a different folder, press the
button or button. Press
the side to skip to the next
folder, and press the side to
skip to the beginning of the previous
folder.
224 Features
10/10/25 19:01:14 32TF0630_230
REPEAT To continuously replay RANDOM This feature plays the SCAN The scan function samples
an MP3, WMA, or AAC file, press files within a USB flash memory all the files on the folder in the order
and release the RPT button. You will device in random order. To active they are recorded in the folder. To
see RPT in the display. Press and random play, press the RDM button activate the scan feature, press and
hold the RPT button to return to twice. You will see RDM in the release the SCAN button. You will
normal play. display. Press and release the RDM see SCAN in the display. You will get
button to return to normal play. a 10 second sampling of each file in
FOLDER REPEAT This feature, the folder. Press and hold the SCAN
when activated, replays all the files FOLDER RANDOM This button to get out of scan mode and
in the selected folder in the order feature, when activated, plays the play the last file sampled.
they are compressed in MP3, WMA files within a current folder in
or AAC. To activate folder repeat random order, rather than in the
mode, press the RPT button twice. order they are compressed in MP3,
You will see F-RPT in the display. WMA or AAC. To active folder
Press and release the RPT button to random play, press and release the
return to normal play. RDM button. You will see F-RDM in
the display. Press and hold the RDM
button to return to normal play.
CONTINUED
Features 225
10/10/25 19:01:21 32TF0630_231
FOLDER SCAN This feature, To Stop Playing a USB Flash If you reconnect the same USB flash
when activated, samples the first file Memory Device memory device, the system will
in each folder on the USB flash Disconnect the USB flash memory begin playing where it left off.
memory device in the order they are device. On some devices, follow the
recorded. To activate the folder scan makers instructions to disconnect USB Flash Memory Device Error
feature, press the SCAN button the device. Messages
twice. You will see F-SCAN in the If you see an error message in the
display. The system will then play To play the radio, press the AM/FM display, see page 227 .
the first file in the main folders for button. Press the CD/AUX button to
about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, switch to the disc mode (if a disc is
the system will then play the loaded). Press the CD/AUX button
following first files for 10 seconds again to switch back to the USB
each. When it plays a file that you mode.
want to continue listening to, press
the SCAN button.
226 Features
10/10/25 19:01:27 32TF0630_232
USB Flash Memory Device Error

Messages Error Cause Solution
If there is a problem with your USB Message
flash memory device, an error USB ERROR USB ROM Error There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
message will appear. The chart on BAD USB Appears when the overcurrent protection
the right explains the error DEVICE feature of the system stops supplying power to
messages you may see. Disconnect PLEASE CHECK Abnormal power source USB because an incompatible device is
the USB flash memory device, and OWNERS connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn
reconnect it. If there is still a MANUAL the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do
problem, the error message will not reconnect the device that caused the error.
reappear. Take your vehicle to a Appears when the files in the USB flash
dealer. UNPLAYABLE Use of unsupported files memory device are DRM or an unsupported
FILE format. This error message appears for about 3
seconds, then plays the next song.
Appears when the USB flash memory device is
No files in USB flash empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files
USB NO SONG memory device in the USB flash memory device. Save some
MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
memory device.
Appears when an unsupported device is
Use of unsupported USB connected. See page 221 for the specification
UNSUPPORTED flash memory device information for the USB flash memory device.
If it appears when the supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
Features 227
10/10/25 19:01:38 32TF0630_233
Protecting Your Discs
General Information Protecting Discs

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, When a disc is not being played,
use only high quality discs labelled store it in its case to protect it from
for audio use. dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
When recording a CD-R or direct sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
system. Wipe across the disc from the centre
to the outside edge.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped discs may jam in the A new disc may be rough on the
drive or cause other problems. inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a disc by its edges; never
Handle your discs properly to can flake off and fall on the touch either surface. Do not place
prevent damage and skipping. recording surface of the disc, stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
causing skipping or other problems. These, along with contamination
Remove these pieces by rubbing the from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
inner and outer edges with the side pens, can cause the disc to not play
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. of a pencil or pen. properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit. Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player.
228 Features
10/10/25 19:01:49 32TF0630_234
Additional Information on 1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs

Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player has a
sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown Bubbled/ With Label/ Using Printer Sealed With Plastic
Wrinkled Sticker Label Kit Ring
to the right:
2. Damaged discs 3. Poor quality discs
Chipped/ Warped Burrs

Cracked
CONTINUED
Features 229
10/10/25 19:02:01 32TF0630_235
4. Small, irregular shaped discs 5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
8-cm (3-inch) CD Triangle Shape Audio unit may not play the
Fingerprints, scratches, etc. following formats.
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due

to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the

discs may cause the sound to skip.
This audio unit cannot play a Dual-

disc .
Can Shape Arrow Shape
230 Features
10/10/25 19:02:09 32TF0630_236
Remote Audio Controls (For some types)
CH BUTTON MODE BUTTON The MODE button changes the If you are playing a disc, iPod or USB
mode. Pressing the button flash memory device, the system
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, skips to the beginning of the next
disc (if a disc is loaded), or an audio track (file in MP3, WMA or AAC
unit connected to the auxiliary input format) each time you press the top
jack or the USB adapter cable. You () of the CH button. Press the
can select FM1 and FM2 when the bottom () to return to the
auto select feature is not used. beginning of the current track/file.
Press it twice to return to the
If you are listening to the radio, use previous track/file.
the CH button to change stations.
VOL BUTTON Each time you press the top () of You will see the track/file number
the button, the system goes to the and the elapsed time. If the disc has
Three controls for the audio system next preset station on the band you text data or is compressed in MP3 or
are mounted in the steering wheel are listening to. Press the bottom WMA, you can also see any other
hub. These let you control basic () to go back to the previous information (track title, file name,
functions without removing your preset station. If you press and hold folder name, etc.).
hand from the wheel. the CH button () or (), the
system goes into the skip (seek) In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use
The VOL button adjusts the volume mode. It stops when it finds a station the skip function to select folders.
up () or down (). Press the top with a strong signal. Press and hold the top () of the
or bottom of the button, hold it until CH button until you hear a beep, to
the desired volume is reached, then skip forward to the first file in the
release it. next folder. Press the bottom () to
skip backward to the previous folder.
Features 231
10/10/25 19:02:19 32TF0630_237
Auxiliary Input Jack, Radio Theft Protection
Auxiliary Input Jack Radio Theft Protection If your vehicles battery is

(For some types) On vehicles with audio system disconnected or goes dead, the audio
Your vehicles audio system will system will disable itself. If this
disable itself if it is disconnected happens, you will see ENTER
from electrical power for any reason. CODE in the frequency display the
To make it work again, you must next time you turn on the system.
enter a specific five-digit code using Use the preset buttons to enter the
the preset buttons. Because there code. The code is on the radio code
are hundreds of number card included in your owners
combinations possible from the five- manual kit. When it is entered
digits, making the system work correctly, the radio will start playing.
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible. If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
You should have received a card that five-digit sequence, then enter the
The auxiliary input jack is on the lists your audio systems code and correct code. You have ten tries to
audio unit. The system will accept serial numbers. It is best to store this enter the correct code. If you are
auxiliary input from standard audio card in a safe place at home. In unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
accessories. addition, you should write the audio must then leave the system on for 1
systems serial number in this owners hour before trying again.
When you plug in a mini-jack cable manual.
between a compatible audio unit and The system will retain your AM and
the jack, you will see AUX in the If you lose the card, you must obtain FM presets even if power is
display and the system automatically the code number from a dealer. To disconnected.
switches to AUX mode. do this, you will need the systems
serial number.
232 Features
10/10/25 19:02:27 32TF0630_238
Setting the Clock
You can quickly set the time to the

CLOCK DISPLAY nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, press and hold
the CLOCK button, then press the R
(reset) button to set the time back to
RESET BUTTON the previous hour. If the displayed
time is after the half hour, the same
HOUR BUTTON procedure sets the time forward to
the beginning of the next hour.
CLOCK BUTTON
MINUTE BUTTON For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00
On vehicles with audio system Change the hours by pressing the H

To set the time, press the CLOCK (hour) button until the numbers
(AM/FM) button until you hear a advance to the desired time. Change
beep, then release the button. The the minutes by pressing the M
displayed time begins to blink. (minute) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
Press the CLOCK button again to

enter the set time.
Features 233
10/10/25 19:02:33 32TF0630_239
Security System (For some types)
The security system helps to protect When you lock the doors and the
your vehicle and valuables from theft. tailgate with the key or the remote
The horn sounds and the turn signal transmitter, all outside turn signals
lights flash if someone attempts to and both indicators in the instrument
break into your vehicle or remove panel flash three times to verify the
the radio. This alarm continues for doors and the tailgate are locked and
30 seconds, then the system resets. the security system has set. When
If the cause of the alarm continues, you unlock them, these lights flash
alarming will repeat several times at once.
about 5-second intervals.
The security system also sets after
To turn off an activated system SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR you lock the doors with the lock tab
before 30 seconds have elapsed, on the drivers door while pulling the
unlock the drivers door with the The security system sets outside door handle.
ignition key or the remote automatically 15 seconds after you
transmitter. lock the doors, bonnet, and tailgate.
For the system to activate, you must
lock the doors and the tailgate from
the outside with the key or remote
transmitter. The security system
starts blinking immediately to show
you the system is setting itself.
234 Features
10/10/25 19:02:42 32TF0630_240
Security System (For some types), Cruise Control (For some types)
Once the security system is set, The security system will not set if Cruise Control
opening any door or tailgate (without the bonnet, tailgate, or any door is Cruise control allows you to maintain
using the key or the remote not fully closed. If the system will not a set speed above 40 km/h (25 mph)
transmitter), or the bonnet, will set, check the door and tailgate open without keeping your foot on the
cause the system to alarm. It also indicators on the multi-information accelerator pedal. It should be used
alarms if the audio unit is removed display (see page 15 ), to see if the for cruising on straight, open
from the dashboard or the wiring is doors and tailgate are fully closed. motorways. It is not recommended
cut. Since there is no bonnet indicator, for city driving, winding roads,
manually check the bonnet. slippery roads, heavy rain, or bad
The alarm will also be activated if a weather.
passenger inside the locked vehicle Do not attempt to alter this system
turns the ignition switch on. or add other devices to it.
On vehicles with super locking system Improper use of the cruise

When you set the super locking control can lead to a crash.
along with the security system, the
alarm is not activated if someone Use the cruise control only
tries to open a door with the lock when travelling on open
tabs or the master door lock switch. motorways in good weather.
Features 235
10/10/25 19:02:53 32TF0630_241
Cruise Control (For some types)
Using Cruise Control 3. Press and release the SET/ Changing the Set Speed
DECEL button on the steering You can increase the set cruising
CRUISE RES/ACCEL BUTTON wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL speed in any of these ways:
BUTTON
comes on to show the system is Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
now activated. button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
Cruise control may not hold the set button.
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed Push on the accelerator pedal until
increases going down a hill, use the you reach the desired cruising
CANCEL brakes to slow down. This will cancel speed, then press the SET/
BUTTON the cruise control. To resume the set DECEL button.
SET/DECEL BUTTON
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
1. Push in the CRUISE button on the The CRUISE CONTROL indicator To increase the speed in very
steering wheel. The CRUISE on the instrument panel will come small amounts, tap the RES/
MAIN indicator on the instrument back on. ACCEL button. Each time you do
panel comes on. this, your vehicle will speed up
On vehicles with manual transmission about 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising While the cruise control system is
speed above 40 km/h (25 mph). activated, the shift up or down
indicator does not work (see page
276 ).
236 Features
10/10/25 19:03:05 32TF0630_242
Cruise Control (For some types)
You can decrease the set cruising Even with cruise control turned on, Resuming the Set Speed
speed in any of these ways: you can still use the accelerator When you push the CANCEL button,
pedal to speed up for passing. After or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
NOTE: If you need to decrease your completing the pass, take your foot system will remember the previously
speed quickly, use the brakes as you off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle set cruising speed. To return to that
normally would. will return to the set cruising speed. speed, accelerate to above 40 km/h
(25 mph), and then press and release
Press and hold the SET/DECEL Resting your foot on the brake or the RES/ACCEL button. The
button. Release the button when clutch pedal causes cruise control to CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
you reach the desired speed. cancel. on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
To slow down in very small Cancelling Cruise Control
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL You can cancel cruise control in any Pressing the CRUISE button turns
button. Each time you do this, of these ways: the system off and erases the
your vehicle will slow down about previous cruising speed.
1.6 km/h (1 mph). Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Tap the brake or clutch pedal Push the CANCEL button on the
lightly with your foot. The steering wheel.
CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
the instrument panel will go out. Push the CRUISE button on the
When the vehicle slows to the steering wheel.
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
Features 237
10/10/25 19:03:14 32TF0630_243
Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)
Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) allows Using HFT HFT Back button Press and
you to place and receive phone calls HFT Buttons release to end a call, go back to the
using voice commands, without previous command, or cancel the
handling your mobile phone. command.
To use HFT, you need a Bluetooth-

compatible mobile phone. For a list
of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature
capabilities: HFT TALK
BUTTON
Visit
www.hondahandsfree.com
HFT BACK BUTTON
All phones may not operate
identically, and some may cause HFT Talk button Press and
inconsistent operation of the HFT release to give a command or answer
system. a call.
NOTE: Before selling or discarding

your vehicle, make sure to delete the
stored phone data.
238 Features
10/10/25 19:03:23 32TF0630_244
Voice Control Tips Try to reduce all background Help Features

noise. If the microphone picks up To hear general HFT information,
voices other than yours, including help on using HFT
commands may be misinterpreted. buttons, Voice control, or making
a call, say Tutorial.
Many commands can be spoken
together. For example, you can For help at any time, including a
say Call 123-456- or list of available commands, say
Dial Peter. Hands free help.
When HFT is in use, navigation

voice commands cannot be
MICROPHONE recognised.
Air or wind noise from the To change the volume level of

dashboard and side vents and all HFT, use the audio system volume
windows may interfere with the knob or the steering wheel volume
microphone. Adjust or close them controls.
as necessary.
Press and release the HFT Talk

button each time you want to
make a command. After the beep,
speak in a clear, natural tone.
Features 239
10/10/25 19:03:30 32TF0630_245
Information Display The Bluetooth icon will also

As an incoming call notification, you appear on the display when a phone
will see the following display: is linked.
SIGNAL BATTERY When you are operating the HFT,
STRENGTH LEVEL STATUS dialing or receiving calls with the
audio system in use, you will see
TEL on the audio display.
HFT
MODE
SYMBOL
ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING
Some phones may send battery,

signal strength, and roaming status
information to HFT.
240 Features
10/10/25 19:03:39 32TF0630_246
How to Use HFT

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Pair Pair a phone to the system (See page 244)
Edit Edit the name of a paired phone (See page 245)
Phone Setup Delete Delete a paired phone from the system (See page 245)
List Hear a list of all phones paired to the system (See page 245)
Press HFT Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system
Status (See page 246)
Talk button
Next Phone Search for another previously paired phone to link to (See page 246)
Set Pairing Set the pairing code to a Fixed or Random number

Code (See page 246)
Call or Dial 123-456- Enter desired phone number (See page 247)
Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.
Jim Smith (See page 247)
Press and release the HFT Talk button each time you give a command.
CONTINUED
Features 241
10/10/25 19:03:47 32TF0630_247
Redial Redial the last number called (See page 248)
Transfer Transfer a call from HFT to your phone, or from your phone to HFT (See page 249)
Mute Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call (See page 249)
Send Send numbers or names during a call (See page 250)
Press HFT
Talk button Store Store a phonebook entry (See page 250)
Edit Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry (See page 251)
Phonebook Delete Delete a phonebook entry (See page 251)
Receive If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts from
Contact your phone to HFT (See page 252)
List Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 252)
242 Features
10/10/25 19:03:55 32TF0630_248
Security Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key
cycle to access the system (See page 253)
Change Password Change your security password (See page 253)

System Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call
Set up Call Notification
(See page 254)
Auto Transfer Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFT when you
enter the vehicle (See page 254)
Press HFT
Talk button Clear Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and security
password (See page 254)
Change Language Change language from English to other available one (See page 255)
Tutorial Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system (See page 239)
Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command
Hands Free Help (See page 239)
CONTINUED
Features 243
10/10/25 19:04:06 32TF0630_249
To use HFT, you need to pair your Your phones battery may drain 2. Follow the HFT prompts and put
Bluetooth-compatible mobile phone faster when it is paired to HFT. your phone in discovery or search
to the system. mode. HFT will give you a 4-digit
If after three minutes your phone pairing code and begin searching
Phone Setup is not ready to pair or a phone is for your phone.
This command group is available for not found, the system will time out
paired mobile phones. and return to idle. 4-digit pairing code is also shown
on the multi-information display.
Phone pairing tips To pair a mobile phone:
You cannot pair your phone while 1. Press and release the HFT Talk 3. When your phone finds a
the vehicle is moving. button. If you are pairing a phone Bluetooth device, select HFT from
for the first time, HFT will give the options and enter the 4-digit
Your phone must be in discovery you information about the pairing code from the previous step.
or search mode to pair. Refer to process. If it is not the first phone
your phones manual. you are pairing, say Phone 4. Follow the HFT prompts and
setup and say Pair. name the newly paired phone.
Up to six phones can be paired.
244 Features
10/10/25 19:04:18 32TF0630_250
To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone: To hear the names of all paired
Press and release the HFT Talk Press and release the HFT Talk phones:
button before a command. button before a command. Press and release the HFT Talk
button before a command.
1. Say Phone setup. 1. Say Phone setup.
1. Say Phone setup.
2. Say Edit after the prompts. 2. Say Delete after the prompts.
2. Say List after the prompts.
3. If there is more than one phone 3. HFT will ask you which phone you
paired to the system, HFT will ask want to delete. Follow the HFT 3. HFT will read out all the paired
you which phones name you want prompts to continue with the phones names.
to change. Follow the HFT deletion.
prompts and rename the phone.
CONTINUED
Features 245
10/10/25 19:04:31 32TF0630_251
To hear which paired phone is To change from the currently linked To change the pairing code setting:
currently linked: phone to another paired phone: Press and release the HFT Talk
Press and release the HFT Talk Press and release the HFT Talk button before a command.
button before a command. button before a command.
1. Say Phone setup.
1. Say Phone setup. 1. Say Phone setup.
2. Say Set pairing code after the
2. Say Status after the prompts. 2. Say Next phone after the prompts.
prompts.
3. HFT will tell you which phone is 3. If you want HFT to create a
linked to the system. 3. HFT disconnects the linked phone random code each time you pair a
and searches for another paired phone, say Random. If you want
phone. to choose your own 4-digit code to
be used each time, say Fixed
4. Once another phone is found, it is and follow the HFT prompts.
linked to the system. HFT will
inform you which phone is now
linked.
If no other phones are found or

paired, HFT will inform you that the
original phone is linked again.
246 Features
10/10/25 19:04:44 32TF0630_252
Making a Call To make a call using a name in the To make a call using a phone number
You can make calls using any phone HFT phonebook: (talk button):
number or a name in the HFT Press and release the HFT Talk Press and release the HFT Talk
phonebook. You can also redial the button before a command. button before a command.
last number called.
1. Say Call or Dial. 1. Say Call or Dial.
Bluetooth is the wireless technology
that links your phone to HFT. HFT 2. Follow the HFT prompts and say 2. Follow the HFT prompts and say
uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which the name stored in the HFT the phone number you want to dial.
means, the maximum range between phonebook that you want to call.
your phone and vehicle is 10 meters 3. Follow the HFT prompts to
(30 feet). 3. Follow the HFT prompts to confirm the number and say
confirm the name and make the Call or Dial.
During a call, HFT allows you to talk call.
up to 30 minutes after you remove Once connected, you will hear the
the key from the ignition switch. person you called through the audio
However, this may weaken the speakers.
vehicles battery.
CONTINUED
Features 247
10/10/25 19:04:53 32TF0630_253
To redial the last number called by To make a call using a paired phone Receiving a Call
HFT: via HFT When you receive a call, an incoming
Press and release the HFT Talk You can also make a call from your call notification (if activated) will
button and say Redial. paired phone in the vehicle. The call play and interrupt the audio system
will be transferred to HFT if it is on.
automatically.
Press the HFT Talk button to
NOTE: Never try to dial from your answer the call, or the HFT Back
phone directly if the vehicle is button to hang up.
moving.
Call Waiting
If your phone has Call Waiting, press
and release the HFT Talk button to
put the original call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
To return to the original call, press

the HFT Talk button again. If you
dont want to answer the incoming
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the HFT Back button.
248 Features
10/10/25 19:05:02 32TF0630_254
Transferring a Call Automatic Transferring Muting a Call

You can transfer a call from HFT to A call on the phone will be You can mute your voice to the
your phone, or from your phone to automatically transferred to the HFT person you are talking to during a
HFT. system when you get into the vehicle call.
and turn on the ignition switch.
Press and release the HFT Talk To mute your voice during a call,
button and say Transfer. If you make a call from your phone press and release the HFT Talk
while in the vehicle, the call will also button and say Mute.
be transferred to the HFT system.
To unmute your voice, press and
NOTE: Never try to dial from your release the HFT Talk button and say
phone directly if the vehicle is Mute again.
moving.
Features 249
10/10/25 19:05:15 32TF0630_255
Send Numbers or Names During Phonebook To store a phonebook entry:

a Call You can store up to 50 names with Press and release the HFT Talk
HFT allows you to send numbers or their associated numbers on HFT. button before a command.
names during a call. This is useful The numbers you store cannot be
when you call a menu-driven phone only phone numbers but other types, 1. Say Phonebook .
system. such as account numbers or
passwords, which can be sent during 2. Say Store after the prompts.
To send a name or number during a a menu-driven call.
call: 3. Say a name you want to list as your
Press and release the HFT Talk phonebook entry.
4. Say the number you want to store
1. Say Send. for the name entry.
2. Follow the HFT prompts and say 5. Follow the HFT prompts and say
the name or number you want to Enter to store the entry.
send.
3. Follow the HFT prompts to send

the tones and continue the call.
NOTE: To send a hash (), say

hash. To send a star (*), say star.
250 Features
10/10/25 19:05:28 32TF0630_256
NOTE: To edit the number stored in a name: To delete a name:

Avoid using duplicate name Press and release the HFT Talk Press and release the HFT Talk
entries. button before a command. button before a command.
Avoid using home as a name 1. Say Phonebook . 1. Say Phonebook .

entry.
2. Say Edit after the prompts. 2. Say Delete after the prompts.
It is easier for HFT to recognise a
multisyllabic or longer name. For 3. Follow the HFT prompts and say 3. Say the name you want to delete
example, use Peter instead of the name entry you want to edit. and follow the HFT prompts to
Pete, or John Smith instead complete the deletion.
of John. 4. When asked, say the new number
for that name.
5. Follow the HFT prompts to

complete the edit.
CONTINUED
Features 251
10/10/25 19:05:39 32TF0630_257
To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone number 4. Follow the HFT prompts and
Press and release the HFT Talk from your mobile phone directly to name the number, or say
button before a command. the HFT phonebook (available on Discard if it is not the number
some phones): you want to store.
1. Say Phonebook . Press and release the HFT Talk
button before a command. 5. Follow the HFT prompts if you
2. Say List after the prompts. want to store another number.
1. Say Phonebook .
3. HFT begins reading the names in
the order they were stored. 2. Say Receive contact after the
prompts.
4. If you hear a name you want to call,
immediately press the HFT Talk 3. Follow the HFT prompts, select a
button and say Call. number from your mobile phone,
and send it to HFT.
252 Features
10/10/25 19:05:52 32TF0630_258
System Setup To set a 4-digit password to lock the To change your security password:
This command group allows you to HFT system for security purposes: Press and release the HFT Talk
change or customize HFTs basic Press and release the HFT Talk button before a command.
settings. button before a command.
1. Say System setup.
1. Say System setup.
2. Say Change password after the
2. Say Security after the prompts. prompts.
3. Follow the HFT prompts and say 3. Follow the HFT prompts and say
the 4-digit password you want to the new 4-digit password.
set.
4. Follow the HFT prompts to
4. Follow the HFT prompts to confirm the number.
confirm the number.
NOTE: Once a password is set, you

will need to enter it to use HFT each
time you start the vehicle. If you
forget the password, your dealer will
have to reset it for you, or you will
have to clear the entire system (see
page 254 ).
CONTINUED
Features 253
10/10/25 19:06:05 32TF0630_259
To select either a ring tone or a To activate or deactivate the auto To clear the system:
prompt as the incoming call transfer function: This operation clears the password,
notification: If you get into the vehicle while you paired phones, all names in the HFT
Press and release the HFT Talk are on the phone, the call can be phonebook, and all imported
button before a command. automatically transferred to HFT phonebook data.
with the ignition switch in the
1. Say System setup. ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Press and release the HFT Talk
2. Say Call notification after the Press and release the HFT Talk
prompts. button before a command. 1. Say System setup.
3. Follow the HFT prompts and say 1. Say System setup. 2. Say Clear after the prompts.
Ring tone or Prompt . You
can also say Off for no audible 2. Say Auto transfer after the 3. Follow the HFT prompts to
incoming call notification. prompts. continue to complete the clearing
procedure.
: The default setting is a ring tone. 3. HFT will let you know if auto
transfer is on or off, depending on You can also clear the system when
the previous setting. Follow the you have forgotten the password and
HFT prompts to change the cannot access HFT. When HFT asks
setting. you for the password, say System
clear. Paired phones, all names in
the HFT phonebook and all imported
phonebook data will be lost.
254 Features
10/10/25 19:06:16 32TF0630_260
Change Language Quick Language Selection Bluetooth Wireless Technology

To change the system language To quickly change the language: The Bluetooth name and logos are
between English, French, Italian, Press and release the HFT Talk registered trademarks owned by
German and Spanish: button and say a command. Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
Press and release the HFT Talk such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
button before a command. 1. Say the language you want to Ltd. is under licence. Other
change to in that language. trademarks and trade names are
1. Say Change language. those of their respective owners.
2. Follow the HFT prompts.
2. Follow the HFT prompts to select
the desired language.
If you have not named your paired

phone in the language you just
selected, HFT will ask you to name it
in the current language.
For example, when French is your

currently selected language, you can
give voice commands in French.
Features 255
10/10/25 19:06:23 32TF0630_261
HFT System Limitations For information of DoC (Declaration of

When using voice control, the HFT Conformance)
system call is placed on hold, or the
HFT system stops its voice EU models
recognition. The HFT system call Hereby, Johnson Controls Automotive,
will continue when voice control declares that this Hands-Free
command is ended. To operate the Telephone System is in compliance
HFT system again, press the Talk with the essential requirements and
button. Then after the beep, say the other relevant provisions of Directive
appropriate command. 1999/5/EC.
In addition, you cannot use the HFT www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/EU_

system while receiving a PTY alarm. DoC.pdf
Except EU models
For additional conformance
information: www.jciblueconnect.
com/faq
256 Features
10/10/25 19:06:27 32TF0630_262
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 258

vehicle, you should know what fuel Fuel Recommendation .................. 258
to use and how to check the levels of Service Station Procedures .......... 259
important fluids. You also need to Refueling..................................... 259
know how to properly store luggage Opening and Closing
or packages. The information in this the Bonnet .............................. 260
section will help you. If you plan to Oil Check .................................... 261
add any accessories to your vehicle, Engine Coolant Check .............. 262
please read the information in this Fuel Cutoff System........................ 263
section first. Fuel Economy ................................ 264
Accessories and Modifications .... 265
Carrying Luggage .......................... 267
Before Driving 257

10/10/25 19:06:38 32TF0630_263
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation Oxygenated Fuels

Help assure your vehicles future Your vehicle is designed to operate Oxygenated fuels are blended with
reliability and performance by paying on Premium/Super unleaded petrol petrol and ethanol or ether
extra attention to how you drive with a Research Octane Number compound. Your vehicle is also
during the first 1,000 km (625 miles). (RON) of 95 or higher. designed to operate on oxygenated
During this period: fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by
Petrol of the recommended volume and up to 22% ETBE by
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid Research Octane Number (RON) volume, based on the EN228
acceleration. may not be available in some areas. standards. For more information, ask
In this case, petrol of a lower octane your dealer.
Avoid hard braking for the first may be used temporarily if it does
300 km (200 miles). not cause engine knocking. This
will result in decreased engine
Do not change the oil until the performance.
scheduled maintenance time.
Using petrol containing lead will
On vehicles with manual transmission damage your vehicles emissions
Do not tow a trailer. controls and engine. This contributes
to air pollution.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
258 Before Driving

10/10/25 19:06:48 32TF0630_264
Service Station Procedures
Refueling 3. Outside of the vehicle, push on the

right side edge of the fuel fill door
FUEL FILL DOOR in the middle until you hear a click. HOLDER
The fuel fill door will pop up
slightly. Pull it outward to open it.
FUEL FILL
Pull out CAP
Petrol is highly flammable

and explosive. You can be
Push burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
TETHER
Stop the engine, and keep
1. Park with the left side closest to heat, sparks, and flame 4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
the service station pump. away. You may hear a hissing sound as
Handle fuel only outdoors. pressure inside the tank equalizes.
2. Make sure the drivers door is Wipe up spills immediately.
unlocked. The fuel fill door always Place the fuel fill cap in the holder
locks or unlocks in conjunction on the fuel fill door. To prevent
with the drivers door. the fuel fill cap from becoming lost,
it is attached to the fuel filler with
With the drivers door locked, the a tether.
fuel fill door is also locked.
CONTINUED
Before Driving 259

10/10/25 19:06:57 32TF0630_265
5. Stop filling the tank after the fuel Opening and Closing the Bonnet
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to top off the tank. This BONNET RELEASE HANDLE LATCH
leaves some room in the fuel tank
for the fuel to expand with
temperature changes.
6. Screw the fuel fill cap back on

until it clicks at least once.
7. Push the fuel fill door closed until

it latches. If the door wont close
fully, do not force it. Unlock the
drivers door first.
1. Park the vehicle, and set the 2. Put your fingers between the front
parking brake. Pull the bonnet edge of the bonnet and the front
release handle under the lower grille. The bonnet latch handle is
The fuel door and its latching corner of the dashboard. The above the H logo. Push this
mechanism can be permanently bonnet will pop up slightly. handle up to release the bonnet.
damaged if the fuel door is forced Lift the bonnet.
closed when the drivers door is
locked. If the bonnet latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the
bonnet without lifting the handle,
the mechanism should be cleaned
and lubricated.
260 Before Driving

10/10/25 19:07:05 32TF0630_266
To close the bonnet, lift it up slightly Oil Check

to remove the support rod from the All engines consume oil as part of
hole. Put the support rod back into their normal operation, therefore,
its holding clip. Lower the bonnet to the engine oil level must be checked
about 30 cm (a foot) above the regularly, for example when
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it refuelling. Always check the oil
is securely latched. before a long journey.
The amount of oil consumed

depends on how the vehicle is driven
and the climatic and road conditions
encountered. The rate of oil
SUPPORT ROD CLIP consumption can be up to 1 litre per
1,000 km/625 miles. Consumption is
3. Holding the grip, pull the support likely to be higher when the engine
rod out of its clip. Insert the end is new.
into the hole in the bonnet
designated by an arrow. Make sure the engine is warmed up
and the vehicle is parked on level
ground. Turn off the engine and wait
approximately 3 minutes before
checking the oil level.
CONTINUED
Before Driving 261

10/10/25 19:07:16 32TF0630_267
Engine Coolant Check

DIPSTICK
RESERVE TANK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
MAX
MIN
1. Remove the dipstick (orange 4. Remove the dipstick again, and
handle). check the level. It should be Look at the coolant level in the
between the upper and lower radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
Remove the dipstick carefully, so marks. between the MAX and MIN lines. If
you do not spill the oil. Spilled oil it is below the MIN line, see Adding
could damage components in the If it is near or below the lower mark, Engine Coolant on page 330 for
engine compartment. see Adding Engine Oil on page 328 . information on adding the proper
coolant.
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel. Refer to Owners Maintenance
Checks on page 325 for information
3. Insert it all the way back in its tube. about checking other items on your
vehicle.
262 Before Driving

10/10/25 19:07:25 32TF0630_268
Fuel Cutoff System
The fuel cutoff switch is behind the In a collision or sudden impact, this
dashboard on the passengers side. switch automatically cuts off the fuel
To access the switch: supply to the engine.
1. Open the glove box. After the switch has activated, it

must be reset by pressing the button
2. Disengage the two tabs by before the engine can be restarted.
pushing on each side panel (see
page 353 ).
3. Pivot the glove box out of the way. Leaking petrol can ignite or
FUEL CUTOFF SWITCH explode, causing you to be
seriously or fatally injured.
4. Extend your arm through the
opening of the glove box. Always check for fuel leaks
before resetting the switch.
Before Driving 263

10/10/25 19:07:34 32TF0630_269
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy For example, an underinflated tyre Try to maintain a constant speed.
Always maintain your vehicle causes more rolling resistance, Every time you slow down and
according to the service reminder which uses more fuel. speed up, your vehicle uses extra
symbols displayed on the multi- fuel. Use the cruise control (on
information display. On vehicles The build-up of snow or mud on some types) when appropriate.
without service reminder system, your vehicles underside adds
follow the maintenance schedule weight and rolling resistance. Wind resistance causes vehicles to
in the Service Book that came with Frequent cleaning helps your fuel use more fuel at higher speeds.
your vehicle. On vehicles without economy and reduces the chance Driving at moderate speeds on the
Service Book, follow the of corrosion. motorway also reduces wind
maintenance schedule in this resistance and conserves fuel.
owners manual (see page 319 ). In Drive moderately. Rapid
any situation, see Owners acceleration, abrupt cornering, Combine several short trips into
Maintenance Checks (see page and hard braking use more fuel. one.
325 ).
Always drive in the highest gear The air conditioning puts an extra
possible. load on the engine which makes it
use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
On vehicles with manual transmission ventilation when possible.
Shift up and shift down indicators
on the instrument panel show the
best timing to shift to a higher or
lower gear, so you will keep the
engine operating in its most
economical range.
264 Before Driving

10/10/25 19:07:44 32TF0630_270
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not
modifications or add any accessories, modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
be sure to read the following vehicles handling, stability, with proper vehicle operation or
information. and performance, and cause performance.
a crash in which you can be
Accessories hurt or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has genuine Honda not overload electrical circuits
accessories that allow you to Follow all instructions in this (see page 421 ) or interfere with
personalize your vehicle. These owners manual regarding proper operation of your vehicle.
accessories have been designed and accessories and
approved for your vehicle. modifications. Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
Although non-Honda accessories windows. Accessories installed in
may fit on your vehicle, they may not When properly installed, cellular these areas may interfere with
meet factory specifications, and phones, alarms, two-way radios, proper operation of the side
could adversely affect your vehicles radio antenna, and low-powered curtain airbags.
handling, stability, and reliability. audio systems should not interfere
with your vehicles computer Before installing any electronic
controlled systems, such as your accessory, have the installer
airbags and anti-lock brakes. contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Before Driving 265

10/10/25 19:07:51 32TF0630_271
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle Larger or smaller wheels and tyres

Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of
or replacing components with your vehicles anti-lock brakes and
non-Honda components could other systems.
seriously affect your vehicles
handling, stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicles
Some examples are: safety features can make the
Lowering your vehicle with a systems ineffective.
non-Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a

non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling, stability, and
reliability.
Non-Honda wheels, because they

are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.
266 Before Driving

10/10/25 19:08:00 32TF0630_272
Carrying Luggage
Your vehicle has several convenient

FRONT CONSOLE BOX
storage areas:
LUGGAGE AREA DOOR POCKET UPPER GLOVE BOX
Upper glove box
Lower glove box
Door and seat-back pockets (on
some types)
Luggage area, including the rear
seats when folded up or down.
Front console box
Seat under box
Roof-rack (if installed)
However, carrying too much luggage,

or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicles handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tyres, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of luggage, be sure to read the
following pages.
SEAT UNDER BOX
SEAT-BACK POCKETS LOWER GLOVE BOX

: If equipped
Before Driving 267

10/10/25 19:08:07 32TF0630_273
Carrying Luggage
Load Limits Carrying Items in the Passenger

When you load luggage, the total Compartment
weight of the vehicle, all passengers, Overloading or improper Store or secure all items that could
and luggage must not exceed the loading can affect handling be thrown around and hurt
maximum permissible weight. and stability and cause a someone during a crash.
The load for the front and rear axles crash in which you can be
also must not exceed the maximum hurt or killed. Be sure items placed on the floor
permissible axle weight. behind the front seats cannot roll
Refer to page 435 for the maximum Follow all load limits and under the seats and interfere with
permissible weight and maximum other loading guidelines in the drivers ability to operate the
permissible axle weight. this manual. pedals, and proper operation of the
seats. Do not stack items higher
than the back of the front seats.
Keep the lower glove box closed

while driving. If it is open, a
passenger could injure their knees
during a crash or sudden stop.
268 Before Driving

10/10/25 19:08:16 32TF0630_274
Carrying Luggage
If you fold the rear seats up or Carrying Luggage in the Luggage If you can carry any items on a
down, tie down items that could be Area or on a Roof Rack roof rack, be sure the total weight
thrown about the vehicle during a Distribute luggage evenly on the of the rack and the items does not
crash or sudden stop. Also, keep floor of the luggage area, placing exceed 55 kg (121 lbs) on vehicles
all luggage below the bottom of the heaviest items on the bottom without the sunshade or 45 kg (99
the windows. If it is higher, it and as far forward as possible. lbs) on vehicles with the sunshade.
could interfere with the proper Try to secure the items with rope Please contact your dealer for
operation of the side curtain or cord so they will not shift while further information.
airbags. you are driving.
Concerning lashing means and
Try to secure the items with rope Do not place items on the luggage retaining devices offered on the
or cord so they will not shift while area cover (if equipped), or stack accessory market, please contact
you are driving. Do not stack objects higher than the top of the your dealer.
items higher than the back of the back seat. They could block your
front seats. view and be thrown about the
vehicle during a crash or sudden
Refer to page 156 for folding rear stop. A normal bike rack must not be
seats. fitted to the tailgate.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 73 .
Before Driving 269

10/10/25 19:08:23 32TF0630_275
Carrying Luggage
Luggage Hooks
HOOK
The hooks on the floor of the If equipped

luggage area enable you to tie down Your vehicle also has luggage hooks
items stored in the back. Make sure on the side panel in the luggage area.
all stored items are secured before They are designed to hold light
driving. items. Heavy objects may damage
the hook. Make sure any items put
on each hook weigh less than 1 kg
(2.2 lbs).
270 Before Driving

10/10/25 19:08:28 32TF0630_276
Driving
This section gives you tips on Preparing to Drive ......................... 272

starting the engine under various Starting the Engine........................ 273
conditions, and how to operate the Manual Transmission.................... 274
manual and automatic transmissions. Automatic Transmission (CVT) .. 277
It also includes important Driving with the Paddle
information on parking your vehicle, Shifters ........................................ 282
the braking system, the vehicle Parking ............................................ 287
stability assist (VSA) system, and Braking System.............................. 288
facts you need if you are planning to Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 289
tow a trailer. Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System......................................... 291
Driving in Bad Weather ................ 294
Towing a Trailer ............................ 296
Driving 271
10/10/25 19:08:39 32TF0630_277
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 4. Visually check the tyres. If a tyre 8. Check the steering wheel
and adjustments before you drive looks low, use a gauge to check its adjustment (see page 135 ).
your vehicle. pressure.
9. Make sure the doors are securely
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, 5. Check that any items you may be closed.
and outside lights are clean and carrying are stored properly or
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, fastened down securely. 10. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
or ice. your passengers have fastened
6. Check the seat adjustment (see their seat belts (see page 18 ).
2. Check that the bonnet is fully page 149 ).
closed. 11. When you start the engine, check
7. Check the adjustment of the the gauges and indicators in the
3. Check that the tailgate is fully inside and outside mirrors (see instrument panel (see page 80 ).
closed. page 166 ).
12. Check the symbol(s) on the multi-
information display.
272 Driving
10/10/25 19:08:48 32TF0630_278
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all The immobilizer system protects The engine is harder to start in cold
electrical accessories to reduce your vehicle from theft. If an weather. Also, the thinner air found
the drain on the battery. improperly coded key (or other at altitudes above 2,400 meters
device) is used, the engines fuel (8,000 feet) adds to this problem.
3. Manual transmission: system is disabled. See Immobilizer
Push the clutch pedal down all the System on page 138 . If the outside temperature is below
way and shift the transmission to freezing, or if your vehicle has not
neutral. been driven for several days, warm
up the engine for a few minutes
Automatic transmission: before driving (prohibited in
Make sure the shift lever is in Germany! 30 StVO).
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
4. Without touching the accelerator

pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
Driving 273
10/10/25 19:08:54 32TF0630_279
Manual Transmission
Come to a full stop before you shift When slowing down, you can get
into reverse. You can damage the extra braking from the engine by
transmission by trying to shift into shifting to a lower gear. This extra
reverse with the vehicle moving. braking can help you maintain a safe
Push down the clutch pedal, and speed and prevent your brakes from
pause for a few seconds before overheating while going down a
shifting into reverse, or shift into one steep hill. Before downshifting,
of the forward gears for a moment. make sure the engine speed will not
This stops the gears so they wont go into the tachometers red zone in
grind. the lower gear. Refer to the
maximum allowable speeds charts.
The manual transmission is

synchronized in all forward gears for
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from fifth to
reverse. When shifting up or down,
make sure you push the clutch pedal
down all the way, shift to the next
gear, and let the pedal up gradually.
When you are not shifting, do not
rest your foot on the clutch pedal.
This can cause excessive clutch wear.
274 Driving
10/10/25 19:09:00 32TF0630_280
Manual Transmission
Engine Speed Limiter

If you exceed the maximum speed
Rapid slowing or speeding- Do not rest your hand on the shift for the gear you are in, the engine
up can cause loss of control lever while driving; pressure speed will enter into the tachometers
on slippery surfaces. If you transmitted from your hand may red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
crash, you can be injured. cause premature wear to the gear the engine cut in and out. This is
selector mechanism. caused by a limiter in the engines
Use extra care when driving computer controls. The engine will
on slippery surfaces. run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the

engine will not go into the
tachometers red zone.
Driving 275
10/10/25 19:09:08 32TF0630_281
Manual Transmission
Shift Up/Shift Down Indicators Either shift up or shift down If there is a problem with the shift up
indicator will come on at the best or down indication system, both of
SHIFT UP INDICATOR time to shift to a higher or lower the shift up and shift down indicators
gear for better fuel economy. You will not come on. Have your vehicle
can achieve better fuel economy by inspected by your dealer.
accelerating and decelerating slowly,
and shifting when prompted by the
shift up or down indicator.
The shift indicator is only a
The shift down indicator prompts guide to help you achieve
you to shift to a lower gear according better fuel economy. Never
to your acceleration when you are refer to the Shift Indicators
SHIFT DOWN INDICATOR climbing a hill or for faster when road and traffic
accelerating on a level road. conditions are unsuitable or
The shift indicator light may be used when it may distract you.
as a guide to help you change gear This indicator will not prompt to
when you would like to drive to downshift to first gear. It is up to you
achieve better fuel efficiency. to downshift to first gear to increase
engine braking. Avoid sudden engine
braking.
Road and traffic conditions may

require you to shift at times other
than those indicated.
276 Driving
10/10/25 19:09:16 32TF0630_282
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
Continuously Variable Shift Lever Position Indicators If the malfunction indicator lamp
Transmission (CVT) comes on along with the D
Hondas Continuously Variable indicator, there is a problem with the
Transmissions unique design automatic transmission control
provides a smooth, constant flow of system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
power. It is electronically controlled have the transmission checked by
for more precise operation and your dealer as soon as possible.
better fuel economy.
When the D indicator warns of a
possible problem with the
transmission, you will see the symbol
, or, the symbol with a
CHECK SYSTEM message.
This indicator on the instrument

panel shows which position the shift
lever is in.
The D indicator comes on for a

few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
Driving 277
10/10/25 19:09:23 32TF0630_283
Shifting To shift from: Do this: Park (P) This position

P to R Press the brake pedal and mechanically locks the transmission.
RELEASE BUTTON press the release button. Use Park whenever you are turning
SHIFT LEVER R to P off or starting the engine. To shift
N to R Press the release button. out of Park, you must press on the
D to S brake pedal and have your foot off
S to D the accelerator pedal. Press the
D to N Move the lever. release button on the front of the
N to D shift lever to move it.
R to N
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 281 .
To shift from Park to any position,
press the brake pedal, the release
button on the front of the shift lever,
then pull the lever. You cannot shift
out of Park when the ignition switch
is in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position.
278 Driving
10/10/25 19:09:29 32TF0630_284
To avoid transmission damage, come Reverse (R) Press the brake Drive (D) Use this position for
to a complete stop before shifting pedal and the release button on the your normal driving. The
into Park. You must also press the front of the shift lever to shift from transmission automatically adjusts to
release button to shift into Park. The Park to reverse. To shift from keep the engine at the best speed for
shift lever must be in Park before reverse to neutral, come to a the driving conditions.
you can remove the key from the complete stop, and then shift. Press
ignition switch. the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
Neutral (N) Use neutral if you

need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another position.
CONTINUED
Driving 279
10/10/25 19:09:35 32TF0630_285
Second (S) To shift into the S With the shift lever in D or S, you Engine Speed Limiter
position, press the release button on can also use the paddle shifters to The CVT shifts automatically to
the front of the shift lever, and move shift the transmission up or down. maintain proper engine speed in any
the lever to S. The S position is With the paddle shifters, you can shift position.
similar to D, except the range of operate the transmission much like a
ratios are different for better manual transmission without a When the vehicle reaches the
acceleration and increased engine clutch pedal. For more information maximum speed in any shift position,
braking. on driving with the paddle shifters, you may feel the engine cut in and
see page 282 . out. This is caused by a limiter (180
km/h, 112 mph) in the engines
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
speed to below the maximum.
280 Driving
10/10/25 19:09:46 32TF0630_286
Shift Lock Release RELEASE BUTTON

This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.
COVER SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
3. Put a cloth on the notch of the
shift lock release slot cover to 4. Insert the key in the shift lock 6. Remove the key from the shift
prevent scratches. Using a small release slot. lock release slot, then reinstall the
flat-tip screwdriver or metal cover. Make sure the notch on the
fingernail file, carefully pry on the 5. Push down on the key while you cover is on the left side. Press the
notch of the cover to remove it. press the release button on the brake pedal, and restart the engine.
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral. If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
Driving 281
10/10/25 19:09:54 32TF0630_287
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (For some types)
Using the Paddle Shifters in the

D position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)
When you are driving in the D
position, pulling either paddle shifter
switches from the ordinary
automatic transmission (CVT) to the
D-paddle shift mode. You can shift
the transmission up or down through
seven-stages manually with the
paddle shifters.
Downshifting gives you more power SHIFT INDICATOR

when climbing, and provides engine
braking when going down a steep hill. To shift up or down, use the When you pull either paddle shifter,
(right) or (left) paddle shifter on the shift indicator shows you the
either side of the steering wheel. selected speed number.
Pull the (right) paddle shifter to When the transmission returns to

upshift. Pull (left) to downshift. ordinary automatic transmission
(CVT), the displayed shift indicator
disappears.
282 Driving
10/10/25 19:10:00 32TF0630_288
Downshifting with the (left) The transmission control system To cancel the D-paddle shift mode
paddle shifter allows you to increase monitors the accelerator pedal use manually, pull and hold the side
the engine braking when going down and your driving conditions. When paddle shifter until the shift indicator
steep or long hills, and provides you press the accelerator pedal as in goes out.
more power when climbing uphills. the normal driving, the system
You can upshift the transmission judges that you are driving at a The transmission remains in the
manually to reduce the rpm. constant cruising speed without selected speed if you do not
using the paddle shifters. Under accelerate.
these conditions, D-paddle shift
mode is cancelled, and the
transmission automatically returns to
ordinary automatic transmission
(CVT).
CONTINUED
Driving 283
10/10/25 19:10:08 32TF0630_289
Each time you pull either paddle The automatic transmission (CVT) The transmission downshifts to first
shifter, the transmission shifts one will not allow you to shift if: speed and returns to ordinary
speed up or down. If you want to automatic transmission (CVT) when
shift up or down more than two You downshift before the engine the vehicle comes to a complete stop
speeds, pull the paddle shifter twice, speed reaches the highest and the vehicle speed is about 10
pause, and then pull it again. threshold of the lower speed. km/h (6 mph).
If you try to do this, the shift If there is a problem in the

indicator will flash the number of transmission while you are driving
the lower speed several times, with the paddle shifters, the D
then return to a higher speed. indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift
mode is cancelled, and the
You upshift before the engine transmission returns to ordinary
speed reaches the lowest automatic transmission (CVT).
threshold of the higher speed.
You press both paddle shifters at

the same time.
You pull one of the two paddle

shifters with another paddle
shifter being pressed.
284 Driving
10/10/25 19:10:17 32TF0630_290
Using the Paddle Shifters in the S M INDICATOR If you keep depressing the
position (7-Speed Manual Shift accelerator pedal without pressing
Mode) the paddle shifter, the speed will be
With the shift lever in the S position, automatically shifted up just before
you can select the 7-Speed Manual the tachometers red zone.
shift mode to shift speeds; much like
a manual transmission using the The transmission also shifts
paddle shifters, but without a clutch automatically as the vehicle comes to
pedal. a complete stop. It downshifts to first
speed when the vehicle speed
To enter the 7-speed manual shift reaches 10 km/h (6 mph) or less.
mode, press the release button on SHIFT INDICATOR
the front of the shift lever, move the Downshifting with the (left)
lever to the S position, then pull When you move the shift lever from paddle shifter allows you to increase
either paddle shifter. To cancel the the D to the S position and pull the engine braking when going down
7-speed manual shift mode and either paddle shifter, the shift steep or long hills, and provides
return to the ordinary automatic indicator displays M along with the more power when climbing uphills.
transmission (CVT), move the shift selected speed number. You can upshift the transmission
lever from the S position. When manually to reduce the rpm.
moving the shift lever, be careful not To upshift, pull the (right) paddle
to operate incorrectly. While you are shifter. To downshift, pull the
driving in the 7-speed manual shift (left) paddle shifter.
mode, the transmission will not
automatically return to the ordinary
automatic transmission (CVT).
CONTINUED
Driving 285
10/10/25 19:10:23 32TF0630_291
The automatic transmission (CVT) You press both paddle shifters at

will not allow you to shift if: the same time.
You downshift before the engine You pull one of the two paddle
speed reaches the highest shifters with another paddle
threshold of the lower speed. shifter being pressed.
If you try to do this, the shift

indicator will flash the number of
the lower speed several times,
then return to a higher speed.
You upshift before the engine

speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher speed.
286 Driving
10/10/25 19:10:34 32TF0630_292
Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the windows are closed. the front wheels away from the
the parking brake is set firmly, or curb.
your vehicle may roll if it is parked Turn off the lights.
on an incline. If the vehicle is facing downhill,
Place any packages, valuables, etc., turn the front wheels toward the
If your vehicle has an automatic in the luggage area or take them curb.
transmission, set the parking brake with you.
before you put the transmission in Make sure the parking brake is
Park. This keeps the vehicle from Lock the doors and the tailgate. fully released before driving away.
moving and putting pressure on the Driving with the parking brake
parking mechanism in the On vehicles with security system partially set can overheat or
transmission. Check the indicator on the damage the rear brakes.
instrument panel to verify that the You will also see the symbol
security system is set. , or this symbol with a
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE
Never park over dry leaves, tall message in the multi-information
grass, or other flammable display (see page 168 ).
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
Driving 287
10/10/25 19:10:42 32TF0630_293
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc Constant application of the brakes Braking System Design
brakes at all four wheels. A power when going down a long hill builds The hydraulic system that operates
assist helps reduce the effort needed up heat and reduces their the brakes has two separate circuits.
on the brake pedal. The emergency effectiveness. Use the engine to Each circuit works diagonally across
brake assist system increases the assist the brakes by taking your foot the vehicle (the left-front brake is
stopping force when you depress the off the accelerator and downshifting connected with the right-rear brake,
brake pedal hard in an emergency to a lower gear. etc.). If one circuit should develop a
situation. The anti-lock brake system problem, you will still have braking
(ABS) helps you retain steering Check the brakes after driving at two wheels.
control when braking very hard. through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel Brake Pad Wear Indicators
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps normal. If not, apply them gently and All four disc brakes have audible
the brakes applied lightly, builds up frequently until they do. Be extra brake pad wear indicators.
heat, reduces their effectiveness and cautious in your driving.
reduces brake pad life. In addition, If the brake pads need replacing, you
fuel economy can be reduced. It also will hear a distinctive, metallic
keeps your brake lights on all the screeching sound when you apply
time, confusing drivers behind you. the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
288 Driving
10/10/25 19:10:50 32TF0630_294
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake ABS Indicator
helps prevent the wheels from pedal when the ABS activates, and
locking up, and helps you retain you may hear some noise. This is If the ABS indicator comes on, the
steering control by pumping the normal: it is the ABS rapidly anti-lock function of the braking
brakes rapidly, much faster than a pumping the brakes. On dry roads, system has shut down. The brakes
person can do it. you will need to press on the brake still work like a conventional system,
pedal very hard before the ABS but without anti-lock. You should
The electronic brake distribution activates. However, you may feel the have your dealer inspect your vehicle
(EBD) system, which is part of the ABS activate immediately if you are as soon as possible.
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear trying to stop on snow or ice.
braking distribution according to If the ABS indicator comes on while
vehicle loading. driving, test the brakes as instructed
on page 419 .
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Let the ABS work for you by always You will also see the symbol
keeping firm, steady pressure on the or this symbol with a CHECK
brake pedal. This is sometimes SYSTEM message on the multi-
referred to as stomp and steer. information display.
CONTINUED
Driving 289
10/10/25 19:10:59 32TF0630_295
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
If the ABS indicator and the brake Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
system indicator come on together, ABS does not reduce the time or longer distance to stop on loose or
and the parking brake is fully distance it takes to stop the uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
released, the EBD system may also vehicle. It only helps with steering snow, than a vehicle without anti-
be shut down. control during braking. lock.
If this happens, you will also see the ABS will not prevent a skid that
symbols (for ABS system) results from changing direction
and (for Brake system), or abruptly, such as trying to take a
CHECK SYSTEM messages with corner too fast or making a sudden
each of these symbols on the multi- lane change. Always drive at a safe
information display. speed for the road and weather
conditions.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 419 . If the brakes feel normal, ABS cannot prevent the loss of
drive slowly and have your vehicle stability. Always steer moderately
repaired by your dealer as soon as when you are braking hard. Severe
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking or sharp steering wheel movement
which could cause the rear wheels to can still cause your vehicle to veer
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of into oncoming traffic or off the road.
control.
290 Driving
10/10/25 19:11:08 32TF0630_296
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) VSA OFF Indicator If the VSA system indicator comes
system helps to stabilize the vehicle on while driving, pull to the side of
during cornering if the vehicle turns When VSA is off, the VSA OFF the road when it is safe, and turn off
more or less than desired. It also indicator comes on as a reminder. the engine. Reset the system by
assists you in maintaining traction restarting the engine. If the VSA
while accelerating on loose or VSA System Indicator system indicator stays on or comes
slippery road surfaces. It does this back on while driving, have the VSA
by regulating the engines output and When VSA activates, you will see the system inspected by your dealer.
by selectively applying the brakes. VSA system indicator blink.
When VSA activates, you may notice

that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA activation indicator blink.
The VSA system cannot enhance the

vehicles driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicles entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
CONTINUED
Driving 291
10/10/25 19:11:15 32TF0630_297
If the indicator does not come on When the VSA system indicator VSA OFF Switch
when the ignition switch is turned to comes on, you will also see the
the ON (II) position, there may be a symbol or this symbol with a VSA OFF SWITCH
problem with the VSA system. Have CHECK SYSTEM message on the
your dealer inspect your vehicle as multi-information display.
soon as possible.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
This switch is under the drivers side

vent. To turn the VSA system on and
off, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation

indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
292 Driving
10/10/25 19:11:21 32TF0630_298
VSA is turned on every time you Immediately after freeing your VSA and Tyre Sizes
start the engine, even if you turned it vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on Driving with varying tyre or wheel
off the last time you drove the again. We do not recommend driving sizes may cause the VSA to
vehicle. your vehicle with the VSA and malfunction. When replacing tyres,
traction control systems switched off. make sure they are of the same size
In certain unusual conditions when and type as your original tyres (see
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow page 365 ).
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily If you install winter tyres, make sure
switched off. When the VSA system they are the same size as those that
is off, the traction control system is were originally supplied with your
also off. You should only attempt to vehicle. Exercise the same caution
free your vehicle with the VSA off if during winter driving as you would if
you are not able to free it when the your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA is on. VSA.
Driving 293
10/10/25 19:11:28 32TF0630_299
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving Technique Always drive Exercise extra caution when driving

slower than you would in dry in rain after a long dry spell. After
weather. It takes your vehicle longer months of dry weather, the first
to react, even in conditions that may rains bring oil to the surface of the
seem just barely damp. Apply roadway, making it slippery.
smooth, even pressure to all the
controls. Abrupt steering wheel
movements or sudden, hard appli-
cation of the brakes can cause loss of
control in wet weather. Be extra
cautious for the first few kilometers
(miles) of driving while you adjust to
the change in driving conditions.
Rain, fog, and snow conditions re- This is especially true in snow. A
quire a different driving technique person can forget some snow-driving
because of reduced traction and techniques during the summer
visibility. Keep your vehicle well- months. Practice is needed to relearn
maintained and exercise greater those skills.
caution when you need to drive in
bad weather. The cruise control (on
some types) should not be used in
these conditions.
294 Driving
10/10/25 19:11:36 32TF0630_300
Driving in Bad Weather
Visibility Being able to see Traction Check your tyres

clearly in all directions and being frequently for wear and proper
visible to other drivers are important pressure. Both are important in
in all weather conditions. This is preventing aquaplaning (loss of
more difficult in bad weather. To be traction on a wet surface). In the
seen more clearly during daylight winter, mount snow tyres on all four
hours, turn on your headlights. wheels for the best handling.
Inspect your windscreen wipers and Watch road conditions carefully,

washers frequently. Keep the wind- they can change from moment to
screen washer reservoir full of the moment. Wet leaves can be as slip-
proper fluid. Have the windscreen pery as ice. Clear roads can have
wiper blades replaced if they start to patches of ice. Driving conditions
streak the windscreen or leave parts can be very hazardous when the Be very cautious when passing, or
unwiped. Use the demister and air outside temperature is near freezing. being passed by other vehicles. The
conditioning (on some types) to keep The road surface can become spray from large vehicles reduces
the windows from fogging up on the covered with areas of water puddles your visibility, and the wind buffeting
inside (see pages 188 and 192 ). mixed with areas of ice, so your can cause you to lose control.
traction can change without warning.
CAUTION: Do not drive on the road
Be careful when downshifting. If where water is deep. Driving through
traction is low, you can lock up the deep water will cause damage to the
drive wheels for a moment and cause engine and electrical equipment and
a skid. the vehicle will break down.
Driving 295
10/10/25 19:11:43 32TF0630_301
Towing a Trailer
On vehicles with manual transmission Load Limits

Your vehicle has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and Exceeding any load limit or
their luggage. You can also use it to improperly loading your
tow a trailer if you carefully observe vehicle and trailer can cause
the load limits, use the proper a crash in which you can be
equipment, and follow the guidelines seriously hurt or killed.
in this section.
Check the loading of your
Break-In Period vehicle and trailer carefully
Avoid towing a trailer during your before starting to drive.
vehicles first 1,000 km (625 miles)
(see page 258 ).
The total weight of the trailer and

towbar (with/without brakes) plus
its luggage must not exceed the
maximum towing weight. See page
435 .
296 Driving
10/10/25 19:11:51 32TF0630_302
Towing a Trailer
For example, if the trailer and its The maximum towing weight
load weigh 225 kg (500 lbs), the must not exceed the specified limit
trailer nose load should be 22.5 kg as shown on page 435 .
(50 lbs). Adjust trailers luggage to
change the trailer nose load. Start This weight will be estimated on
by putting approximately normal driving below 1,000 meters
60 percent of the luggage toward elevation.
the front and 40 percent toward
the rear. With a trailer package of If you tow a trailer in mountainous
more than 950 kg (2,094 lbs), you conditions, remember to reduce
may need to adjust the luggage 10% of the combined vehicle and
weight toward the rear. Never trailer weights from the maximum
load the trailer so the back is towing weight for every 1,000
heavier than the front. This takes meters of elevation.
The trailer nose load should never weight off your vehicles rear axle
exceed 95 kg (209 lbs). This is the and reduces traction. The combined vehicle and trailer
amount of weight the trailer puts weights are the maximum
on the towbar when it is fully- The maximum permissible weight permissible weight and trailer
loaded. As a rule of thumb for must not exceed the specified limit weight with everything in and on
trailer weights of less than 950 kg as shown on page 435 . the trailer.
(2,094 lbs), the trailer nose load
should be 10 percent of the total The maximum permissible weight
trailer package. is total weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage and
towbar.
CONTINUED
Driving 297
10/10/25 19:12:02 32TF0630_303
Towing a Trailer
Please consider that the Towing Equipment and Towbars

installation of optionals (and trailer Accessories Any towbar used on your vehicle
nose load when towing a trailer) Towing can require a variety of must be properly bolted to the
will reduce the loading capacity. equipment, depending on the size of underbody.
your trailer, how it will be used, how
Towing a load that is too heavy can much load you are towing, and Refer to page 434 for the towbar
seriously affect your vehicles where you tow. mounting points.
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and Discuss your needs with your trailer Safety Chains
drivetrain. sales or rental agency, and follow the Always use safety chains when you
guidelines in this section. Also make tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
Checking Loads sure that all equipment is properly are secured to the trailer and towbar,
The best way to confirm that vehicle installed and maintained, and that it and that they cross under the trailer
and trailer weights are within limits meets the countrys regulations nose and can catch the trailer if it
is to have them checked at a public where you are driving. becomes unhitched. Leave enough
scale. slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
Using a suitable scale or a special chains drag on the ground.
trailer nose load gauge, check the
total weight, the weight at each axle
and the trailer nose load the first
time you set up a towing combination
(a fully-loaded vehicle and trailer),
then recheck the loads whenever the
conditions change.
298 Driving
10/10/25 19:12:10 32TF0630_304
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights Since lighting and wiring vary by

If you are thinking of getting a trailer Trailer lights and equipment must trailer type and brand, you should
that has brakes, be sure they are comply with the countrys have a qualified technician install a
electronically actuated. Do not regulations where you are driving. suitable connector between the
attempt to tap into your vehicles Check the requirements for the vehicle and the trailer. Improper
hydraulic system. No matter how areas where you plan to tow, and use equipment or installation can cause
successful it may seem, any attempt only equipment designed for your damage to your vehicles electrical
to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle. system.
vehicles hydraulic system will lower
braking effectiveness and create a You can get an optional trailer Always consult your dealer before
potential hazard. lighting connector for your vehicle connecting the trailer lights to your
from your dealer. vehicles lighting system.
See your trailer dealer or rental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.
CONTINUED
Driving 299
10/10/25 19:12:20 32TF0630_305
Towing a Trailer
Additional Trailer Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist The lights and brakes on your
There may be laws requiring special When preparing to tow, and before vehicle and the trailer are working
outside mirrors when towing a trailer. driving away, be sure to check the properly.
Check the local laws in the country. following:
Even if there are no legal Your vehicle tyres and spare (if
requirements, you should install The vehicle has been properly equipped) are properly inflated,
special mirrors if you cannot clearly serviced, and the suspension and and the trailer tyres and spare are
see behind you, or if the trailer the cooling system are in good inflated as recommended by the
creates a blind spot. operating condition. trailer maker.
Ask your trailer sales or rental The trailer has been properly Be sure to check regulations
agency if any other items are serviced and is in good condition. concerning the maximum speed or
recommended or required for your driving restrictions for vehicles
towing situation. All weights and loads are within towing trailers. If you are driving
limits. across several countries, check
each countrys requirements
The towbar, safety chains, and any before leaving home, because
other attachments are secure. regulations may vary.
All items in or on the trailer are Operating speed when towing a

properly secured and cannot shift trailer is restricted to 100 km/h
while you drive. (62 mph).
300 Driving
10/10/25 19:12:30 32TF0630_306
Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer Towing Speeds and Gears Either shift up or shift down
The added weight, length, and Drive slower than normal in all indicator will come on at the best
height of a trailer will affect your driving situations, and obey posted time to shift to a higher or lower
vehicles handling and performance, speed limits for vehicles with trailers. gear for the better fuel economy.
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and Do not exceed the limited speed The shift down indicator will not
techniques. when towing a trailer. At higher prompt to downshift to first gear. It
speeds, the trailer may sway or is up to you to downshift to first gear
For your safety and the safety of affect vehicle handling (see Driving to increase engine braking. Avoid
others, take time to practice driving on Hills in the next page for sudden engine braking.
manoeuvres before heading for the additional gear information).
open road, and follow the guidelines Road and traffic conditions may
in this section. require you to shift at times other
than those indicated.
Making Turns and Braking

Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
can hit or run over something the
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
CONTINUED
Driving 301
10/10/25 19:12:38 32TF0630_307
Towing a Trailer
Driving on Hills Do not ride the brakes, and Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
When climbing hills, closely watch remember, it will take longer to slow Crosswinds and air turbulence
your high temperature indicator. If down and stop when towing a trailer. caused by passing trucks can disrupt
the indicator remains on, turn the air your steering and cause the trailer to
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if Driving on an uphill road of more sway. When being passed by a large
necessary, pull to the side of the than 12% slope is not recommended vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
road to let the engine cool. for your vehicle. steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
When driving down hills, reduce We recommend that you tow a corrections.
your speed and always apply engine trailer on the roads recommended by
braking by shifting down. If your the trailer association.
vehicle has a manual transmission,
when going down a steep hill, use Make sure to set the parking brake
the second gear to provide greater when starting off on an incline.
engine braking.
302 Driving
10/10/25 19:12:44 32TF0630_308
Towing a Trailer
Backing Up Parking Towing a Trailer

Always drive slowly and have Follow all normal precautions when On vehicles with automatic transmission
someone guide you when backing up. parking, including firmly setting the Your vehicle is not designed to tow a
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel, parking brake and putting the trailer.
then turn the wheel to the left to get transmission in 1st or reverse. Also,
the trailer to move to the left, and place wheel chocks at each of the
turn the wheel right to move the trailers tyres.
trailer to the right.
Driving 303
10/10/25 19:12:47 32TF0630_309
304
10/10/25 19:12:51 32TF0630_310
Maintenance
Regularly maintaining your vehicle is Maintenance Safety ....................... 306 Tyres ............................................... 361
the best way to protect your invest- Service Reminder System Checking the Battery .................... 368
ment. You will be rewarded with (For applicable countries) ........ 307 Replacing the Battery.................... 370
safer, more economical, trouble-free Maintenance Schedule Vehicle Storage .............................. 372
driving. This section lists items that (On vehicles without service
need to be checked regularly and reminder system) .................. 318
explains how to check them. It also Maintenance Schedule
details some simple maintenance (On vehicles without Service
tasks you can do yourself. The Book)....................................... 319
service reminder symbols and Maintenance Record ..................... 323
indications/maintenance schedules Owners Maintenance Checks ..... 325
show you when these things need to Fluid Locations............................... 326
be done. Adding Engine Oil ......................... 328
Engine Coolant ............................... 330
Windscreen Washers .................... 332
Transmission Fluid ........................ 333
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ............. 333
Manual Transmission ............... 335
Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 335
Air Cleaner Element ...................... 337
Fuel Filter ....................................... 338
Lights .............................................. 339
Air Conditioning System ............... 352
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 353
Wiper Blades .................................. 357
Maintenance 305
10/10/25 19:13:01 32TF0630_311
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this Injury from moving parts. Do
section should be performed by a not run the engine unless
certified technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so.
technician. vehicle or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you
To eliminate potential hazards, read can be seriously hurt or killed. Failure to properly follow
the instructions before you begin, maintenance instructions
and make sure you have the tools Always follow the inspection and precautions can cause
and skills required. and maintenance you to be seriously hurt or
Make sure your vehicle is parked recommendations and killed.
on level ground, the parking brake schedules in this owners
is set, and the engine is off. manual/Service Book. Always follow the
procedures and precautions
To clean parts, use a commercially in this owners manual.
available degreaser or parts Potential Vehicle Hazards
cleaner, not petrol. Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is Some of the most important safety
To reduce the possibility of fire or adequate ventilation whenever you precautions are given here. However,
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, operate the engine. we cannot warn you of every
and flames away from the battery conceivable hazard that can arise in
and all fuel-related parts. Burns from hot parts. Let the performing maintenance. Only you
engine and exhaust system cool can decide whether or not you
Wear eye protection and down before touching any parts. should perform a given task.
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
306 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:13:10 32TF0630_312
Service Reminder System (For applicable countries)
One of the most convenient and Service Reminder Flow on the Multi-Information Display
important features of the multi-
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
information display on your vehicle
is the service reminder system.
Warning Symbols (Amber)
Based on engine operating Near Service Service Service Timing
conditions and engine oil conditions, Timing Timing Over/Passed
the onboard computer in your
vehicle calculates the remaining
distance or time before the next
service to be performed.
The multi-information display shows

you that the service timing is near,
coming or passed. At each service
timing, the warning symbol or
symbol with a message (if selected)
comes on amber with the system : Press the SEL/RESET button.
message indicator ( ). Service Reminder Information Distance (km) is shown.
You can also see the service performed. The above illustration shows the
reminder information on the multi- service reminder display flow.
information display as the remaining The system also displays the code(s)
distance or time (counted by days). for scheduled service items.
This helps to keep you aware of the
timing for maintenance to be CONTINUED
Maintenance 307
10/10/25 19:13:20 32TF0630_313
If the service timing is passed, the

warning symbol with the negative
distance will be displayed. The
passed distance will be counted
down per kilometer (mile).
NOTE:
The displayed remaining distance
may not correspond to the actual
driving distance. The remaining
Mile indication Km indication distance is estimated by your vehicles
type type onboard computer depending on the DAY SYMBOL
driving conditions.
The remaining distance is shown in The remaining days are shown with
miles or kilometers, depending on the symbol .
types.
If the remaining days are more than
The remaining distance will be 30 days, the display will be changed
changed in increments of 50 in increments of 10 days. When the
kilometers (miles) until the remaining days are under 30 days,
warning symbol comes on the display will be counted down per
amber. After this warning symbol is day.
shown on the multi-information
display, the remaining distance will
be counted down per 10 kilometers
(miles).
308 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:13:28 32TF0630_314
The system switches the display In some countries, this service Service Reminder Information
between the remaining distance and reminder system is not available. In
the remaining days, depending on these countries, follow the
your driving conditions. If you do not maintenance schedule in the Service
drive frequently, generally the Book that came with your vehicle.
display shows the remaining time.
The system monitors the driving If you are planning to take your
conditions, and records the elapsed vehicle outside the applied countries,
time and distance from the last consult your dealer on how to record INFO
maintenance. Based on this data, the your service reminder information BUTTON
system assumes the future driving and schedule your maintenance
conditions and selects the service under the conditions of that SEL/RESET BUTTON
appropriate service reminder display. country. Please ask your dealer to On vehicles with cruise control
get the service schedules on your
The service reminder system is vehicle. To see the service reminder
available in some countries. To information displayed on the multi-
confirm the countries where this information display, turn the ignition
system is available, refer to the switch to the ON (II) position. Press
Service Book that came with your the SEL/RESET button on the
vehicle, or ask your dealer. steering wheel repeatedly until the
service reminder information
appears (see page 96 ).
CONTINUED
Maintenance 309
10/10/25 19:13:35 32TF0630_315
Service Items
All the service items displayed on the
INFO BUTTON SERVICE REMINDER INFORMATION multi-information display are in code
DISPLAY (A, B, 2 through 9). For an
explanation of the service reminder
codes, refer to the Service Book that
came with your vehicle.
SEL/RESET BUTTON REMAINING REMAINING

On vehicles without cruise control DISTANCE TIME
The remaining distance or time until

the next service timing is shown
along with the symbol .
The system also displays a service
item code to indicate the service
item(s) required at the next
maintenance service. If there are
several service items to be
performed, only the code of the
shortest interval will be displayed.
310 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:13:44 32TF0630_316
Required Service Timing Near This display reminds you that the When you switch the display, the
time is coming soon to take your warning symbol/message in amber
vehicle in for the required service. will be turned off, but you will see
WARNING SYMBOL the symbol/message each time you
SERVICE REMINDER INFORMATION turn the ignition switch to the ON
DISPLAY (II) position.
When any of the service items is

required in less than 30 days or the
total estimated driving distance Press the SEL/RESET button on the
corresponding to the terms of about steering wheel repeatedly to select
30 days, the multi-information the service reminder information.
display interrupts the current display The service reminder information
and shows the above symbol or the display shows all codes indicating
symbol with a SERVICE DUE the service items to be performed at
SOON message in amber. The the next service.
system message indicator ( )
also comes on as a reminder.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 311
10/10/25 19:13:52 32TF0630_317
Service Timing When you see this symbol or the When you switch the display, the
symbol with a message, have the warning symbol/message in amber
indicated service performed as soon will be turned off, but you will see
WARNING SYMBOL as possible. the symbol/message each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
SERVICE REMINDER INFORMATION (II) position.
DISPLAY
When any of the service items is

required in less than 10 days or total
estimated driving distance
corresponding to the terms of about Press the SEL/RESET button on the
10 days, the multi-information steering wheel repeatedly to select
display interrupts the current display the service reminder information.
and shows the above symbol or the The service reminder information
symbol with a SERVICE DUE display shows all codes indicating
NOW message in amber. The the service items to be performed at
system message indicator ( ) the next service.
also comes on as a reminder.
312 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:14:01 32TF0630_318
Service Timing Over/Passed distance or time. The system The warning symbol/message in
message indicator ( ) also amber is not turned off. You can
WARNING SYMBOL
comes on as a reminder. select another display by pressing
either the INFO button or the SEL/
SERVICE REMINDER INFORMATION RESET button. If you want to see the
DISPLAY symbol/message again, press the
INFO button repeatedly. The system
message indicator ( ) also
remains on as a reminder.
When the remaining distance or time

is 0, the multi-information display
shows 0. Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
If the indicated maintenance service the service reminder information.
is still not done after the remaining The service reminder information
time or distance reaches 0, the multi- display shows the negative distance
information display interrupts the or time, and all codes for the service
current display and shows the above items to be performed.
symbol or the symbol with a
SERVICE OVER DUE message in
amber, and the total negative CONTINUED
Maintenance 313
10/10/25 19:14:09 32TF0630_319
The warning symbol/message in Resetting the Service Reminder

amber, and the negative distance or The required service should be
time will come on every time you performed in accordance with the
turn the ignition switch to the ON standards and specifications of
(II) position. Honda by properly trained and
equipped technicians. Your
Negative distance or time means authorized dealer meets all of these
your vehicle has passed the service requirements.
required point. Immediately have the
service performed, and make sure to After completing the required
reset the service reminder. maintenance service, your dealer will
reset the display. When you press
and release the SEL/RESET button
repeatedly to select the service 1. Park the vehicle. Turn the ignition
reminder information display, you switch to the ON (II) position.
will see the next required service Do not try to drive your vehicle. If
item and the remaining distance or the vehicle speed reaches over 2
time on the display. km/h (1 mph), this mode is
cancelled.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the service reminder as
follows:
314 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:14:18 32TF0630_320
2. If the service reminder

information is not displayed, press MAINTENANCE ITEM(S) to be reset
and release the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel
repeatedly to select the service
reminder information display.
RESET
EXIT
3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET 4. Select (reset) by

button on the steering wheel for pressing the INFO button, then
more than 10 seconds. The service press the SEL/RESET button to
reminder reset mode will be reset the service reminder. The
shown on the multi-information displayed service item code(s) will
display. disappear, and the displayed
distance or time will also reset.
Only the displayed items will be
reset if you go to the next step.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 315
10/10/25 19:14:25 32TF0630_321
You will see the next main required Important Service Precautions However, service at a dealer is not
service item and the remaining If you have the required service mandatory to keep your warranties
distance or time on the multi- done but do not reset the display, or in effect. Service may be done by any
information display. reset the display without doing the qualified service facility or person
service, the system will not show the who is skilled in this type of
If you want to exit the service correct service intervals. This can automotive service. Make sure to
reminder reset mode without lead to serious mechanical problems have the service facility or person
changing anything, select because you will no longer have an reset the display as previously
(exit), then press the SEL/RESET accurate record of when service is described. Keep all receipts as proof
button. needed. of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out your
Your authorized Honda dealer maintenance service records. Check
knows your vehicle best and can your Service Book for more
provide competent, efficient service. information.
316 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:14:29 32TF0630_322
We recommend using genuine If your vehicles battery is

Honda parts and fluids whenever you disconnected or goes dead, the time
have maintenance service done. and distance calculation of the
These are manufactured to the same service reminder system is
high quality standards as the original suspended. This will cause the
components, so you can be confident service timing to be incorrect. In this
of their performance and durability. case, the calculation should be
updated by your dealer.
Maintenance 317
10/10/25 19:14:37 32TF0630_323
Maintenance Schedule (On vehicles without service reminder system)
If the service reminder system is not The maintenance schedule assumes We recommend the use of genuine
available in your vehicle, follow the you will use your vehicle as normal Honda parts and fluids or their
maintenance schedules in the transportation for passengers and equivalent whenever you have
Service Book that came with your their possessions. You should also maintenance done. These are the
vehicle. follow these recommendations: same high-quality items that went
into your vehicle when it was new, so
On vehicles without Service Book, Avoid exceeding your vehicles you can be sure they fit and perform
follow the maintenance schedules in load limit. This puts excess stress flawlessly.
this owners manual (see page 319 ). on the engine, brakes, and many
other vehicle parts.
The required maintenance schedule
specifies all maintenance required to Operate your vehicle on
keep your vehicle in peak operating reasonable roads within the legal
condition. Maintenance work should speed limit.
be performed in accordance with the
standards and specifications of Drive your vehicle regularly over a
Honda by properly trained and distance of several kilometers
equipped technicians. Your (miles).
authorized dealer meets all of these
requirements. Always use the recommended
petrol only (see page 258 ).
318 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:14:54 32TF0630_324
Maintenance Schedule (On vehicles without Service Book)

Service at the indicated distance km x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 This maintenance schedule
or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0 outlines the minimum required
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
maintenance that you should
Replace engine oil1 Normal Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 1 year
perform to ensure the trouble-
M A I N T E N A N C E
Severe2 Every 5,000 km (3,125 miles) or 6 months
Replace engine oil filter1 Normal free operation of your vehicle.
Severe2 Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months Due to regional and climatic
Replace air cleaner element Every 30,000 km (18,750 miles) differences, some additional
Inspect valve clearance Every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) servicing may be required.
Replace fuel filter3 Please consult your warranty
Replace spark plugs Iridium type Every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)
booklet for a more detailed
Inspect drive belt
Inspect idle speed
description.
Replace engine coolant 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years, then every
100,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years
1 : Only severe schedule is required in some countries: refer to the local warranty booklet that came with your vehicle.
2 : Refer to page 322 for replacement information under severe conditions.
3 : Refer to page 338 for replacement information under severe driving conditions.
S C H E D U L E
CONTINUED
Maintenance 319
10/10/25 19:15:08 32TF0630_325

Service at the indicated distance km x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
Replace transmission fluid M/T Normal Every 120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 6 years
S C H E D U L E
Severe
CVT
Inspect front and rear brakes Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter
Check expiry date for TRK bottle (if equipped)
Rotate tyres (Check tyre inflation and condition at Rotate tyres every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)
least once per month)
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months

Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluid
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
: Refer to page 322 for replacement information under severe conditions.
320 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:15:24 32TF0630_326
Maintenance Schedule (Russia)

Service at the indicated distance km x 1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180 This maintenance
or time whichever comes first. months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 schedule outlines the
Replace engine oil and oil filter Normal minimum required
Severe Every 7,500 km or 6 months
Replace air cleaner element
maintenance that you
Inspect valve clearance
should perform to
Replace fuel filter2 ensure the trouble-free
Replace spark plugs Iridium Every 120,000 km operation of your
Inspect drive belt vehicle. Due to regional
Inspect idle speed and climatic
Replace engine coolant At 200,000 km or 10 years, thereafter every 100,000 km or 5 years
differences, some
Replace transmission fluid M/T
CVT
additional servicing
Inspect front and rear brakes may be required.
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years Please consult your
Check parking brake adjustment warranty booklet for a
Replace dust and pollen filter1 more detailed
Check lights alignment description.
Test drive (noise, stability, dashboard operation)
S C H E D U L E
Check expiry date for TRK bottle (if equipped)
Inspect vehicle corrosion
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Tyre condition
1 : When you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air, under dusty conditions or the airflow
from the climate control system becomes less than usual. Replace the filter every 15,000 km or 1 year.
2 : Refer to page 322 for replacement information under driving conditions.
Maintenance 321
10/10/25 19:15:33 32TF0630_327
NOTE:
If you drive your vehicle under one or more of the following severe
conditions, the items described below must be serviced according to the
S C H E D U L E
maintenance schedule indicated as Severe.
Severe driving conditions:

A: Driving less than 8 km (5 miles) per trip, or in freezing temperatures
driving less than 16 km (10 miles) per trip.
B: Driving in extremely hot (over 35C) conditions.
C: Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving.
D:Towing trailer, driving with a loaded roof rack, or driving in mountainous
conditions.
E: Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.
Items Condition
Engine oil and oil filter A, B, C, D, E
Except Russia
Manual transmission B, D
fluid
322 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:15:40 32TF0630_328
Maintenance Record (On vehicles without Service Book)
Have your servicing dealer record all required maintenance below. Keep receipts for all work done on your vehicle.
20,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month 120,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month
12,500 Mi. 75,000 Mi.
(or 12 Mo.) (or 72 Mo.)
Date Date
25,000 Mi. 87,500 Mi.
(or 24 Mo.) (or 84 Mo.)
Date Date
37,500 Mi. 100,000 Mi.
(or 36 Mo.) (or 96 Mo.)
Date Date
50,000 Mi. 112,500 Mi.
(or 48 Mo.) (or 108 Mo.)
Date Date
62,500 Mi. 125,000 Mi.
(or 60 Mo.) (or 120 Mo.)
Date Date
Maintenance 323
10/10/25 19:15:46 32TF0630_329
Maintenance Record (Russia)
Have your servicing dealer record all required maintenance below. Keep receipts for all work done on your vehicle.
15,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km or Month 105,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km or Month

(or 12 Mo.) (or 84 Mo.)
Date Date

(or 24 Mo.) (or 96 Mo.)
Date Date

(or 36 Mo.) (or 108 Mo.)
Date Date

(or 48 Mo.) (or 120 Mo.)
Date Date

(or 60 Mo.) (or 132 Mo.)
Date Date

(or 72 Mo.) (or 144 Mo.)
Date Date
324 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:15:58 32TF0630_330
Owners Maintenance Checks
You should check the following Automatic transmission (CVT) Air conditioning system (on some
items at the use or specified intervals. Check the fluid level monthly. See types) Check its operation
page 333 . weekly. See page 352 .
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See Brakes and clutch Check the Windscreen demister Operate
page 261 . fluid level monthly. See page 335 . the heater and air conditioning
and check the demister vents
Engine coolant level Check the Brake pedal Check the brake monthly.
radiator reserve tank every time pedal for smooth operation.
you fill the fuel tank. See page 262 . Lights Check the operation of
Parking brake Check the the headlights, position lights, tail-
Windscreen washer fluid Check parking brake lever for smooth lights, high-mount brake light,
the level in the reservoir monthly. operation. turn signals, and licence plate
If weather conditions cause you to lights monthly. See page 339 .
use the washers frequently, check Tyres Check the tyre pressure
the reservoir each time you stop monthly. Examine the tread for Doors Check the tailgate and
for fuel. See page 332 . wear and foreign objects. See page all doors including the rear doors
361 . for smooth opening/closing and
Windscreen wipers Check the secure locking.
wiper condition monthly. If the Battery Check its condition and
wipers do not wipe the windscreen the terminals for corrosion Horn Check the horn operation.
securely, check them for wear, monthly. See page 368 .
cracks, and other damage.
Maintenance 325
10/10/25 19:16:03 32TF0630_331
Fluid Locations
Manual Transmission
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

CLUTCH FLUID
(Gray cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR RADIATOR CAP

(Orange handle)
1.2 engine model with left-hand drive is shown.
326 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:16:10 32TF0630_332
Fluid Locations
Automatic Transmission
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR RADIATOR CAP
(Orange handle)
Left-hand drive type is shown.
Maintenance 327
10/10/25 19:16:18 32TF0630_333
Adding Engine Oil
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and You can select the proper SAE/
tighten it securely. Let the engine ACEA viscosity oil for your vehicle
warm up and turn off the engine, let according to this chart:
it sit for approximately 3 minutes,
then check the oil level on the
engine oil dipstick. Do not fill above
the upper mark; you could damage
the engine.
Recommended Engine Oil

On vehicles with service reminder
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP system
Oil is a major contributor to your
Unscrew and remove the engine oil engines performance and longevity.
fill cap on top of the valve cover. Always use a premium-grade Ambient Temperature
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so detergent oil. It is highly
you do not spill any. Clean up any recommended that you use genuine 0W-20 oil is formulated to help your
spills immediately. Spilled oil could Honda Motor Oil, ACEA A3/B3, or engine use less fuel.
damage components in the engine ACEA A5/B5 in your vehicle for as
compartment. long as you own it.
This oil is formulated to help your

engine use less fuel.
328 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:16:27 32TF0630_334
Adding Engine Oil
On vehicles without service You can select the proper SAE/ Except for European models
reminder system ACEA viscosity oil for your vehicle You can select the proper SAE
Oil is a major contributor to your according to this chart: viscosity oil for your vehicle
engines performance and longevity. according to this chart:
Always use a premium-grade deter-
gent oil. It is highly recommended
that you use genuine Honda Motor
Oil in your vehicle for as long as you
own it.
On European models without service

reminder system, ACEA A1/B1,
ACEA A3/B3, or ACEA A5/B5
can also be used.
Ambient Temperature
Ambient Temperature
0W-20 oil is formulated to help your
engine use less fuel. 0W-30 oil is formulated to improve
fuel economy.
Maintenance 329
10/10/25 19:16:35 32TF0630_335
Adding Engine Oil, Engine Coolant
Always use an API service SL or Adding Engine Coolant The cooling system contains many
higher grade fuel-efficient oil. This aluminium components that can
oil is formulated to help your engine corrode if an improper antifreeze is
use less fuel. used. Some antifreeze, even though
labelled as safe for aluminium parts,
Engine Oil Additives may not provide adequate protection.
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely If the reserve tank is completely
affect your engines or transmissions empty, you should also check the
performance and durability. coolant level in the radiator.
RESERVE TANK
Removing the radiator cap
If the coolant level in the reserve while the engine is hot can
tank is at or below the MIN line, add cause the coolant to spray
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. out, seriously scalding you.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always let the engine and
Always use genuine Honda All radiator cool down before
Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. removing the radiator cap.
This coolant is pre-mixed with 50
percent antifreeze and 50 percent
distilled water. Never add straight
antifreeze or plain water.
330 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:16:44 32TF0630_336
Engine Coolant
3. Remove the radiator cap by

pushing down and turning
anticlockwise.
4. The coolant level should be up to

the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and

carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spills immediately; it
could damage components in the MAX
Fill up to here engine compartment. RESERVE TANK MIN
1. Make sure the engine and radiator 5. Put the radiator cap back on, and 6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
are cool. tighten it fully. Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling on the reserve tank.
system by turning the radiator cap
anticlockwise, without pressing Do not add any rust inhibitors or
down. other additives to your vehicles
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Maintenance 331
10/10/25 19:16:51 32TF0630_337
Windscreen Washers
Check the fluid level in the Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windscreen washer reservoir at least windscreen washer fluid. This
monthly during normal use. increases the cleaning capability and Do not use engine antifreeze or a
prevents freezing in cold weather. vinegar/water solution in the
LEVEL GAUGE windscreen washer reservoir.
When you refill the reservoir, clean Antifreeze can damage your vehicles
the edges of the windscreen wiper paint, while a vinegar/water solution
blades with windscreen washer fluid can damage the windscreen washer
on a clean cloth. This will help to pump. Use only commercially-
condition them. available windscreen washer fluid.
Check the fluid level by removing

the cap and looking at the level
gauge.
332 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:17:00 32TF0630_338
Transmission Fluid
Continuously Variable DIPSTICK

Transmission (CVT)
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.

Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut UPPER
MARK
off the engine. For accurate
LOWER
results, wait about 60 seconds (but MARK
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2. Left-hand drive type is shown.
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) 4. Remove the dipstick and check
from the transmission, and wipe it the fluid level. There is a HOT
with a clean cloth. side and a COLD side on the
dipstick. The fluid level should be
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into between the upper and lower
the transmission securely as marks on the HOT side.
shown in the illustration.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 333
10/10/25 19:17:09 32TF0630_339
Transmission Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower 6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
mark, add fluid into the dipstick into the transmission securely as
hole to bring it to the level Use only Honda CVTF (continuously shown in the illustration.
between the upper and lower variable transmission fluid). Do not
marks. mix with other transmission fluids. The transmission should be drained
Using transmission fluid other than and refilled with new fluid according
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so Honda CVTF (continuously variable to the service reminder indication.
you do not spill any. Clean up any transmission fluid) may cause On vehicles without service
spills immediately. Spilled fluid could deterioration in transmission reminder system, follow the
damage components in the engine operation and durability, and could maintenance schedule in the Service
compartment. result in damage to the transmission. Book that came with your vehicle.
Damage resulting from the use of
Always use Honda CVTF transmission fluid other than Honda On vehicles without the Service
(continuously variable transmission CVTF (continuously variable Book, follow the maintenance
fluid) or HMMF (Honda Multi Matic transmission fluid) is not covered by schedule in this owners manual.
fluid) in some countries. the Honda new vehicle warranty.
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your dealer.
334 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:17:19 32TF0630_340
Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid
Manual Transmission Brake and Clutch Fluid Always use genuine Honda Brake
The transmission should be drained Check the fluid level in the Fluid or an equivalent from a sealed
and refilled with new fluid according reservoirs monthly. There are up to container that is marked DOT3 or
to the service reminder indication. two reservoirs, depending on the DOT4 only. Brake fluid marked
On vehicles without service model. They are: DOT5 is not compatible with your
reminder system, follow the vehicles braking system.
maintenance schedule in the Service Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
Book that came with your vehicle. Clutch fluid reservoir
(manual transmission only)
On vehicles without the Service
Book, follow the maintenance You will also see the symbol ,
schedule in this owners manual. or this symbol with a BRAKE
FLUID LOW message on the multi-
Always use genuine Honda Manual information display when the brake
Transmission Fluid (MTF). If it is fluid level is low.
not available, you may use an API
service SJ or higher grade motor oil Replace the brake fluid according to
with a viscosity of SAE 10W-30 or the service reminder indication. On
10W-40 as a temporary replacement. vehicles without service reminder
However, motor oil does not contain system, follow the maintenance
the proper additives, and continued schedule in the Service Book that
use can cause stiffer shifting. came with your vehicle.
Replace as soon as it is convenient.
Book, follow the maintenance
schedule in this owners manual.
Maintenance 335
10/10/25 19:17:27 32TF0630_341
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Brake System Clutch System A low fluid level can indicate a leak
in the clutch system. Have this
MAX system inspected as soon as possible.
MAX
MIN Manual transmission MIN
The fluid level should be between The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or of the reservoir. If it is not, add
below the MIN mark, your brake brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
system needs attention. Have the Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system inspected for leaks or brake system.
worn brake pads.
336 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:17:36 32TF0630_342
Air Cleaner Element
The air cleaner element should be Replacement

replaced according to the service
reminder indication. On vehicles CLIPS
without service reminder system,
follow the maintenance schedule in
the Service Book that came with
your vehicle.

Book, follow the maintenance
schedule in this owners manual.
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
The air cleaner element is inside the 2. Remove the old air cleaner
air cleaner housing in the engine element.
compartment.
3. Carefully clean the inside of the
To replace it: air cleaner housing with a damp
rag.
1. Unsnap the four hold-down clips
and remove the air cleaner
housing cover.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 337
10/10/25 19:17:42 32TF0630_343
Air Cleaner Element, Fuel Filter
4. Place the new air cleaner element Fuel Filter It is recommended to replace the
in the air cleaner housing. The fuel filter should be replaced fuel filter every 40,000 km, or 2 years
according to the service reminder (except vehicles with Service Book)/
5. Reinstall the air cleaner housing indication. On vehicles without every 45,000 km, or 3 years (Russia
cover, and snap the four hold- service reminder system, follow the model), if the fuel you are using is
down clips back into place. Make maintenance schedule in the Service suspected to be contaminated. In a
sure they are securely latched. Book that came with your vehicle. high dust environment, the fuel filter
may become clogged sooner.
Book, follow the maintenance Have a qualified technician change
schedule in this owners manual. the fuel filter. Since the fuel system
is under pressure, fuel can spray out
and create a hazard if all fuel line
connections are not handled
correctly.
338 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:17:50 32TF0630_344
Lights
Check the operation of your vehicles

exterior lights at least once a month. SIDE TURN SIGNAL LIGHT1, 2 POSITION LIGHT
A burned out bulb can make the
condition of your vehicle unsafe
reducing your vehicles visibility and
the ability to signal your intentions to
other drivers.
SIDE TURN
SIGNAL LIGHT1
HEADLIGHT
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT1
1 : If equipped
2 : Replacement of these bulbs should be done by your dealer.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 339
10/10/25 19:18:02 32TF0630_345
Lights
Check the following:

STOP/TAIL-LIGHT1 HIGH-MOUNT
BRAKE LIGHT1 Headlights (low and high beam)
Position lights
Turn signals
Front fog lights (for some types)
Side turn signals
Stop/Tail-lights
Back-up lights
Rear fog light
Hazard light function
Licence plate lights
High-mount brake light
If you find any bulbs are burned out,

replace them as soon as possible.
Refer to the chart on page 437 to
REAR TURN determine what type of replacement
SIGNAL LIGHT bulb is needed.
REAR FOG LIGHT2 BACK-UP LIGHT LICENCE PLATE LIGHTS

Left-hand drive type is shown.
1 : Replacement of these bulbs should be done by your dealer.

2 : Rear fog light is installed on the drivers side only.
340 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:18:11 32TF0630_346
Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb

The headlights were properly aimed Your vehicle has halogen headlight TAB WEATHER SEAL
when your vehicle was new. If you bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
regularly carry heavy items in the it by its base, and protect the glass
luggage area or pull a trailer, from contact with your skin or hard
readjustment may be required. objects. If you touch the glass, clean
Adjustments should be done by your it with denatured alcohol and a clean
dealer or another qualified cloth.
technician.
The vertical angle of the headlights

can be adjusted. For more Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot CONNECTOR
information, see page 134 . when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a
scratch on the glass can cause the 1. Open the bonnet.
bulb to overheat and shatter.
2. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
3. Remove the rubber weather seal

by pulling on the tab.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 341
10/10/25 19:18:19 32TF0630_347
Lights
TAB HOLD-DOWN WIRE 7. Install the rubber weather seal

over the back of the headlight
assembly. Make sure it is right
side up.
SLOT
8. Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely. Turn on the
headlights to test the new bulb.
BULB HOLD-DOWN WIRE
4. Unclip the end of the hold-down 5. Install the new bulb into the hole,
wire from its slot. Pivot the wire making sure the tabs are in their
out of the way, then remove the slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
bulb. back in place, and clip the end into
the slot.
6. Make sure that the hold-down

wire is installed properly and
securely. You can check its
installation from the inspection
window on the headlight assembly.
342 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:18:29 32TF0630_348
Lights
Replacing a Front Turn Signal 4. Insert the socket back into the
Light Bulb headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
HOLDING CLIP
5. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
6. (Right side)
Put the windscreen washer
reservoir back in place. Install the
holding clip. Lock it in place by
pushing on the centre.
BULB SOCKET
1. Open the bonnet. 2. Remove the socket from the

headlight assembly by turning it
The front turn signal light is next one-quarter turn anticlockwise.
to the headlight bulb. When
replacing the right bulb, first 3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
remove the windscreen washer socket. Push the new bulb straight
reservoir. Use a flat-tip into the socket until it bottoms.
screwdriver to remove the holding
clip from the reservoir.
Maintenance 343
10/10/25 19:18:39 32TF0630_349
Lights
Replacing a Front Position Light 4. Insert the socket back into the Replacing Rear Bulbs
Bulb headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place. NOTCH
BULB
COVER
SOCKET
1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
1. Open the bonnet. the edge of the cover to prevent
scratches. Remove it by carefully
2. Remove the socket from the prying in the notch on its middle
headlight assembly by turning it edge with a small flat-tip
one-quarter turn anticlockwise. screwdriver.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its 2. Determine which of the three
socket. Push the new bulb straight bulbs is burned out: back-up light,
into the socket until it bottoms. turn signal light or rear fog light
(on the drivers side only).
344 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:18:50 32TF0630_350
Lights
5. Install the new bulb into the Replacing a Side Turn Signal Bulb
socket. (For some types)
Drivers side SOCKET
6. Turn on the lights to make sure SOCKET
7. Reinstall the socket into the light

assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
8. Reinstall the light assembly cover.
BULB BULB
3. Remove the socket by turning it

one-quarter turn anticlockwise. 1. Push the front of the side turn
signal assembly toward the rear of
4. Remove the burned out bulb by the vehicle until it pops out of the
pulling it straight out of its socket. body.
2. Turn the socket one-quarter turn

anticlockwise to remove it from
the lens.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 345
10/10/25 19:19:00 32TF0630_351
Lights
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its Replacing a Rear Licence Plate
socket. Push the new bulb straight Light Bulb
into the socket until it bottoms.
TAB
4. Put the socket back into its hole in SOCKET
the lens and turn it clockwise until
it locks.

6. Put the side turn signal assembly TAB

back into the body, rear first. Push BULB
on the front edge until it snaps into
place.
1. Push the rear licence light 2. Remove the licence light assembly
assembly toward the right and pull by squeezing the tabs on both
it out of the tailgate. sides of the socket.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its

socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
346 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:19:07 32TF0630_352
Lights
4. Turn on the position lights and Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb
check that the new bulb is (For some types)
working. Your vehicle uses halogen light Halogen light bulbs get very hot
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a
5. Put the licence light assembly it by its plastic case, and protect the scratch on the glass can cause the
back into the tailgate, the right glass from contact with your skin or bulb to overheat and shatter.
edge first. Push the assembly to hard objects. If you touch the glass,
the left until it stops. clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 347
10/10/25 19:19:17 32TF0630_353
Lights
FOG LIGHT COVER COVER BULB
SCREWS TAB
1. Put a cloth on the edge of the 3. To remove a front fog light 4. Remove the electrical connector
cover to prevent scratches. assembly, use a Phillips-head from the bulb by pushing on the
Remove the cover from the front screwdriver to remove the screws, tab and pulling the connector
bumper by using a flat-tip then carefully pull it out of the down.
screwdriver or some other flat tool. bumper.
5. Remove the bulb by turning it one-
2. To remove a front fog light cover, quarter turn anticlockwise.
use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the screw. Pull the screw
side of the fog light cover, then
carefully pull it out of the bumper.
348 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:19:27 32TF0630_354
Lights
6. Install the new bulb into the hole Replacing Bulbs in the Interior SPOTLIGHTS
and turn it one-quarter turn Lights
clockwise to lock it in place. The ceiling lights and spotlights (if
equipped) come apart the same way.
7. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on 1. Put a cloth on the edge of the lens
all the way. to prevent scratches, then remove BULB
the lens by carefully prying on the
8. Turn on the front fog lights to test edge of it with a fingernail file or a BULB
the new bulb. small flat-tip screwdriver. Do not
pry on the edge of the housing LENS
9. Reinstall the fog light assembly around the lens. On vehicles without sunshade
into the bumper and tighten the
screws securely. Spotlights:
Pry on the inner edge of both
10.Reinstall the fog light cover into spotlights.
the bumper while setting the tab
in the bracket. Tighten the screw
securely.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 349
10/10/25 19:19:36 32TF0630_355
Lights
REAR CEILING LIGHT Replacing the Luggage Area Light

Bulb
BULB
BULB
BULB
LENS LENS
Ceiling light: On vehicles without luggage area cover

Pry on the front edge of the lens
near both sides. 1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it Put a cloth on the rear edge of the
straight out of its metal tabs. light assembly to prevent
scratches. Remove the light
3. Push the new bulb into the metal assembly by using a small flat-tip
tabs. Snap the lens back in place. screwdriver to pry carefully on the
rear edge of the assembly.
350 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:19:44 32TF0630_356
Lights
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR PLASTIC COVER
BULB
On vehicles with luggage area cover BULB
2. Remove the electrical connector. For some types

Remove the plastic cover by
pivoting it upward.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out of its metal tabs.
4. Push the new bulb into the metal

tabs. Reinstall the electrical
connector and carefully snap the
lens back in place.
Maintenance 351
10/10/25 19:19:51 32TF0630_357
Air Conditioning System (For some types)
Your vehicles air conditioning is a If the air conditioning does not get as
sealed system. Any major cold as before, have your dealer
maintenance, such as recharging, check the system. Recharge the
should be done by a qualified system with Refrigerant HFC-134a
technician. You can do a couple of (R-134a).
things to make sure the air
conditioning works efficiently.
Periodically check the engines Whenever you have the air

radiator and air conditioning conditioning system serviced, make
condenser for leaves, insects, and sure the service facility uses a
dirt stuck to the front surface. These AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER refrigerant recycling system. This
block the air flow and reduce cooling system captures the refrigerant for
efficiency. Use a light spray from a Run the air conditioning at least once reuse. Releasing refrigerant into the
hose or a soft brush to remove them. a week during the cold weather atmosphere can damage the
months. Run it for at least 10 environment.
minutes while you are driving at a
steady speed with the engine at
The condenser and radiator fins normal operating temperature. This
bend easily. Only use a low-pressure circulates the lubricating oil con-
spray or soft-bristle brush to clean tained in the refrigerant.
them.
352 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:20:01 32TF0630_358
Dust and Pollen Filter
This filter removes the dust and The dust and pollen filter should be Replacement
pollen that is brought in from the replaced at short intervals if you For left-hand drive models
outside through the heating and drive primarily in urban areas that
TAB
cooling system/climate control have high concentrations of soot in
system. the air from industry and diesel-
powered vehicles. Replace it more
This filter should be replaced often if airflow from the heating and
according to the service reminder cooling system/climate control
indication (if applicable). On vehicles system becomes less than usual. Push
without service reminder system,
see the maintenance schedule in the
Service Book that came with your Push
vehicle.

Book, follow the maintenance The dust and pollen filter is located
schedule in this owners manual. behind the glove box.
To replace it:
1. Open the glove box.
2. Disengage the two tabs by

pushing on each side panel.
3. Pivot the glove box out of the way.

CONTINUED
Maintenance 353
10/10/25 19:20:10 32TF0630_359
7. Install the case. Make sure both

tabs click into place.
TAB DUST AND POLLEN FILTER 8. Pivot the glove box up into
position. Install the tabs back in
place.
9. Close the glove box.
If you are not sure how to replace

the dust and pollen filter, have it
replaced by your dealer.
TAB
4. Push in the tabs on the corners of 5. Remove the filter from the case.
the dust and pollen filter case. Pull
out the case. 6. Install the new filter in the case.
Make sure the arrows of the AIR
FLOW marks on the filter point
to the airflow direction
(downward).
354 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:20:22 32TF0630_360
Replacement
For right-hand drive models
TAB COVER
Push
Push
TABS DUST AND POLLEN FILTER
The dust and pollen filter is located 4. Push in the tabs on the corners of 5. Remove the filter from the case.
behind the glove box. the dust and pollen filter case and
To replace it: pull it out. 6. Install the new filter in the case.
Make sure the arrows of the AIR
1. Open the glove box. FLOW marks on the filter point
to the airflow direction
2. Disengage the two tabs by (downward).
pushing on each side panel.
3. Pivot the glove box out of the way.

CONTINUED
Maintenance 355
10/10/25 19:20:28 32TF0630_361
7. Install the cover. Make sure both If you are not sure how to replace
tabs click into place. the dust and pollen filter, have it
replaced by your dealer.
8. Pivot the glove box up into
position. Install the tabs back in
place.
9. Close the glove box.
356 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:20:35 32TF0630_362
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper

blades at least every six months. COVER
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
WIPER ARMS
To replace a front wiper blade: 2. Disconnect the blade assembly

from the wiper arm by pulling up
1. Raise the wiper arm off the the cover.
windscreen. Raise the drivers side
first, then the passengers side.
Do not open the bonnet when the

wiper arms are raised, or you will
damage the bonnet and the wiper
arms.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 357
10/10/25 19:20:43 32TF0630_363
Wiper Blades
WIPER ARM BLADE
WIPER BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
3. Push the blade assembly toward 4. Remove the blade from its holder 5. Examine the new wiper blades. If
the base of the arm. by grasping the tabbed end of the they have no plastic or metal
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs reinforcement along the back
Carefully pull out the blade come out of the holder. edge, remove the metal
assembly to prevent it from hitting reinforcement strips from the old
the windscreen. wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
When you install the

reinforcement, align the lug
portion on the blade and notch on
the reinforcement.
358 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:20:53 32TF0630_364
Wiper Blades
6. Slide the new wiper blade REAR

assembly into the holder along the
tabs on the holder.
7. Slide the wiper blade assembly

onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
8. Lower the wiper arm down against

the windscreen. Lower the
passengers side first, then the
drivers side.
To replace a rear wiper blade: 3. Pull one end of the blade out from
the holder.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window. 4. Slide the blade out of the holder.
2. Disconnect the blade assembly

from the wiper arm by pivoting the
blade assembly upward.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 359
10/10/25 19:21:00 32TF0630_365
Wiper Blades
8. Install the wiper blade assembly

BLADE onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
9. Lower the wiper arm against the

window.
REINFORCEMENT
5. Examine the new wiper blade. If it 6. Slide the new blade into the holder.
has no plastic or metal Make sure it is engaged in the slot
reinforcement along the back along its full length.
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old 7. Insert both ends of the blade into
wiper blade and install them in the the holder. Make sure they are
slots along the edge of the new secure.
blade.
360 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:21:10 32TF0630_366
Tyres
To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines Remember to check the spare tyre
tyres must be the proper type and Keeping the tyres properly inflated (if equipped) at the same time.
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of
tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding Check the air pressure when the
comfort. tyres are cold. This means the
The following pages give more vehicle has been parked for at least 3
detailed information on how to take Underinflated tyres wear unevenly, hours, or driven less than 1.6 km (1
care of your tyres and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel mile). Add or release air, if needed,
when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to to match the recommended cold tyre
fail from being overheated. pressures on the label on the drivers
doorjamb.
Overinflated tyres can make your
Using tyres that are vehicle ride more harshly, are If you check air pressure when the
excessively worn or more prone to damage from road tyres are hot [driven for several
improperly inflated can cause hazards, and wear unevenly. kilometers (miles)], you will see
a crash in which you can be readings 30 to 40 kPa (0.3 to 0.4
seriously hurt or killed. We recommend that you visually kgf/cm , 4 to 6 psi) higher than the
check your tyres every day. If you cold readings. This is normal. Do not
Follow all instructions in this think a tyre might be low, check it let air out to match the
owners manual regarding immediately with a tyre gauge. recommended cold air pressure. The
tyre inflation and tyre will be underinflated.
maintenance. Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tyre at least once a
month. Even tyres that are in good
condition may lose 10 to 20 kPa (0.1
to 0.2 kgf/cm , 1 to 2 psi) per month. CONTINUED
Maintenance 361
10/10/25 19:21:19 32TF0630_367
Tyres
You should get your own tyre Tyre Inspection TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
pressure gauge and use it whenever Every time you check inflation, you
you check your tyre pressures. This should also examine the tyres for
will make it easier for you to tell if a damage, foreign objects, and wear.
pressure loss is due to a tyre You should look for:
problem and not due to a variation
between gauges. Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tyre. Replace the tyre if
While tubeless tyres have some you find either of these conditions.
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
for punctures if a tyre starts losing of the tyre. Replace the tyre if you INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
pressure. can see fabric or cord.
Your tyres have wear indicators
For convenience, the recommended Excessive tread wear. moulded into the tread. When the
cold air pressures and tyre sizes are tread wears down, you will see a
on a label on the drivers doorjamb. band 12.7 mm (1/2 inch) wide across
the tread. This shows there is less
than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread left
on the tyre.
A tyre this worn gives very little

traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tyre if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
362 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:21:28 32TF0630_368
Tyres
Tyre Maintenance Tyre Rotation If you purchase directional tyres,

In addition to proper inflation, rotate only front-to-back.
correct wheel alignment helps to Front Front When the tyres are rotated, make
decrease tyre wear. If you find a tyre sure the air pressures are checked.
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tyres if

you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tyre should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tyres (For non-directional (For directional
installed, make sure they are Tyres and Wheels) Tyres and Wheels)
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tyre life. For best To help increase tyre life and
results, have the installer perform a distribute wear more evenly, rotate
dynamic balance. the tyres every 10,000 km (6,250
miles). Move the tyres to the
positions shown in the illustration
each time they are rotated. The
For vehicles equipped with aluminium above illustration shows how the
wheels: tyres should be rotated.
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicles aluminium wheels.
Use only genuine Honda wheel
weights for balancing.
Maintenance 363
10/10/25 19:21:36 32TF0630_369
Tyres
Replacing Tyres and Wheels It is best to replace all four tyres at

Replace your tyres with radial tyres the same time. If that is not possible
of the same size, load range, speed or necessary, replace the two front Installing improper tyres on
rating, and maximum cold tyre tyres or two rear tyres as a pair. your vehicle can affect
pressure rating (as shown on the Replacing just one tyre can seriously handling and stability. This
tyres sidewall). affect your vehicles handling. can cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or
Mixing radial and bias-ply tyres on If you ever replace a wheel, make killed.
your vehicle can reduce braking sure that the wheels specifications
ability, traction, and steering match those of the original wheels. Always use the size and type
accuracy. Using tyres of a different Consult your dealer before replacing of tyres recommended in the
size or construction can cause the tyres. tyre information label on
ABS to work inconsistently. your vehicle.
Replacement wheels are available at
The ABS works by comparing the your dealer.
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tyres, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tyre size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
work.
364 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:21:45 32TF0630_370
Tyres
Wheel and Tyre Specifications Winter Tyres Install the winter tyres according to
Wheels: Because of the limited winter the remarks in the registration paper.
15 x 5 1/2 J qualification of summer tyres for According to the EEC Directive for
16 x 6 J winter use we recommend the use of tyres, when winter tyres are used, it
winter tyres (MS tyres) on snowy is necessary to affix a sticker with
Tyres: and icy roads. If MS tyres are the allowable max. speed of the
175/65R15 84H installed, all four wheels should be winter tyres clearly in the field of
175/65R15 84T equipped to insure safe driving. Use view of the driver, if the designed
185/55R16 83H only tyres of the same brand with max. speed of vehicle is higher than
185/55R16 83T the same profile. Pay attention to the the allowed max. speed of winter
tyre size, load capacity and speed tyre. A sticker is obtainable from
The sizes of wheels and tyres class when buying. your tyre dealer. If any questions
installed on your vehicle vary arise, please discuss these with one
depending on models. of our dealers.
See the tyre information label on the

drivers doorjamb or ask your dealer
for information on the proper size of
the tyres on your vehicle.
Maintenance 365
10/10/25 19:21:50 32TF0630_371
Tyres
Tyre Chains When you have installed tyre chains,

Use snow chains only in an drive at less than 30 km/h (19 mph)
emergency or when they are legally on roads covered with snow or ice. Using the wrong chains, or
required for driving through a To minimize tyre and chain wear, not properly installing chains,
certain area. Install the snow chains avoid driving on cleared roads with can damage the brake lines
on the front wheels. Use greater chains installed. and cause a crash in which
caution when driving with snow you can be seriously injured
chains on snow or ice. They may or killed.
have less-predictable handling than
good winter tyres without chains. Follow all instructions in this
Some snow chains may damage the owners manual regarding
vehicles tyres, wheels, suspension, the selection and use of tyre
brake lines and body. Choose only chains.
fine limbed chains which guarantee
enough free space between the tyre
and the other vehicle parts in the
wheelhouse. Pay attention to the
sectional assembly view and other
directions from the chain
manufacturer. Consult your dealer
before purchasing any type of chains
for your vehicle.
366 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:21:56 32TF0630_372
Tyres
Use only the specified chains or their equivalents for your tyres as listed.
Original Tyre Size Chain Type
175/65R15 84H 48404 RUD-matic classic or equivalents

175/65R15 84T
185/55R16 83H 48479 RUD-matic classic or equivalents

185/55R16 83T
: Original tyre is mentioned on the tyre information label on the drivers

doorjamb.
Maintenance 367
10/10/25 19:22:03 32TF0630_373
Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW Check the terminals for corrosion (a If additional battery maintenance is
white or yellowish powder). To needed, see your dealer or a
remove it, cover the terminals with a qualified technician.
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When If you need to connect the battery to
this stops, wash it off with plain a charger, disconnect both cables to
water. Dry off the battery with a prevent damaging your vehicles
cloth or paper towel. Coat the electrical system. Always disconnect
terminals with grease to help prevent the negative () cable first, and
future corrosion. reconnect it last.
Check the condition of the battery

monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicators
colours.
The location of the test indicator

window varies between
manufacturers.
368 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:22:09 32TF0630_374
Checking the Battery
Emergency Procedures
The battery gives off The battery contains sulfuric Eyes Flush with water from a cup
explosive hydrogen gas acid (electrolyte) which is or other container for at least 15
during normal operation. A highly corrosive and minutes. (Water under pressure can
spark or open flame can poisonous. damage the eye.) Call a physician
cause the battery to explode immediately.
with enough force to kill or Getting electrolyte in your
seriously hurt you. eyes or on your skin can Skin Remove contaminated
cause serious burns. Wear clothing. Flush the skin with large
Keep all sparks, open flames, protective clothing and eye quantities of water. Call a physician
and smoking materials away protection when working on immediately.
from the battery. or near the battery.
Swallowing Drink water or milk.
Wear protective clothing and Swallowing electrolyte can Call a physician immediately.
a face shield, or have a skilled cause fatal poisoning if
technician do the battery immediate action is not
maintenance. taken.
KEEP OUT OF THE REACH OF

CHILDREN
CONTINUED
Maintenance 369
10/10/25 19:22:20 32TF0630_375
Checking the Battery, Replacing the Battery
For some types Replacing the Battery

If your vehicles battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio BATTERY BATTERY NEGATIVE
STAY BRACKET TERMINAL
system may disable itself. The next
time you turn on the radio, you will
see ENTER CODE in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the code (see page
232 ).
If your vehicles battery is

disconnected, or goes dead, the time
setting is lost. To reset the time, see POSITIVE TERMINAL COVER NUT POSITIVE TERMINAL
page 233 .
When you remove and replace the 3. Loosen the bolt on the negative
battery, always follow the battery cable, then disconnect the
maintenance instructions in cable from the negative ()
Maintenance Safety on page 306 and terminal.
the warnings in the Checking the
Battery section to prevent potential Always disconnect the negative
hazards. () cable first, and reconnect it
last.
1. Make sure the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (0) position.
2. Open the bonnet.
370 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:22:29 32TF0630_376
Replacing the Battery
4. Open the positive battery terminal To install a new battery, reverse this On vehicles with service reminder
cover. Loosen the bolt on the procedure. system
positive battery cable, then If you store your vehicle with the
disconnect the cable from the Make sure the battery bracket is battery disconnected, the time and
positive () terminal. positioned correctly as shown on the distance calculation of the service
previous page. reminder system should be updated
5. Loosen the nut on each side of the at your dealer (see page 317 ).
battery bracket with a wrench. This symbol on the battery
means that this product must
6. Pull the bottom end of each not be treated as household
battery stay out of the hole on the waste.
battery base, and remove the
combination of the battery bracket
and the stays.
An improperly disposed of battery
7. Take out the battery carefully. can be harmful to the environment
and human health.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Maintenance 371
10/10/25 19:22:39 32TF0630_377
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for If the vehicle is to be stored for a Cover the vehicle with a
an extended period (more than 1 longer period, it should be breathable cover, one made
month), there are several things you supported on jackstands so the from a porous material such as
should do to prepare it for storage. tyres are off the ground. cotton. Nonporous materials, such
Proper preparation helps prevent as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
deterioration and makes it easier to Leave one window open slightly (if which can damage the paint.
get your vehicle back on the road. If the vehicle is being stored
possible, store your vehicle indoors. indoors). If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
Fill the fuel tank. Disconnect the battery. operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
Wash and dry the exterior Support the front and rear wiper twice). Preferably, do this once a
completely. blade arms with a folded towel or month.
rag so they do not touch the
Clean the interior. Make sure the windscreen.
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry. To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
Leave the parking brake off. Put and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
the transmission in reverse vehicle body wax to the painted
(manual) or Park (automatic). surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
Block the rear wheels.
372 Maintenance
10/10/25 19:22:43 32TF0630_378
Vehicle Storage
On vehicles with service reminder On vehicles without service

system reminder system
After parking the vehicle for an If you store your vehicle for 1 year or
extended period with the battery longer, have your dealer perform the
disconnected, the time and maintenance inspections called for in
distance calculation of the service the 2 years/40,000 km (25,000 miles)
reminder system should be maintenance schedule as soon as you
updated. Take the vehicle to your take it out of storage (see the
dealer to have it checked. If not, Service Book that came with your
the service reminder system will vehicle, on vehicles without the
not show the proper intervals. Service Book, see the maintenance
schedule in this owners manual).
The replacements called for in the
maintenance schedule are not
needed unless the vehicle has
actually reached that time or
distance.
Maintenance 373
10/10/25 19:22:45 32TF0630_379
374
10/10/25 19:22:50 32TF0630_380
Appearance Care
Regular cleaning and polishing of Exterior Care.................................. 376

your vehicle helps to keep it new Washing ...................................... 376
looking. This section gives you Waxing ........................................ 377
information on how to clean your Aluminium Wheels .................... 377
vehicle and preserve its appearance: Roof Antenna ............................. 378
the paint, brightwork, wheels and Paint Touch-up ........................... 378
interior. Also included are several Interior Care ................................... 379
things you can do to help prevent Carpeting .................................... 379
corrosion. Floor Mats .................................. 379
Fabric .......................................... 380
Vinyl ............................................ 380
Leather ........................................ 380
Windows ..................................... 380
Seat Belts .................................... 381
Air Fresheners ........................... 381
Corrosion Protection ..................... 382
Appearance Care 375

10/10/25 19:22:59 32TF0630_381
Exterior Care
Washing Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with Check the body for road tar, tree
Frequent washing helps preserve cool water to remove loose dirt. sap, etc. Remove these stains with
your vehicles beauty. Dirt and grit tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it
can scratch the paint, while tree sap Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix off immediately so it does not
and bird droppings can permanently in a product made especially for harm the finish. Remember to re-
ruin the finish. car washing. wax these areas, even if the rest of
the vehicle does not need waxing.
Wash your vehicle in a shady area, Wash the vehicle using water and
not in direct sunlight. If the vehicle is detergent solution and a soft- When you have washed and rinsed
parked in the sun, move it into the bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth. the whole exterior, dry it with a
shade and let the exterior cool down Start at the top and work your way chamois or soft towel. Letting it
before you start. down. Rinse frequently. air-dry will cause dulling and water
spots.
Only use the solvents and cleaners
recommended in this owners As you dry the vehicle, inspect it for
manual. chips and scratches that could allow
corrosion to start. Repair them with
touch-up paint (see page 378 ).
Chemical solvents and strong

cleaners can damage the paint, metal,
and plastic on your vehicle.
376 Appearance Care

10/10/25 19:23:07 32TF0630_382
Exterior Care
Waxing Polishes Polishes and cleaner/ Aluminium Wheels

Always wash and dry the whole waxes can restore the shine to paint (For some types)
vehicle before waxing it. You should that has oxidized and lost some of its Clean your vehicles aluminium alloy
wax your vehicle, including the metal shine. They normally contain mild wheels as you do the rest of the
trim, whenever water sits on the abrasives and solvents that remove exterior. Wash them with the same
surface in large patches. It should the top layer of the finish. You solution, and rinse them thoroughly.
form into beads or droplets after should use a polish on your vehicle if
waxing. the finish does not have its original The wheels have a protective
shine after using a wax. clearcoat that keeps the aluminium
You should use a quality liquid or from corroding and tarnishing. Using
paste wax. Apply it according to the Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with harsh chemicals, including some
instructions on the container. In removers also takes off the wax. commercial wheel cleaners or stiff
general, there are two types of Remember to re-wax those areas, brushes, can damage this clear-coat.
products: even if the rest of the vehicle does Only use a mild detergent and soft
not need waxing. brush or sponge to clean the wheels.
Waxes A wax coats the finish and
protects it from damage by exposure
to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You
should use a wax on your vehicle
when it is new.
Appearance Care 377

10/10/25 19:23:13 32TF0630_383
Exterior Care
Roof Antenna Paint Touch-up

Your dealer has touch-up paint to
match your vehicles colour. The
colour code is printed on a plate on
the front doorjamb on the left side.
Take this code to your dealer so you
are sure to get the correct colour.
Inspect your vehicle frequently for

chips or scratches in the paint.
Repair them right away to prevent
corrosion of the metal underneath.
Use the touch-up paint only on small
chips and scratches. More extensive
paint damage should be repaired by
a professional.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
antenna at the rear of the roof.
Before using a drive-through car
wash, remove the antenna by
unscrewing it by hand. This prevents
the antenna from being damaged by
the car wash brushes.
Afterward, reinstall the antenna and

tighten it securely by hand.
378 Appearance Care

10/10/25 19:23:20 32TF0630_384
Interior Care
Carpeting Floor Mats If you remove the drivers floor mat,

Vacuum the carpeting frequently to make sure to re-anchor it when you
remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make put it back in your vehicle.
the carpet wear out faster.
Periodically shampoo the carpet to If you use non-Honda floor mats,
keep it looking new. Use one of the make sure they fit properly and that
foam-type carpet cleaners on the they can be used with the floor mat
market. Follow the instructions that anchors. Do not put additional floor
come with the cleaner, applying it mats on top of an anchored mat.
with a sponge or soft brush. Keep
the carpeting as dry as possible by
not adding water to the foam.
If equipped
The drivers floor mat that came
with your vehicle hooks over the
floor mat anchors. To lock each
anchor, turn the knob clockwise.
This keeps the floor mat from sliding
forward and possibly interfering with
the pedals.
When cleaning or replacing, turn the

knob anticlockwise to unhook the
floor mat.
Appearance Care 379

10/10/25 19:23:29 32TF0630_385
Interior Care
Fabric Leather Windows

Vacuum dirt and dust out of the (For some types) Clean the windows, inside and out,
material frequently. For general Vacuum dirt and dust from the with a commercially-available glass
cleaning, use a solution of mild soap leather frequently. Pay close cleaner. You can also use a mixture
and lukewarm water, letting it air dry. attention to the pleats and seams. of one part white vinegar to ten parts
To clean off stubborn spots, use a Clean the leather with a soft cloth water. This will remove the haze that
commercially-available fabric cleaner. dampened with a 90% water and 10% builds up on the inside of the
Test it on a hidden area of the fabric neutral wool detergent solution. windows. Use a soft cloth or paper
first, to make sure it does not bleach Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. towels to clean all glass and clear
or stain the fabric. Follow the Remove any dust or dirt on leather plastic surfaces.
instructions that come with the surfaces immediately.
cleaner.
Vinyl The rear window demister wires are

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum bonded to the inside of the glass.
cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft Wiping vigorously up-and-down can
cloth dampened in a solution of mild dislodge and break the demister
soap and water. Use the same wires. When cleaning the rear
solution with a soft-bristle brush on window, use gentle pressure and
more difficult spots. You can also use wipe side-to-side.
commercially-available spray or
foam-type vinyl cleaners.
380 Appearance Care

10/10/25 19:23:36 32TF0630_386
Interior Care
Seat Belts Dirt build-up around the openings of Air Fresheners

the seat belt anchors can cause the If you want to use an air freshener/
belts to retract slowly. Wipe the deodorizer in the interior of your
OPENING openings with a clean cloth vehicle, it is best to use a solid type.
dampened in mild soap and warm Some liquid air fresheners contain
water or isopropyl alcohol. chemicals that may cause parts of
the interior trim and fabric to crack
or discolour.
If you use a liquid air freshener,

make sure you fasten it securely so it
does not spill as you drive.
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft

brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
Appearance Care 381

10/10/25 19:23:44 32TF0630_387
Corrosion Protection
Two factors normally contribute to Many corrosion-preventive measures Use a high-pressure spray to clean
causing corrosion in your vehicle: are built into your vehicle. You can the underside of your vehicle. This
help keep your vehicle from is especially important in areas
1. Moisture trapped in body cavities. corroding by performing some that use road salt in winter. It is
Dirt and road salt that collects in simple periodic maintenance: also a good idea in humid climates
hollows on the underside of the and areas subject to salty air. Be
vehicle stays damp, promoting Repair chips and scratches in the careful of the ABS wheel sensors
corrosion in that area. paint as soon as you discover them. and wiring at each wheel.
2. Removal of paint and protective Inspect and clean out the drain Have the corrosion-preventive
coatings from the exterior and holes in the bottom of the doors coatings on the underside of your
underside of the vehicle. and body. vehicle inspected and repaired
periodically.
Check the floor coverings for
dampness. Carpeting and floor
mats may remain damp for a long
time, especially in winter. This
dampness can eventually cause
the floor panels to corrode.
382 Appearance Care

10/10/25 19:23:48 32TF0630_388
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tyre...................... 384

common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tyre .................... 385
experience with their vehicles. It Honda TRK .................................... 392
gives you information about how to If the Engine Wont Start .............. 407
safely evaluate the problem and what Jump Starting ................................. 409
to do to correct it. If the problem has If the Engine Overheats ............... 411
stranded you on the side of the road, Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 413
you may be able to get going again. Oil Level Indicator ......................... 414
If not, you will also find instructions Charging System Indicator........... 416
on getting your vehicle towed. Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 417
PGM-FI Warning ........................... 418
Brake System Indicator ................ 419
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually ..................................... 420
Fuses ............................................... 421
Fuse Locations .............................. 425
Emergency Towing ....................... 428
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ........... 430
Taking Care of the Unexpected 383

10/10/25 19:23:58 32TF0630_389
Compact Spare Tyre (For some types)
Use the compact spare tyre as a Do not use your compact spare INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get tyre on another vehicle unless it is
your regular tyre repaired or the same make and model.
replaced, and put it back on your
vehicle as soon as you can. Do not use more than one
compact spare tyre at the same
Check the air pressure of the time.
compact spare tyre every time you
check the other tyres. It should be The compact spare tyre is smaller
inflated to: than the regular tyre. Your
vehicles ground clearance
420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm , 60 psi) reduces when the compact spare TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
tyre is installed. Driving over road
Follow these precautions: debris or bumps could possibly Replace the tyre when you can see
damage the underside of your the tread wear indicator bars. The
Never exceed 80 km/h (50 mph). vehicle. replacement tyre should be the same
size and design, mounted on the
This tyre gives a harsher ride and same wheel. The spare tyre is not
less traction on some road designed to be mounted on a regular
surfaces. Use greater caution wheel, and the spare wheel is not
while driving. designed for mounting a regular tyre.
Do not mount snow chains on the

compact spare tyre.
384 Taking Care of the Unexpected

10/10/25 19:24:09 32TF0630_390
Changing a Flat Tyre
On vehicles with spare tyre

If you have a flat tyre while driving,
pull over safely. Drive slowly along Use the jack that came with your The vehicle can easily roll off
the shoulder until you get to an area vehicle. If you try to raise another the jack, seriously injuring
far away from traffic lanes. vehicle with this jack or use another anyone underneath.
jack to raise your vehicle, the vehicle
On vehicles with Honda TRK or jack can be damaged. Follow the directions for
Your vehicle is equipped with the changing a tyre exactly, and
tyre sealant kit instead of the spare Jack Label for EU models no person should place any
tyre. This kit is available for easy portion of their body under a
repair of a flat tyre (see page 392 ). 1. 2. 3. vehicle that is supported by a
jack.
1. See Owners Manual.
2. Never get under vehicle when

supported by jack.
3. Place jack underneath reinforced

area.
See page 437 for your jack type. CONTINUED

10/10/25 19:24:20 32TF0630_391
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and SPARE TYRE

non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park (automatic)
or reverse (manual). Apply the
parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch

the trailer. STRAP
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights, TOOL KIT
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all the BOX JACK
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tyre. 3. Open the tailgate. Raise the 6. Take the jack out of the luggage
luggage area floor by lifting up on area.
the strap. Turn the jacks end bracket
anticlockwise to loosen it, then
4. Take the box out of the spare tyre. remove the jack by lifting it
straight up.
5. Take the tool kit out of the box.
7. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tyre out of its well.
8. Place blocks in front and back of

the wheel diagonally opposite the
tyre you are changing.

10/10/25 19:24:30 32TF0630_392
WHEEL NUT
WHEEL COVER WHEEL NUT WRENCH JACKING POINTS
On some models 9. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn 10.Place the jack under the jacking
Before removing the wheel nuts, with the wheel nut wrench. point nearest the tyre you need to
remove the wheel cover from the change. Turn the end bracket
wheel with a flat-tip screwdriver. Put clockwise until the top of the jack
a cloth on the end of the wheel cover contacts the jacking point. Make
to prevent scratches, then pry it sure the jacking point tab is
carefully with a screwdriver. Do not resting in the jack notch.
attempt to forcibly pry the wheel
cover off. NOTE:
Do not use the jack if it doesnt work
To install a wheel cover, see page properly. Call your dealer or a
391 . professional towing service.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 19:24:38 32TF0630_393
BRAKE HUB
14.Put on the spare tyre. Put the
EXTENSION
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
15.Lower the vehicle to the ground,

and remove the jack.
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
11.Use the extension and the wheel 13. Before mounting the spare tyre,
nut wrench as shown to raise the wipe any dirt off the mounting
vehicle until the flat tyre is off the surface of the wheel and hub with
ground. a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
12.Remove the wheel nuts, then driving.
remove the flat tyre. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat
tyre on the ground with the
outside surface facing up.

10/10/25 19:24:48 32TF0630_394
WING BOLT
For For
normal compact
CENTRE CAP tyre spare tyre
16.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in 17.On some types, remove the centre 18. Place the flat tyre face down in the
the same crisscross pattern. Have cap before storing the flat tyre in spare tyre well.
the wheel nut torque checked at the spare tyre well.
the nearest automotive service 19.Remove the spacer cone from the
facility. wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
108 Nm (11 kgfm , 80 lbfft) 20.Secure the flat tyre by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Store the box in the wheel of the
flat tyre.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 19:24:54 32TF0630_395
21.Store the jack in its holder. Turn

the jacks end bracket clockwise to
lock it in place. Store the tool kit. Loose items can fly around
Replace the cover. the interior in a crash and
could seriously injure the
Store the wheel cover or centre occupants.
cap in the luggage area. Make
sure it does not get scratched or Store the wheel, jack, and
damaged. tools securely before driving.
22.Close the tailgate.

10/10/25 19:25:02 32TF0630_396
Installing a wheel cover

(On some models)
VALVE MARK TYRE VALVE
CLIPS CLIPS WIRE SUPPORT RING
1. Make sure the wire support ring is 2. Align the valve mark on the wheel 3. Make sure the wire support ring is
hooked into the clips around the cover to the tyre valve on the on the outer side of the tyre valve
edge of the wheel cover. wheel, then install the wheel cover. as shown.

10/10/25 19:25:17 32TF0630_397
Honda TRK (For some types)
On vehicles with Honda TRK To remind you of the instructions for 1. Expired best before date of the
Your vehicle is not equipped with a using the tyre sealant kit, the tyre sealant.
spare tyre. Instead, your vehicle has handling manual is included in the
the tyre sealant kit (Honda TRK: kit. Symbols on the 2. Cuts or piercing in the tyre tread
temporary repair kit of TERRA-S ). handling manual are to remind you larger than approximately 4 mm
This kit is available only for easy to read this owners manual for using (3/16ths of an inch).
repair of a flat tyre. the tyre sealant kit.
3. Cuts in the tyre side wall.
When using the tyre sealant kit, Read the handling manual well and
always follow the instructions and use it correctly. 4. Tyre damage caused by driving
the procedure in this owners manual. with considerably reduced tyre
Small punctures in the tyre tread, pressure or even with deflated
You should check the usable period caused by a nail or a screw, can be tyres.
of the tyre sealant according to the sealed with the temporary repair kit.
service reminder indication. 5. A tyre bead completely unseated
outside or inside of rim.
If the service reminder system is not
available on your vehicle, refer to the The tyre sealant kit cannot be used 6. A rim damaged.
maintenance schedule in the Service in the following cases.
Book that came with your vehicle, or Inform your dealer or a Roadside 7. 2 or more tyres punctured.
the maintenance schedule in this Assistance Service.
owners manual (on vehicles without Have your vehicle towed (see
Service Book). Emergency Towing on page 428 ).
If your vehicle has a compact spare
tyre, see page 385 for how to replace
a flat tyre.

10/10/25 19:25:27 32TF0630_398
HOOK
Instructions for Use
Honda TRK
1. If you have a flat tyre while driving,
stop in a safe place. Make sure to
park the vehicle on firm, level and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in neutral and set the
parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch

the trailer.
SIDE COVER STRAP Honda TRK 2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
Open the tailgate. Remove the side On some models LOCK (0) position.
cover by pulling its handle. Take the Open the tailgate. Raise the luggage
Honda TRK out of the rear right side area floor by lifting up on the strap. 3. Examine the tyre for a puncture or
compartment. Take the Honda TRK out of the other damage thoroughly.
luggage area.
To keep the luggage area floor out of

the way, attach the hook to the
tailgate sill.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 19:25:34 32TF0630_399
4. If the damage is smaller than 4

(B)
mm (3/16ths of an inch) and
(A) CAP
within the tyre tread, proceed with
the following instructions.
Aluminium
(A)
5. Have all the passengers get out of Sealed
the vehicle while you repair a flat
tyre temporarily.
If you drive a vehicle after

repair without extracting a
nail or a screw, it may cause 6. Shake the bottle (A). Screw the
air leakage again or damage filler hose (B) onto the bottle (A),
the inside and burst a tyre. If thereby piercing the seal of
you have to drive, drive aluminium.
carefully, especially around
corners.

10/10/25 19:25:44 32TF0630_400
(D)
Contains ethylene glycol. If sealant adheres to clothes, it may

not be possible to remove. Be careful
Harmful if swallowed. not to spill any.
Swallow plenty of water
and seek medical advice Safety Label on the Sealant Bottle
immediately. To remind you of the information for
repairing a flat tyre with this sealant
Irritating to eyes. Rinse kit, the labels are attached on the
immediately with plenty of sealant bottle. Read the instructions (E)
water and seek medical carefully. Symbols on the (C)
advice. label are to remind you to read the
Honda TRK section for using the 7. Unscrew the valve cap (D) from
Keep locked up and out of tyre sealant kit. the tyre valve (C). Deflate the tyre
the reach of children. completely pushing the valve
If you have any questions about the insert using the back of the valve
If you shake the bottle after tyre sealant kit, please contact your remover (E).
connecting the hose with dealer.
the bottle, it may spill
sealant. Shake bottle well
before connecting hose.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 19:25:50 32TF0630_401
(C) A valve insert can jump out, if

air remains in tyre. Be careful
in removing valve insert.
(C)
(E)
(F) FILLER HOSE
Unscrew the valve insert (F) using 8. Screw the filler hose onto the tyre
the valve remover (E). Do not place valve (C).
the valve insert (F) in sand or dirt.

10/10/25 19:25:59 32TF0630_402
VALVE CAP FILLER HOSE
(C)
(E)
(C) VALVE REMOVER

(F)
Hold the filling bottle with the filler 9. Pull off the filler hose and firmly Insert the end of the valve remover
hose downwards and compress. screw the valve insert (F) into the into the opening of the filler hose.
Squeeze the complete contents into tyre valve (C) using the valve
the tyre. remover (E).
Reinstall the valve cap.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 19:26:05 32TF0630_403
(H)
Do not affix a sticker on the
steering wheel. The SRS air
bag may not function.
Do not affix it in the position

where it prevents the driver
from seeing the warning
indicators or speedometer.
(G)
Affix the Tyre Sealant in the tyre Affix the Maximum Speed sticker
sticker (G) on the wheel. (H) within the drivers range of
vision on the display.

10/10/25 19:26:11 32TF0630_404
(M) AIR PRESSURE GAUGE

(K)
(J)
If the required air pressure is
not reached within 10
minutes, the tyre may be
severely damaged.
OFF
The Tyre Sealant Kit cannot
provide the necessary seal.
ON Inform a Honda Dealer or
POWER PLUG
Roadside Assistant Service.
AIR COMPRESSOR SWITCH (L) (C)
10.Screw the inflation hose (J) to the Turn the ignition switch to the
tyre valve (C). Fit the plug to the ACCESSORY (I) position. Turn on
socket (K) of the accessory power the air compressor (L).
socket in the front console panel. Inflate the tyre to the required air
pressure (M). Do not inflate the tyre
for more than 10 minutes.
If overinflated, deflate air by
loosening the screw of the hose.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 19:26:17 32TF0630_405
Operate the electric inflation pump

for not longer than 15 minutes. It can
cause overheating.
11.Continue the journey immediately.

Drive carefully within the speed of
80 km/h (50 mph). If you drive at a speed of more than
80 km/h (50 mph), your vehicle may
vibrate and will not drive safely.

10/10/25 19:26:26 32TF0630_406
12.After 10 minutes or 5 km (3 miles)

running, check the tyre pressure
with the air compressor pressure In the following cases, do not Have the tyre replaced at the
gauge. Note that the air pressure drive on. nearest Honda dealer. To repair
must be checked with the air Inform a Honda dealer or a the sealed tyre, consult your
compressor turned off. If the tyre Roadside Assistance Service. dealer.
pressure is kept, the tyre puncture
is sealed. Continue to drive The tyre pressure has A wheel can be reused after
carefully to the nearest Honda dropped below 130 kPa (1.3 wiping sealant with cloth, but the
dealer or a Roadside Assistance bar, 19 psi). valve must be replaced.
Service.
The tyre pressure has still Dispose of the used bottle at a
13.If the required air pressure has dropped after steps 10 and Honda dealer.
dropped, inflate the tyre to the 11.
required air pressure and repeat
from step 10.
If the puncture hole cannot be
detected, the tyre repair shop cannot
repair the sealed tyre. When you
continue running, check tyre
pressure often and if tyre pressure
decreases, have the sealed tyre
repaired at a Honda dealer.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 19:26:33 32TF0630_407
Instructions for Labels on the Air Symbols on the label are

Compressor to remind you to read the Honda
TRK section for using the tyre Do not touch the air
sealant kit. compressor with hands
without protective clothing.
Because it may be extremely
hot while operating.
Do not run the engine in
enclosed areas, or when the Never use the air compressor
vehicle is supported by the for 15 minutes or longer.
jack. When reusing, make sure the
compressor is cool to the
touch.
Do not use the air

To remind you of the information for compressor for any other
repairing a flat tyre with this sealant purpose than inflating your
kit, the labels are attached on the air tyres.
compressor. The following shows
you the instructions for these labels.

10/10/25 19:26:41 32TF0630_408
NOTE: Directions
The power supply of the air Before using the air compressor,
compressor is limited to your drive your vehicle to the road Turn off the switch on the air
vehicles 12 volt DC accessory socket. shoulder and stop in a safe place that compressor before checking the air
is far away from the traffic lanes. pressure.
Step 1. Step 4.
Remove the valve cap from a flat When the tyre is inflated to
tyre and securely connect the air specified air pressure, disconnect
compressor hose to the valve. the power plug from the cigarette
lighter socket. Make sure not to
Step 2. allow air to leak from the tyre.
Connect the power plug of the air Then install and tighten the valve
compressor to the socket of the cap securely.
cigarette lighter.
Step 3.
Turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) position. Turn on
the air compressor switch and
inflate the tyre to the specified air
pressure. Check the tyre pressure
by using the air pressure gauge on
the compressor.

10/10/25 19:26:49 32TF0630_409
Sealant Extraction
(For a Honda dealer)
Be careful not to spill sealant from a Be careful not to cut a hand
tyre. or a finger.
Be careful not to damage the tyre or

the wheel.
1. Remove the tyre and wheel from

the vehicle.
Deflate tyre pressure.
2. Cut the valve off with a knife.

10/10/25 19:26:56 32TF0630_410
Recycling sealant is important for

protecting environmental resources.
Please cooperate in collecting used
sealant.
3. Insert the hose through the valve 6. Bend the hose and tie it with the
hole into the tyre. strap or tape, then insert the valve
The hose should enter the sealant remover into the opening of the
as deeply as possible. hose, so that sealant does not leak.
Dispose of the bottle at your
4. Squeeze the bottle and draw out dealer when you replace it with a
the sealant. new bottle.
(It is better to stand a tyre on a
table.)
5. Repeat step 4 until the sealant

cannot be drawn out.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 19:27:03 32TF0630_411
Sealant Label
SEAL The sealant contains

ethylene glycol.
Swallowing the sealant can

cause fatal poisoning. Drink
with large quantities of water.
Call a physician immediately.
Getting the sealant in your

eyes or on your skin can
cause serious injury. Flush
with large quantities of water
To remind you of the information for thoroughly. Call a physician
extracting the used sealant, this seal immediately.
is attached on the wheel. It also
shows you the tyre has been Keep out of the reach of
repaired by the tyre sealant kit. The children.
following shows you the instructions
on this seal. Make sure to keep the
sealant enclosed in the bottle.
Symbols on the seal are
to remind you to read this owners
manual for extracting the used
sealant.

10/10/25 19:27:12 32TF0630_412
If the Engine Wont Start
Diagnosing why the engine wont Nothing Happens or the Starter Turn the ignition switch to the
start falls into two areas, depending Motor Operates Very Slowly START (III) position. If the
on what you hear when you turn the When you turn the ignition switch to headlights do not dim, check the
ignition switch to the START (III) the START (III) position, you do not condition of the fuses. If the fuses
position: hear the normal noise of the engine are OK, there is probably
trying to start. You may hear a something wrong with the
You hear nothing, or almost clicking sound, a series of clicks, or electrical circuit for the ignition
nothing. The engines starter nothing at all. switch or starter motor. You will
motor does not operate at all, or Check these things: need a qualified technician to
operates very slowly. determine the problem. See
Check the transmission interlock. Emergency Towing on page 428 .
You can hear the starter motor With an automatic transmission, it
operating normally, or the starter must be in Park or neutral, or the
motor sounds like it is spinning starter will not operate.
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 409 .
CONTINUED

10/10/25 19:27:21 32TF0630_413
If the Engine Wont Start
If the headlights dim noticeably or The Starter Operates Normally Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
go out when you try to start the In this case, the starter motors gauge; the low fuel indicator may
engine, either the battery is speed sounds normal, or even faster not be working.
discharged or the connections are than normal, when you turn the
corroded. Check the condition of the ignition switch to the START (III) There may be an electrical
battery and terminal connections position, but the engine does not run. problem, such as no power to the
(see page 368 ). You can then try fuel pump. Check all the fuses
jump starting the vehicle from a Are you using the proper starting (see page 421 ).
booster battery (see page 409 ). procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 273 . The fuel cutoff switch may be
activated. If the switch is activated,
Are you using a properly coded it must be reset before starting the
key? An improperly coded key will engine (see page 263 ).
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel If you find nothing wrong, you will
to blink rapidly (see page 138 ). need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 428 .

10/10/25 19:27:31 32TF0630_414
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple To jump start your vehicle:

procedure, you should take several
precautions. 1. Open the bonnet, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
A battery can explode if you seems slushy or frozen, do not try
do not follow the correct jump starting until it thaws.
procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, If a battery sits in extreme cold, the BOOSTER BATTERY
and smoking materials away electrolyte inside can freeze.
from the battery. Attempting to jump start with a The numbers in the illustration show
frozen battery can cause it to rupture. you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
You cannot start your vehicle with an 2. Turn off all the electrical
automatic transmission by pushing accessories: heater, A/C, climate 3. Connect one jumper cable to the
or pulling it. control, audio system, lights, etc. positive () terminal on your
Put the transmission in neutral battery. Connect the other end to
(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set the the positive () terminal on the
parking brake. booster battery.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 19:27:37 32TF0630_415
Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another Keep the ends of the jumper

vehicle, have an assistant start cables away from each other and
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle. any metal on the vehicle until
everything is disconnected.
6. Start the vehicle. If the starter Otherwise, you may cause an
motor still operates slowly, check electrical short.
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
7. Once the vehicle is running,

disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
4. Connect the second jumper cable positive cable from your vehicle,
to the negative () terminal on and then from the booster battery.
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.

10/10/25 19:27:46 32TF0630_416
If the Engine Overheats
The high temperature indicator 2. If you see steam and/or spray

should be off under most conditions. coming from under the bonnet,
If the engine coolant temperature Driving with the high temperature turn off the engine. Wait until you
gets higher than normal, the indicator on can cause serious see no more signs of steam or
indicator will blink. If it stays on, you damage to your engine. spray, then open the bonnet.
should determine the reason (hot
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.). 3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
You will also see the symbol , Steam and spray from an check the high temperature
or this symbol with an ENGINE overheated engine can indicator. If the high heat is due to
TEMP. HIGH message on the seriously scald you. overloading, the engine should
multi-information display. start to cool down almost
Do not open the bonnet if immediately. If it does, wait until
If the vehicle overheats, you should steam is coming out. the high temperature indicator
take immediate action. The only goes off, then continue driving.
indication may be the high
temperature indicator blinking or 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. 4. If the high temperature indicator
remaining on. Or you may see steam Put the transmission in neutral stays on, turn off the engine.
or spray coming from under the (M/T) or Park (A/T), and set the
bonnet. parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 19:27:55 32TF0630_417
If the Engine Overheats
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, proper coolant mixture available,
such as a split radiator hose. you can add plain water.
Everything is still extremely hot, Removing the radiator cap Remember to have the cooling
so use caution. If you find a leak, it while the engine is hot can system drained and refilled with
must be repaired before you cause the coolant to spray the proper mixture as soon as you
continue driving (see Emergency out, seriously scalding you. can.
Towing on page 428 ).
Always let the engine and 10.Put the radiator cap back on
6. If you dont find an obvious leak, radiator cool down before tightly. Run the engine, and check
check the coolant level in the removing the radiator cap. the high temperature indicator. If
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant it begins to blink or comes on
if the level is below the MIN mark. again, the engine needs repair
8. Using gloves or a large heavy (see Emergency Towing on page
7. If there was no coolant in the cloth, turn the radiator cap 428 ).
reserve tank, you may need to add anticlockwise, without pushing
coolant to the radiator. Let the down, to the first stop. After the 11.If the temperature stays normal,
engine cool down until the high pressure releases, push down on check the coolant level in the
temperature indicator goes off the cap, and turn it until it comes radiator reserve tank. If it has
before checking the radiator. off. gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
9. Start the engine, and set the tightly.
temperature to maximum heat
(climate control to AUTO at
). Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the

10/10/25 19:28:03 32TF0630_418
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
This indicator should come 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the

on when the ignition switch level back to between the upper
is in the ON (II) position, and go out Running the engine with low oil and lower mark on the dipstick.
after the engine starts. It should pressure can cause serious
never come on when the engine is mechanical damage almost 4. Start the engine, and watch the oil
running. If it starts flashing or stays immediately. Turn off the engine as pressure indicator. If it does not go
on, the oil pressure has dropped very soon as you can safely get the out within 10 seconds, turn off the
low or lost pressure. Serious engine vehicle stopped. engine. There is a mechanical
damage is possible and you should problem that needs to be repaired
take immediate action. 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut before you can continue driving
off the engine. Turn on the hazard (see Emergency Towing on page
You will also see the symbol , warning lights. 428 ).
or this symbol with an OIL
PRESSURE LOW message on the 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
multi-information display. Open the bonnet, and check the oil
level (see page 260 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
manoeuvres.

10/10/25 19:28:11 32TF0630_419
Oil Level Indicator
If this symbol comes on, safely pull The oil level symbol/message
OIL LEVEL INDICATOR off the road, park the vehicle on level display can be reset each time you
ground, turn off the engine and let turn off the engine. When you start
the vehicle sit for approximately 3 your trip again, the system begins to
minutes. monitor the engine oil level. It may
take a while until the system senses
Check the oil level. If the engine oil the engine oil level is low and the
level is near or below the lower mark symbol, or the symbol with a
on the dipstick, you should add the message appear on the multi-
engine oil (see page 328 ). information display. You should
check the engine oil level and add
Do not fill above the upper mark on engine oil before driving again if the
the dipstick and do not spill the oil level symbol, or the symbol with a
Your vehicle has an engine oil level engine oil in the engine compartment. CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL
sensor to check the oil level. If the This could damage the engine and message comes on.
symbol for the oil level other components.
indicator comes on in the multi-
information display when the engine If you do not carry spare engine oil in
is running, the engine oil level is low. your vehicle, drive moderately to the
You will also hear a beep when this nearest service area and add engine
symbol comes on. If you select the oil. Avoid full-throttle acceleration
warning symbol with the message(s) and driving at high speed.
in the customizing settings, you will
see this symbol with a CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL message on
the multi-information display.

10/10/25 19:28:18 32TF0630_420
Oil Level Indicator
Oil Level Sensor Failure
If you ignore the oil level symbol/

message and keep driving with this
symbol/message on, you can
seriously damage the engine.
This system activates after the

engine warms up. If the outside
temperature is extremely low, you
may have to drive for a long time
until the system senses the engine
oil level.
If the symbol , or this symbol

with a CHECK SYSTEM message
appears on the multi-information
display when the engine is running,
there is a system problem in the
engine oil level sensor. You will also
hear a beep. Have your dealer
inspect your vehicle as soon as
possible.

10/10/25 19:28:23 32TF0630_421
Charging System Indicator
This indicator should come Immediately turn off all electrical

on when the ignition switch accessories. Try not to use other
is in the ON (II) position, and go out electrically operated controls such as
after the engine starts. If the the power windows. Keep the engine
charging system indicator comes on running; starting the engine will
brightly when the engine is running, discharge the battery rapidly.
the battery is not being charged.
Go to a dealer or a service station
You will also see the symbol , where you can get technical
or this symbol with a CHECK assistance.
SYSTEM message on the multi-
information display.

10/10/25 19:28:31 32TF0630_422
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This indicator comes on, If this indicator comes on, safely pull
then goes out when you off the road and turn off the engine.
turn the ignition switch to the ON Restart the engine and watch the If you keep driving with the
(II) position. If the indicator comes indicator. If it stays on, have your malfunction indicator lamp on, you
on while driving, it means one of the vehicle checked by the dealer as can damage your vehicles emissions
engines emissions control systems soon as possible. Drive moderately controls and engine. Those repairs
may have a problem. Even though until the dealer has inspected the may not be covered by your vehicles
you may feel no difference in your problem. Avoid full-throttle warranties.
vehicles performance, it can reduce acceleration and driving at high
your fuel economy and cause speed. If your vehicle has an automatic
increased emissions. Continued transmission, the malfunction
operation may cause serious damage. You should also have the dealer indicator lamp may also come on
inspect your vehicle if the indicator with the D indicator.
You will also see the symbol , comes on frequently, even though it
or this symbol with a CHECK goes off when you follow the above If you turn the ignition switch to the
SYSTEM message on the multi- procedure. ON (II) position, without starting the
information display. engine, the malfunction indicator
lamp will come on for about 20
seconds. It then goes off or blinks 5
times under various conditions. This
is normal: it shows the self-testing
condition of the diagnostics for the
emissions control systems.

10/10/25 19:28:37 32TF0630_423
PGM-FI Warning
If this symbol or the symbol with a

message is displayed, safely pull off
the road and turn off the engine. If you keep driving with the symbol
Restart and turn off the engine at PGM-FI on, you can damage your
least three times at intervals of vehicles emissions controls and
approximately 30 seconds, then engine. Those repairs may not be
watch the multi-information display. covered by your vehicles warranties.
If it appears again, have your vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as This symbol or the symbol with a
possible. Drive moderately until the message may also appear if you do
dealer has inspected the problem. not use the proper fuel for the
Avoid full-throttle acceleration and climate or regional conditions. This
driving at high speed. may cause the engine power to
If you see this symbol or this symbol reduce (see page 258 ).
with a CHECK SYSTEM message You should also have the dealer
on the multi-information display inspect your vehicle if this symbol
while the engine running, there is a PGM-FI appears on the multi-
problem with the engine control information display frequently, even
system. Continued operation may though it goes off when you follow
cause serious damage. the above procedure.

10/10/25 19:28:47 32TF0630_424
Brake System Indicator
The brake system indicator You will also see the symbol , You will also see the symbol ,
normally comes on when or this symbol with a BRAKE or this symbol with a CHECK
you turn the ignition switch to the FLUID LOW message on the multi- SYSTEM message on the multi-
ON (II) position, and as a reminder information display. information display if there is a
to check the parking brake. It will problem with the brake system or
stay on if you do not fully release the However, if the brake pedal does not the front-to-rear braking distribution
parking brake. feel normal, you should take system.
immediate action. A problem in one
You will also see the symbol , part of the systems dual circuit If you must drive the vehicle a short
or this symbol with a RELEASE design will still give you braking at distance in this condition, drive
PARKING BRAKE message on the two wheels. You will feel the brake slowly and carefully.
multi-information display. pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and If the ABS indicator comes on with
If the brake system indicator comes you will have to press harder on the the brake system indicator, have
on while driving, the brake fluid level pedal. your vehicle inspected by your
is probably low. Press lightly on the dealer immediately.
brake pedal to see if it feels normal. Slow down by shifting to a lower
If it does, check the brake fluid level gear, and pull to the side of the road
the next time you stop at a service when it is safe. Because of the long
station (see page 335 ). distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
If the fluid level is low, take your should have it towed, and repaired as
vehicle to a dealer, and have the soon as possible (see Emergency
brake system inspected for leaks or Towing on page 428 ).
worn brake pads.

10/10/25 19:28:53 32TF0630_425
Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually
If there is a problem with the power

door lock system and you cannot
unlock the drivers door, use the
release lever behind the left side
cover in the luggage area.
COVER
Models with luggage area cover

is shown.
1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on 2. To open the fuel fill door, pull the
the edge of the cover to prevent release lever rearward.
scratches. Remove it by carefully
prying in the notch on its middle
edge with a small flat-tip
screwdriver.

10/10/25 19:29:01 32TF0630_426
Fuses
The vehicles fuses are located in INTERIOR UNDER-BONNET

two fuse boxes. (On Battery)
Push
FUSE LABEL
COVER
The fuse label is attached to the side The under-bonnet fuse is on the
panel. positive terminal of the battery. To
The interior fuse box is under the open it, push the tabs as shown.
dashboard on the drivers side. To
access the fuse box, pull the cover
toward you.

10/10/25 19:29:10 32TF0630_427
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses FUSE

If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
425 427 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid or the fuse label, which
fuse or fuses control that component.
Check those fuses first, but check all
the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is not the cause. Replace
any blown fuses and check if the BLOWN BLOWN
device works.
3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check each of the large fuses in
1. Turn the ignition switch to the the under-bonnet fuse box by the interior fuse box by looking at
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the looking through the top at the wire the wire inside. Removing these
headlights and all other inside. fuses requires a Phillips-head
accessories are off. screwdriver.
Replacement of these fuses should
2. Remove the cover from the fuse be done by your dealer.
box.

10/10/25 19:29:17 32TF0630_428
Fuses
FUSE If you cannot drive the vehicle

without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket).
If you replace the blown fuse with a

spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
FUSE PULLER BLOWN might blow out again. This does not
indicate that anything is wrong.
5. Check the smaller fuses in the 6. Look for a blown wire inside the Replace the fuse with one of the
interior fuse box by pulling out fuse. If it is blown, replace it with correct rating as soon as you can.
each one with the fuse puller one of the spare fuses of the same
provided in the interior fuse box. rating or lower.
CONTINUED

10/10/25 19:29:21 32TF0630_429
Fuses
On vehicles with audio system

When the audio system is disabled,
Replacing a fuse with one that has a the clock setting in the audio system
higher rating greatly increases the will be cancelled. You will need to
chances of damaging the electrical reset the clock according to the
system. If you do not have a instructions in the audio system
replacement fuse with the proper section in this owners manual.
rating for the circuit, install one with
a lower rating.
7. If the replacement fuse of the

same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.

10/10/25 19:29:29 32TF0630_430
Fuse Locations
UNDER-BONNET FUSE BOX The locations of fuses are shown

with symbols on the fuse label. Refer
to the table below for the fuses on
your vehicle.
Replacement of these fuses should

be done by your dealer.
No. Circuits Protected
1 ACG
2 EPS
3 Horn, Stop
FUSE BOX LABEL
CONTINUED

10/10/25 19:29:35 32TF0630_431
Fuse Locations
The fuses contained in the interior fuse box vary slightly depending on models. The locations of fuses are shown with
symbols on the fuse label.
INTERIOR FUSE BOX FUSE BOX LABEL
On vehicles with heated door mirror On vehicles without heated door mirror

10/10/25 19:29:42 32TF0630_432
Fuse Locations
Refer to the table on this page for No. Circuits Protected No. Circuits Protected
the fuses on your vehicle. 21 Washer Motor 44 STS
22 Meter 45 Super Locking
No. Circuits Protected 23 Hazard 46 Sunshade
1 Back Up 24 Horn, Stop 47 Condenser Fan
2 Rear Fog Light 25 Not Used 48 Left Headlight High
3 Drivers Power Window 26 LAF 49 Door Lock Motor 2 (Unlock)
4 Not Used 27 Door Lock (Main) 50 Door Lock Motor 1 (Unlock)
5 Back-up Light 28 Not Used 51 Right Headlight High
6 SRS 29 Small Light 52 DBW
7 MISS SOL 30 Radiator Fan 53 Not Used
8 Not Used 31 Oil Level Sensor 54 Rear Demister 2
9 Front Fog Light 32 Right Headlight Low 55 Heated Door Mirror
10 Heater, Air Conditioning 33 Ignition Coil 56 Front Wiper
11 ABS 34 Left Headlight Low 57 Heater
12 ACG 35 Door Lock Motor 2 (Lock) 58 ABS Motor
13 Accessory Power Socket 36 Door Lock Motor 1 (Lock) 59 Rear Demister 1
14 ACC 37 ABS FSR/VSA FSR 60 Not Used
15 DAY LT 38 Not Used Ignition
16 Rear Wiper 39 IGP 61 ST MG
17 Front Passengers Power Window 40 Heated Seat 62 Starter Cut
18 Rear Right Power Window 41 Daytime Running Lights
19 Rear Left Power Window 42 Not Used : For some types
20 Fuel Pump 43 MG Clutch

10/10/25 19:29:54 32TF0630_433
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, Sling-type Equipment The tow Automatic transmission:
call a professional towing service or truck uses metal cables with hooks Start the engine.
organization. Never tow your vehicle on the ends. These hooks go around Shift to the D position and hold for
with just a rope or chain. It is very parts of the frame or suspension and 5 seconds, then to N.
dangerous. the cables lift that end of the vehicle Turn off the engine.
off the ground. Your vehicles Leave the ignition switch in the
There are three popular types of suspension and body can be ACCESSORY (I) position so the
professional towing equipment. seriously damaged. This method of steering wheel does not lock.
towing is unacceptable. Release the parking brake.
Flat-bed Equipment The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a If, due to damage, your vehicle must
truck. This is the best way to be towed with the front wheels on
transport your vehicle. the ground, do the following:
Wheel-lift Equipment The tow Manual transmission:

truck uses two pivoting arms that go Shift the transmission to neutral.
under the front tyres and lift them Leave the ignition switch in the
off the ground. The other two rear ACCESSORY (I) position so the
tyres remain on the ground. This is steering wheel does not lock.
an acceptable way to tow your Release the parking brake.
vehicle.

10/10/25 19:30:01 32TF0630_434
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle is equipped with a If you decide to tow your vehicle

front spoiler, remove it before with all four wheels on the ground,
Improper towing preparation will towing so it is not damaged. make sure you use a properly-
damage the transmission. Follow the designed and attached tow bar.
above procedure exactly. If you Prepare the vehicle for towing as
cannot shift the transmission or start described above, and leave the
the engine (automatic transmission), Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
your vehicle must be transported the bumpers will cause serious (I) position so the steering wheel
with the front wheels off the ground. damage. The bumpers are not does not lock. Make sure the radio
designed to support the vehicles and any electrical accessories are
With the front wheels on the ground, weight. turned off so they do not run down
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther the battery.
than 80 km (50 miles), and keep the
speed below 55 km/h (35 mph).
The steering system can be

damaged if the steering wheel is
locked. Leave the ignition switch in
the ACCESSORY (I) position, and
make sure the steering wheel turns
freely before you begin towing.

10/10/25 19:30:09 32TF0630_435
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand, COVER FRONT TOWING HOOK

mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see page 428 ).
For very short distances, such as

freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on either anchor in the front or rear
bumper.
To use the towing hook: 3. Screw the towing hook into the
bolt hole behind the bumper, then
1. Take the towing hook and the tighten the hook securely with the
extension out of the tool kit in the extension.
luggage area.
2. Put a cloth on the edge of the

cover to prevent scratches. To avoid damage to your vehicle, use
Remove the cover from the front the towing hook for straight, flat
bumper by using the flat-tip end of ground towing only. Do not tow at an
the extension. angle. The tow hook should not be
used to tow the vehicle onto a flat
bed. Do not use it as a tie down.

10/10/25 19:30:13 32TF0630_436
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 432

you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 434
your vehicle, and the locations of the Three Way Catalytic
identification numbers. Converters .................................. 438
Technical Information 431

10/10/25 19:30:20 32TF0630_437
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers located in various places.
1. The chassis number is stamped on

the fire wall.
2. The engine number is stamped

into the engine block.
ENGINE NUMBER
3. The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Do not mistake the transmission AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

number for the engine number. NUMBER
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
NUMBER
432 Technical Information

10/10/25 19:30:27 32TF0630_438
Identification Numbers
The vehicle identification number

(VIN) or the chassis number is VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
moulded on the fire wall in the
engine compartment. To access this
number, slide the lid on the back of
the engine compartment. Make sure
to close this lid before closing the
bonnet.
The certification plate is attached to

the doorjamb on the left side.
The Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN) appears on a plate fastened to LID
the top of the dashboard.
CERTIFICATION PLATE
CHASSIS NUMBER/VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

10/10/25 19:30:43 32TF0630_439
Specifications
Dimensions The mounting point/rear over

Length 3,900 mm (153.5 in) hang of coupling device No. Dimensions
Width 1,695 mm (66.7 in) (1) (1) 529 mm (20.8 in)
Height 1,525 mm (60.0 in) (2) 433 mm (17.0 in)
(2)
1,655 mm (65.2 in)1 (3) 361 mm (14.2 in)
Wheelbase 2,495 mm (98.2 in) (3) (4) 495 mm (19.5 in)
Track Front 1,495 mm (58.9 in)2 (5) 485 mm (19.1 in)
1,480 mm (58.3 in)3 (6) 478 mm (18.8 in)
Rear 1,475 mm (58.1 in)2 (7) 537 mm (21.1 in)
(6) (5) (4)
1,460 mm (57.5 in)3 (8) 488 mm (19.2 in)
(9) 485 mm (19.1 in)
(9) (8) (7)
1 : With Roof Antenna (10) 129 mm (5.1 in)
2 : For tyre type 175/65R15 84H, 175/65R15 84T (11) 361 mm (14.2 in)
3 : For tyre type 185/55R16 83H, 185/55R16 83T (12) 432 mm (17.0 in)
(10) (13) 744 mm (29.3 in)
(11) : The value is at unladen weight

(12) condition.
(13)
NOTE:
1. marks show towbar fixing points.
2. mark shows towbar coupling point.

10/10/25 19:31:01 32TF0630_440
Specifications
Weights Engine
Curb weight Type Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC
Manual transmission i-VTEC in line, 4-cylinder
1.2 engine 1,0471,070 kg (2,3082,359 lbs) gasoline engine
1.34 engine 1,0511,112 kg (2,3172,452 lbs) Bore x Stroke 1.2 engine 73 x 71.58 mm (2.87 x 2.82 in)
Automatic transmission 1,0791,140 kg (2,3792,513 lbs) 1.34 engine 73 x 80 mm (2.87 x 3.15 in)
Max. permissible weight1 Displacement 1.2 engine 1,198 cm (73.1 cu-in)
1.2 engine 1,580 kg (3,483 lbs) 1.34 engine 1,339 cm (82.0 cu-in)
1.34 engine M/T 1,610 kg (3,549 lbs) Compression 1.2 engine 10.8 : 1 5
CVT 1,535 kg (3,384 lbs) ratio 1.34 engine 10.5 : 1 6
Max. permissible axle weight1 Spark plug NGK: DIFR6D13
(Front) 1.2 engine 820 kg (1,808 lbs) NGK: DIFR6D13D7
1.34 engine M/T 830 kg (1,830 lbs)
CVT 840 kg (1,852 lbs) 3 : The maximum towing weight should be reduced if you tow a
(Rear) 1.2 engine 840 kg (1,852 lbs) trailer over 1,000 meters of elevation. For more information, see
1.34 engine M/T 860 kg (1,896 lbs) page 297 .
CVT 705 kg (1,554 lbs) 4 : If applicable
Max. towing weight2, 3, 4 5 : For engine type: L12B1, L12B2
Trailer with brakes 1,000 kg (2,205 lbs) 6 : For engine type: L13Z1, L13Z2
Trailer without brakes 450 kg (992 lbs) 7 : 1.2 LPG, 1.4 LPG only
The maximum permissible
vertical load on the coupling 95 kg (209 lbs)
device4
1 : See the plate attached to the drivers doorjamb or ask dealer for
information.
2 : The following is for Germany only.
The maximum trailer weight is valid for 12% slope. For an
increasing of the trailer weight you have to look in your vehicle
paper or ask your next dealer.

10/10/25 19:31:22 32TF0630_441
Specifications
Capacities Capacities
Fuel tank Approx. Manual transmission
42 (11.1 US gal , 9.2 Imp gal) fluid Change 1.5 (1.6 US qt , 1.3 Imp qt)
Engine coolant Total 1.6 (1.7 US qt , 1.4 Imp qt)
Manual transmission Automatic transmission
Change1 4.42 (1.168 US gal , 0.972 Imp gal) 2 fluid (CVTF) Change 2.8 (3.0 US qt , 2.5 Imp qt)
4.46 (1.178 US gal , 0.981 Imp gal) 3 Total 6.15 (6.50 US qt , 5.41 Imp qt)
4.58 (1.210 US gal , 1.008 Imp gal) 4 Windscreen washer 2.5 (2.6 US qt , 2.2 Imp qt)
Total 4.91 (1.297 US gal , 1.080 Imp gal) 2 reservoir
4.95 (1.308 US gal , 1.089 Imp gal) 3
5.07 (1.339 US gal , 1.115 Imp gal) 4 Tyres
Automatic transmission Size/Pressure See tyre information label on
Change1 4.54 (1.199 US gal , 0.999 Imp gal) 2 drivers doorjamb or ask dealer
4.48 (1.184 US gal , 0.986 Imp gal) 3 for information.
4.71 (1.244 US gal , 1.036 Imp gal) 4
Total 5.03 (1.329 US gal , 1.107 Imp gal) 2 Alignment
4.97 (1.313 US gal , 1.093 Imp gal) 3 Toe-in Front 0 3 mm (0 0.12 in)
5.20 (1.374 US gal , 1.144 Imp gal) 4 Rear in 2.5 2.5 mm (0.10 0.10 in)
Engine oil Change5 Camber Front 02 1
Including 3.6 (3.8 US qt , 3.2 Imp qt) Rear 1 1
filter Caster Front 342 1
Without 3.4 (3.6 US qt , 3.0 Imp qt)
filter Suspension
Total 4.2 (4.4 US qt , 3.7 Imp qt) Type Front Mcpherson Strut
1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the Rear Torsion beam axle
engine.
Reserve tank capacity: 0.44 (0.116 US gal , 0.097 Imp gal) Steering
2 : VIN numbers beginning JHM Type Rack and pinion, with electrical
3 : VIN numbers beginning LUC power assistance
4 : VIN numbers beginning SHH
5 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

10/10/25 19:31:48 32TF0630_442
Specifications
Clutch Honda TRK Air Compressor

Type Dry, single plate, diaphragm spring A weighted emission sound 80 5 dB (A)
pressure level
Brake A weighted sound power level 91.5 5 dB (A)
Type Power assisted
Front Ventilated disc Lights
Rear Solid disc Headlights 12 V 60/55 W
Parking Mechanical Front turn signal lights 12 V 21 W (Amber)
Front position lights 12 V 5 W
Battery Side turn signal lights (fender)2 12 V 5 W
Capacity 12 V 28 AH/5 HR Side turn signal lights LED type3
12 V 35 AH/20 HR (door mirror)2
12 V 32 AH/5 HR 1 Rear turn signal lights 12 V 21 W (Amber)
12 V 40 AH/20 HR 1 Stop/tail-lights LED type3
Back-up lights 12 V 16 W
Fuses Front fog lights2 12 V 55 W (H11)
Interior See page 426 or the fuse label Rear fog light 12 V 21 W
attached to the inside of the fuse Licence plate lights 12 V 5 W
box door under the steering High-mount brake light LED type3
column. Spotlights2 12 V 8 W
Under-bonnet See page 425 or the fuse box Ceiling light Rear 12 V 8 W
cover. Luggage area light 12 V 5 W
Jack 2 : For some types

Type Honda Type-A or Type-D 3 : Replacement of a light bulb should be done by your dealer.
1 : For some types

10/10/25 19:31:53 32TF0630_443
Three Way Catalytic Converters
The three way catalytic converters Always use unleaded petrol. Even a
must operate at a high temperature small amount of leaded petrol can
for the chemical reactions to take contaminate the catalyst metals,
place. They can set on fire any making the three way catalytic
combustible materials that come converters ineffective.
near them. Park your vehicle away
from high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.

10/10/25 19:31:58 32TF0630_444
Index
A Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 27 Brightness Control,

Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 232 Instruments ................................ 132
AAC ................................................. 222 Bulb Replacement
Accessories and Modifications .... 265 B Back-up Lights ........................... 344
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Brake Lights............................... 344
Position) ...................................... 139 Battery Front Fog Lights........................ 347
Adding Engine Coolant ................. 330 Charging System Front Position Lights ................ 344
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 328 Indicator............................ 83, 416 Front Turn Signal Lights .......... 343
Airbag (SRS) .............................. 13, 30 Jump Starting ............................. 410 Headlights .................................. 341
Air Cleaner Element ...................... 337 Maintenance ............................... 368 High-mount Brake Light .......... 340
Air Conditioning System....... 185, 190 Replacing .................................... 370 Interior Lights ............................ 349
Maintenance ............................... 352 Specifications ............................. 437 Licence Plate Lights .................. 346
Usage .................................. 185, 190 Before Driving ............................... 257 Luggage Area Light .................. 350
Air Outlets (Vents) ........................ 182 Belts, Seat ................................... 11, 23 Rear Fog Light ........................... 344
Air Pressure, Tyres ....................... 361 Beverage Holders .......................... 171 Rear Turn Signal Lights ........... 344
Aluminium Wheels, Cleaning ...... 377 Bonnet, Opening the ..................... 260 Side Turn Signal Lights
Antenna ........................................... 378 Brakes (Fender).................................. 345
Antifreeze ....................................... 330 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 289 Specifications ............................. 437
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Break-in, New Linings .............. 258 Stop/tail-lights............................ 344
Indicator Lights ................... 84, 289 Bulb Replacement ..................... 344 Bulbs, Halogen ....................... 341, 347
Operation .................................... 289 Fluid ............................................ 335
Anti-theft Steering Column Parking ........................................ 168 C
Lock ............................................. 139 System Indicator .................. 84, 419
Appearance Care ........................... 375 Wear Indicators ......................... 288 Capacities Chart............................. 436
Audio System ................................. 195 Braking System.............................. 288
Automatic Intermittent Wipers.... 125 Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 258 CONTINUED
439
10/10/25 19:32:03 32TF0630_445
Index
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 73 Infants ........................................... 50 Coolant

Cargo Floor Box ............................ 178 Larger Children ........................... 69 Adding ......................................... 330
Carrying Luggage .......................... 267 Lower Anchorages ...................... 59 Checking ..................................... 262
Catalytic Converter ....................... 438 Risks with Airbags................. 44, 47 Proper Solution .......................... 330
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii Small Children.............................. 52 Temperature Indicators .............. 89
CD Care .......................................... 228 Tethers.......................................... 67 Cool Box.......................................... 171
CD Player........................................ 206 Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 44 Corrosion Protection ..................... 382
CD Player Error Messages .......... 212 Cleaner Element, Air ..................... 337 Cruise Control Indicator ................. 83
Ceiling Light ................................... 179 Cleaning Cruise Control Operation ............. 235
Certification Plate .......................... 433 Air Fresheners ........................... 381 Cup Holders.................................... 171
Chains, Tyres ................................. 366 Aluminium Wheels .................... 377 Customized Settings...................... 102
Changing a Flat Tyre .................... 385 Exterior ....................................... 376
Changing Oil Floor Mats .................................. 379 D
When to .............................. 307, 319 Interior ........................................ 379
Charging System Indicator .... 83, 416 Leather ........................................ 380 DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Chassis Number .................... 432, 433 Roof Antenna ............................. 378 Dashboard .................................... 2, 78
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 272 Seat Belts .................................... 381 Daytime Running Lights............... 129
Child Restraint Systems ........... 54, 56 Vinyl ............................................ 380 Dead Battery .................................. 409
Lower Anchorages ...................... 59 Windows ..................................... 380 Default Settings ..................... 102, 120
Tether Anchor Points ................. 67 Climate Control System ................ 190 Defrosting the Windows....... 188, 192
Child Restraint Systems for EU ..... 57 Clock ............................................... 233 Demister, Rear Window ............... 133
Child Safety ...................................... 43 Clutch Fluid .................................... 335 Detachable Anchor........................ 158
Booster Seats ............................... 70 Coat Hook ....................................... 174 Dimensions ..................................... 434
Child Restraint Systems ....... 54, 56 Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 273 Dimming the Headlights .............. 128
Important Safety Compact Spare Tyre...................... 384 Dipstick, Engine Oil ...................... 261
Reminders .......................... 43, 48 Controls, Instruments and .............. 77 Directional Signals......................... 128
440
10/10/25 19:32:08 32TF0630_446
Index
Disc Brake Pad Wear Fuel Fill Door, Starting........................................ 273

Indicators .................................... 288 Opening Manually ................. 420 Engine Coolant....................... 262, 330
Disc Player...................................... 206 Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 133 Engine Number.............................. 432
Doors Honda TRK ................................ 392 Error Indications
Locking and Unlocking ............. 140 Jump Starting ............................. 409 CD Player ................................... 212
Power Door Locks ..................... 140 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 413 iPod .............................................. 219
Super Locking ............................ 141 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 417 USB Flash Memory Device ...... 227
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 7 Oil Level Indicator ..................... 414 Event Data Recorders ....................... ii
Driving ............................................ 271 Overheated Engine ................... 411 Exhaust Fumes ................................ 73
Economy ..................................... 264 PGM-FI Warning ....................... 418 Exterior, Cleaning the ................... 376
In Bad Weather .......................... 294 Towing ........................................ 428
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 353 Tyre Sealant Kit ......................... 392 F
Emergency Brake .......................... 168
E Emergency Flashers ..................... 133 Fabric, Cleaning ............................. 380
Emergency Towing ....................... 428 Fan, Interior ........................... 185, 191
Economy, Fuel ............................... 264 Engine Features .......................................... 181
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Coolant Temperature Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 259
Indicator .................................... 86 Indicators .................................. 89 Filters
Symbol ........................................ 100 If It Wont Start .......................... 407 Air Cleaner ................................. 337
Emergencies................................... 383 Malfunction Indicator Dust and Pollen .......................... 353
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 409 Lamp ................................. 82, 417 Fuel .............................................. 338
Brake System Indicator ............ 419 Oil Level Indicator ..................... 414 Flashers, Hazard Warning............ 133
Changing a Flat Tyre ................ 385 Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 83, 413 Flat Tyre, Changing a ................... 385
Charging System Indicator ...... 416 Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 328 Flexible Luggage Board ............... 176
Checking the Fuses................... 421 Overheating................................ 411
Specifications ............................. 435 CONTINUED
441
10/10/25 19:32:14 32TF0630_447
Index
Floor Mats ...................................... 379 Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 89 Headlights

Fluids Octane Requirement ................. 258 Aiming ......................................... 341
Automatic Transmission Tank, Refueling ......................... 259 Automatic Lighting ................... 129
(CVT) ...................................... 333 Fuses, Checking the ...................... 421 Daytime Running Lights .......... 129
Brake ........................................... 335 High Beam Indicator ................... 88
Clutch .......................................... 335 G Lights On Indicator ..................... 88
Manual Transmission ............... 335 Low Beams, Turning on ........... 128
Windscreen Washers ................ 332 Gauges .............................................. 90 Reminder Beeper....................... 128
Folding Door Mirrors.................... 167 Fuel ................................................ 91 Replacing Halogen
Folding the Rear Seat Up.............. 155 Speedometer ................................ 91 Bulbs ............................... 341, 347
Folding the Rear Seats Down ...... 156 Tachometer .................................. 91 Turning on .................................. 128
Four-way Flashers ......................... 133 Gearshift Lever Positions Heated Mirrors .............................. 167
Front Seat ....................................... 149 Automatic Transmission Heaters, Seat .................................. 160
Adjusting..................................... 149 (CVT) ...................................... 277 Heating and Cooling ...................... 184
Airbags .................................... 13, 31 Manual Transmission ............... 274 High Altitude, Starting at .............. 273
Armrest ....................................... 150 Glass Cleaning ............................... 380 High-Low Beam Switch ................ 128
Heaters........................................ 160 Glove Box ....................................... 170 High-mount Brake Light............... 340
Front Airbags ............................. 13, 31 Honda TRK .................................... 392
Front Console Box......................... 173 H Horn ............................................ 3, 122
Front Fog Light ............................. 131 Hydraulic Clutch ............................ 335
Fuel .................................................. 259 Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 341
Cutoff System ............................ 263 Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) I
Economy ..................................... 264 System......................................... 238
Fill Door and Cap....................... 259 Hazard Warning Flashers............. 133 Identification Number, Vehicle.... 432
Filter ............................................ 338 Head Restraints ............................. 151
Gauge ............................................ 91 Headlight Adjuster ........................ 134
442
10/10/25 19:32:20 32TF0630_448
Index
Ignition Service Reminder ...................... 307 J

Keys............................................. 136 Shift Up/Down........................... 276
Switch .......................................... 139 SRS ................................................ 85 Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 385
Immobilizer System....................... 138 System Message .......................... 85 Jack, Tyre ....................................... 386
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 Turn Signal and Hazard Jump Starting ................................. 409
Indicators/Symbols ................. 82, 100 Warning .................................... 88
ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ........ 84, 289 VSA ........................................ 87, 291 K
Brake (Parking and Brake VSA Activation ..................... 87, 291
System) ............................. 84, 419 Indicator Lights, Instrument Keys ................................................. 136
Charging System ................. 83, 416 Panel .............................................. 80
Cruise Control .............................. 83 Infant Restraint ................................ 50 L
Door and Tailgate Open ............. 83 Passenger Front Airbag Off
EPS ................................................ 86 System....................................... 33 Label, Certification ........................ 433
High Beam.................................... 88 Infants Seats ..................................... 50 Lane Change, Signaling ................ 128
High Temperature ....................... 89 Lower Anchorages ...................... 59 Language Selection ....................... 118
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 83 Tether Anchor Points ................. 67 Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 18, 26
Lights On ...................................... 88 Inflation, Proper Tyre ................... 361 Leather, Cleaning .......................... 380
Low Fuel ....................................... 89 Inside Mirror .................................. 166 Lights
Low Oil Pressure ................. 83, 413 Inspection, Tyre ............................. 362 Bulb Replacement ..................... 341
Low Temperature ........................ 89 Instrument Panel ....................... 80, 81 Indicator ........................................ 88
Malfunction Indicator Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 132 Position ....................................... 128
Lamp ................................. 82, 417 Interior Cleaning ............................ 379 Turn Signal ................................. 128
Oil Level ...................................... 414 Interior Lights ................................ 179 Load Limits............................. 296, 435
Passenger Front Airbag Off ....... 41 Introduction ......................................... i LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ..... 139
PGM-FI ....................................... 418 iPod .................................................. 213
Seat Belt ........................................ 82 CONTINUED
443
10/10/25 19:32:26 32TF0630_449
Index
Locks Safety........................................... 306 Odometer .......................................... 96

Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 139 Schedule .............................. 318-322 Odometer, Trip ................................ 96
Door, Childproof ........................ 142 Service Reminder System......... 307 Oil
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 259 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 82, 417 Change, When to ....... 307, 318, 319
Power Door Locks ..................... 140 Manual Transmission.................... 274 Checking Engine ....................... 261
Super Locking ............................ 141 Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 335 Level Indicator ........................... 414
Tailgate ....................................... 147 Maximum Permissible Weight .... 435 Pressure Indicator ............... 83, 413
Low Coolant Level ......................... 262 Meters, Gauges.......................... 80, 90 Selecting Proper Viscosity
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 89 Mirrors ............................................ 166 Chart ....................................... 328
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 83, 413 Adjusting..................................... 166 ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 139
Lower Anchorages .......................... 59 Folding ........................................ 167 One-push Turn Signal ................... 128
Lower Gear, Heated ......................................... 167 Opening the Bonnet ...................... 260
Downshifting to a ...................... 274 Modifying Your Vehicle................ 266 Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Lower Glove Box ........................... 170 MP3 ......................................... 207, 221 Manually ..................................... 420
Lubricant Specifications Multi-Information Display .............. 92 Opening the Tailgate..................... 147
Chart ........................................... 436 Outside Mirrors ............................. 166
Luggage Area Cover ..................... 161 N Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 97
Luggage Hooks .............................. 270 Overheating, Engine ..................... 411
Luggage, How to Carry................. 268 Neutral (N) Position ...................... 279 Owners Maintenance Checks ..... 325
Luggage, Storing ........................... 267 New Vehicle Break-in ................... 258
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i P
M Numbers, Identification ........ 432, 433
Paddle Shifters ............................... 282
Maintenance ................................... 305 O Paint Touch-up ............................... 378
Owner Maintenance Checks.... 325 Panel Brightness Control ............. 132
Record ................................. 323, 324 Octane Requirement, Petrol......... 258 Parking ............................................ 287
444
10/10/25 19:32:31 32TF0630_450
Index
Parking Brake ................................ 168 Advice for Pregnant Women...... 21 Battery ........................................ 370
Parking Brake and Brake Protecting Children ......................... 43 Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 353
System Indicator .................. 84, 419 Protecting Infants ........................ 50 Fuel Filter ................................... 338
Parking Over Things That Protecting Larger Children ........ 69 Fuses ........................................... 421
Burn............................................. 287 Protecting Small Children .......... 52 Light Bulbs ................................. 339
Passenger Front Airbag Off Using Child Restraints with Schedule ............................. 318, 319
System....................................... 33 Tethers...................................... 67 Service Reminder System......... 307
Indicator ........................................ 41 Using Lower Anchorages ........... 59 Spark Plugs................................. 435
Petrol ............................................... 258 Tyres ........................................... 364
Filling the Fuel Tank ................. 259 R Wiper Blades .............................. 357
Filter ............................................ 338 Replacing Seat Belts After a
Fuel Economy ............................ 264 Radiator Overheating .................... 411 Crash ............................................. 28
Gauge ............................................ 91 RDS.................................................. 198 Reserve Tank, Engine
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 89 Rear Fog Light ....................... 130, 131 Coolant ................................ 262, 330
Octane Requirement ................. 258 Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 344 Restraint, Child ................................ 43
Refueling..................................... 259 Rear Seats, Folding ............... 155, 156 Reverse (R) Position ..................... 279
PGM-FI Warning ........................... 418 Rear View Mirror........................... 166 Roof Antenna ................................. 378
Polishing and Waxing ................... 377 Rear Window Demister ................ 133 Roof Rack ....................................... 269
Pollen Filter .................................... 353 Rear Window Wiper and Rotation, Tyre ................................ 363
Position Lights ............................... 128 Washer ........................................ 127
Power Door Locks ......................... 140 Reclining the Seat Backs .............. 149 S
Power Windows ............................. 162 Reminder Indicators ........................ 80
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 21 Remote Audio Controls................. 231 Safety Belts................................. 11, 26
Proper Seat Belt Usage ................... 18 Remote Transmitter ...................... 143
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 15 Replacement Information
Additional Safety Precautions .... 21 Air Cleaner Element .................. 337 CONTINUED
445
10/10/25 19:32:36 32TF0630_451
Index
Safety Features ................................ 10 Side Airbags ............................... 13, 38 How Your Front Airbags
Airbags .......................................... 13 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 38 Work.......................................... 31
Seat Belts ...................................... 11 Risks to Children ......................... 47 How Your Side Airbags
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 74 Side Curtain Airbags ................. 14, 39 Work.......................................... 38
Safety Messages ............................... iii Signaling Turns .............................. 128 SRS Components ......................... 30
Seat Belts .................................... 11, 26 Snow Tyres ..................................... 365 SRS Service................................... 41
Additional Information ................ 23 Solvent-type Cleaners .................... 376 SRS Indicator.............................. 40, 85
Automatic Seat Belt Sound System ................................. 195 START (Ignition Key Position) ... 139
Tensioners ................................ 27 Spare Tyre .............................. 384, 385 Starting the Engine........................ 273
Cleaning ...................................... 381 Compact ...................................... 384 In Cold Weather at High
Detachable Anchor.................... 158 Inflating ....................................... 385 Altitude ................................... 273
Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 18, 26 Specifications ............................. 436 With a Dead Battery ................. 409
Maintenance ................................. 28 Spark Plugs ..................................... 435 Steam Coming from Engine ......... 411
Reminder Indicator and Specifications Charts..................... 434 Steering Wheel
Beeper ................................. 23, 82 Speed Alarm ................................... 105 Adjustments ............................... 135
Replacement ................................. 28 Speedometer .................................... 91 Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 139
System Components.................... 23 Speed-sensitive Volume Stereo Sound System .................... 195
Use During Pregnancy................ 21 Compensation (SVC) ................ 205 Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 372
Seat Heaters ................................... 160 Spotlights ........................................ 179 Sunshade......................................... 164
Seat Under Box .............................. 173 SRS, Additional Information........... 30 Sun Visor......................................... 173
Seats, Adjusting the....................... 149 Additional Safety Precautions .... 42 Super Locking ................................ 141
Service Intervals ............ 307, 318, 319 Automatic Seat Belt Supplemental Restraint
Service Reminder System............. 307 Tensioners ................................ 27 System................................. 13, 30
Service Station Procedures .......... 259 How the SRS Indicator Servicing ....................................... 41
Setting the Clock ........................... 233 Works ........................................ 40 SRS Indicator.......................... 40, 85
Shift Up/Shift Down Indicator..... 276 System Components.................... 30
446
10/10/25 19:32:42 32TF0630_452
Index
System Message Indicator ............. 85 Trailer Hitch Mounting Points..... 434 Snow ............................................ 365
System Warning Symbols, Trailer Loading ...................... 296, 297 Specifications ..................... 365, 436
Multi-Information Trailer Towing Tips....................... 301 TRK (Temporary Repair Kit) .. 392
Display ............................ 100, 101 Transmission
Checking Fluid Level, U
T Automatic ............................... 333
Fluid Selection ................... 334, 335 Underside, Cleaning ...................... 382
Tachometer ...................................... 91 Identification Number ............... 432 Unexpected, Taking Care
Tailgate ........................................... 147 Shifting the Automatic .............. 277 of the ........................................... 383
Opening the ................................ 147 Shifting the Manual ................... 274 Upholstery Cleaning...................... 379
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 383 Treadwear ...................................... 362 Upper Glove Box............................ 170
Technical Descriptions Trip Computer ................................. 95 USB Adapter Cable ............... 215, 223
Three Way Catalytic Trip Meter ........................................ 96 USB Flash Memory Device .......... 220
Converter ................................ 438 Turn Signals ................................... 128
Temperature Indicators .................. 89 Tyre, How to Change a Flat ......... 385 V
Tether Anchor Points...................... 67 Tyres ............................................... 361
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 438 Air Pressure ............................... 361 Vanity Mirror ................................. 174
Time, Setting the ........................... 233 Balancing .................................... 363 Vehicle Capacity Load .......... 268, 435
Tools, Tyre Changing ................... 386 Chains ......................................... 366 Vehicle Dimensions....................... 434
Tonneau Cover............................... 161 Checking Wear .......................... 362 Vehicle Identification Number..... 433
Towing Compact Spare ........................... 384 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
A Trailer ...................................... 296 Inflation ....................................... 361 System......................................... 291
Emergency Wrecker ................. 428 Inspection ................................... 362 Vehicle Storage .............................. 372
Equipment and Accessories Maintenance ............................... 363 Ventilation .............................. 187, 192
Weight Limit .................. 296, 298 Replacing .................................... 364
Towing Hook .............................. 430 Rotating....................................... 363 CONTINUED
447
10/10/25 19:32:46 32TF0630_453
Index
VIN .................................................. 433 Windscreen

Vinyl Cleaning ................................ 380 Automatic Intermittent
Viscosity, Oil................................... 328 Wipers ..................................... 125
Cleaning ...................................... 380
W Washers ...................................... 125
Winter Tyres .................................. 365
WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii Wipers
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 74 Changing..................................... 357
Washers, Windscreen Operation .................................... 124
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 332 WMA ....................................... 207, 221
Operation .................................... 125 Worn Tyres .................................... 362
Washing .......................................... 376 Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 428
Waxing and Polishing ................... 377
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering .............. 135
Alignment and Balance ............. 363
Cleaning Aluminium Alloys ...... 377
Compact Spare ........................... 384
Nut Wrench ................................ 387
Windows
Auto Reverse .............................. 163
Cleaning ...................................... 380
Operating the Power ................. 162
Rear, Demister ........................... 133
448
10/10/25 19:32:50 32TF0630_454
EC Declaration of Conformity Content Outline
Declaration of Conformity
The Council Directive 2006/42/EC Machinery
Declare in sole responsibility that the equipment
Designation of Machinery: Pantograph Jack
Model: SNB, SJD, S2A, SAH
Type: Honda Type-A, Honda Type-B, Honda Type-C, Honda Type-D
Is herewith confirmed to comply with the requirements set out in the Council Directive 2006/42/EC.
For the evaluation of compliance with the directive, the following standards were applied:
EN1494:2000A1:2008 according to Annex I of 2006/42/EC.
Technical File Compiler: Honda Motor Europe Ltd. Aalst Office wijngaardveld1 (Noord V), 9300 Aalst, Belgium
This declaration is based on:
Third party testing performed by the Notified Body TUV Rheinland, Product Safety GmbH
Registration Number: AM50100492 0001/JAPAN (MODEL SNB, SJD, S2A).
AM50118203 0001/CHINA (MODEL SAH).
TUV Rheinland Technical Report No.: 1213870 001-002/JAPAN.
15025133 001/CHINA
Note: This declaration becomes invalid, if technical or operational modifications are introduced without the manufacturers consent.
Names and Signature: President
Type; Honda Type-A, Honda Type-B, Honda Type-C
RIKENKAKI CO.,LTD.
5-6-12 Chiyoda Sakado-shi, Saitama 350-0214 JAPAN
Type; Honda Type-D
CHANGZHOU RIKENSEIKO MACHINERY CO.,LTD.
No.1903 Zhongwu Ave. Zhonglou Changzhou, Jiangsu CHINA
Date and Place:01.12.2009 Saitama/JAPAN
10/10/25 19:32:52 32TF0630_455
10/10/25 19:32:54 32TF0630_456
10/10/25 19:32:56 32TF0630_457

Honda Jazz Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Honda Jazz Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

10/10/25 18:28:46 32TF0630_001

Symbols on labels attached to your vehicle are to remind you to

Event Data Recorders

Service Diagnostic Recorders

A Few Words About Safety

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Left-hand drive type

POWER DOOR LOCK

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Left-hand drive type

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST USB ADAPTER CABLE

STEERING WHEEL CRUISE CONTROLS2

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Right-hand drive type SUNSHADE SWITCH MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

POWER DOOR LOCK

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Right-hand drive type

AT model is shown. HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE SYSTEM VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS2 (P.238)

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety 7

Important Safety Precautions

Restrain All Children Passenger Front Airbag Off System

8 Driver and Passenger Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Dont Drink and Drive Control Your Speed

Driver and Passenger Safety 9

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many

10 Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety 11

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Of course, seat belts cannot WARNING:

Belts should not be worn with straps

Each belt assembly must only be used

12 Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Airbags Passenger Front Airbag Off System

Your vehicle also has side airbags to

Driver and Passenger Safety 13

Your Vehicles Safety Features

14 Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction 1.Close the Doors

Driver and Passenger Safety 15

Protecting Adults and Teens

2.Adjust the Front Seats In addition to adjusting the seat, you

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,

If you sit too close to the steering

16 Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

3.Adjust the Seat-Backs 4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Reclining the seat-back too

Adjust the seat-back to an

Reclining a seat-back so that the

Driver and Passenger Safety 17

Protecting Adults and Teens

18 Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

This spreads the forces of a crash

Improperly positioning the

Driver and Passenger Safety 19

Protecting Adults and Teens